Copyright notice
Copyright Notices

©Copyright LEAD Technologies, Inc. 1991-2003. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Portions of the PCDLIB32.DLL, PCDLIB.DLL, LFFPX7.DLL, and LFKODAK.DLL files contain material that is ©Copyright Eastman Kodak Company, 1996.

Portions of the LFFPX7.DLL and LFKODAK.DLL files contain material that is ©Copyright Hewlett Packard, 1996.

The "FlashPix" format uses Microsoft's OLE structured storage.

The Ultimate Toolbox For MFC was used in the development of the UI and accordingly, this software contains material that is © 1997 - 1999 DUNDAS SOFTWARE LTD., all rights reserved.

Trademarks

LEAD®, LEADViEW® and LEADTOOLS® are registered trademarks of LEAD Technologies, Inc.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Visual Basic, Visual FoxPro, and Microsoft Access are either trademarks or registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.

FlashPix™ is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.

All other brand or product names used in this online help are trademarks of their respective holders.

Address and Contact Information

LEAD Technologies, Inc.
Suite 400
1201 Greenwood Cliff
Charlotte, NC 28204

(704) 332-5532
FAX: (704) 372-8161
E-mail: support@leadtools.com
Technical support: (704) 372-9681 or support@leadtools.com
Home page: http://www.leadtools.com


Technical Support

As a registered user, free technical support is available. You must register your software to receive any technical support. Technical support is available 9 a.m. through 6 p.m. Eastern Standard Time. If you are calling by phone, please be at your computer. You can also contact us through the following methods:

Phone: 	(704) 372-9681

E-mail: 	support@leadtools.com

FAX: 	(704) 372-8161

Online Support / FAQs	http://www.leadtools.com (click on Customers Only)

Home page: 	http://www.leadtools.com

FTP:	ftp.leadtools.com

You can also contact LEAD by mail at:

LEAD Technologies, Inc.
Attn: Technical Support
Suite 400
1201 Greenwood Cliff,
Charlotte, NC 28204

Before calling technical support, please look in the online documentation and the example programs for an answer to your question.


Topic Selection

LEAD Technologies, Inc. Suite 400 1201 Greenwood Cliff Charlotte, NC 28204 Sales@Leadtools.com www.leadtools.com	(704) 332-5532 FAX: (704) 372-8161 Tech Support: (704) 372-9681
	Click this button to start a new WinHelp session to review the full line of LEADTOOLS Products.


LICENSE AGREEMENT - SINGLE-USER PRODUCT

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR AN ENTITY) AND LEAD TECHNOLOGIES, INC.("LEAD"). BY INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.  IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, REMOVE THE PRODUCT FROM YOUR HARD DRIVE AND PERMANENTLY ERASE ALL COPIES OF THE PRODUCT.  IF THE SOFTWARE HAS BEEN DELIVERED TO YOU ON PHYSICAL MEDIA, SUCH AS A CD OR DISKETTE, YOU MUST PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE WITH PROOF OF PURCHASE TO THE PLACE WHERE IT WAS PURCHASED FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID. IF THE SOFTWARE YOU HAVE DOWNLOADED IS OFFERED AS "DOWNLOAD ONLY", YOU HAVE BEEN REQUIRED TO ACCEPT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PRIOR TO DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE. LEAD DOES NOT PROVIDE REFUNDS FOR SOFTWARE OFFERED AS "DOWNLOAD ONLY".

GRANT OF LICENSE.

This License Agreement permits you to use one copy of the accompanying LEAD software program in machine readable binary object code form (the "Software"), which may include electronic documentation, on a single computer/workstation.  The Software is "in use" on a computer when it is loaded into the temporary memory (i.e., RAM or Cache) or installed into a permanent memory (e.g., hard disk, CD-ROM drive or other storage device) of that computer.  This License does not constitute a sale and does not authorize a sale of the Software or anything created thereby.  All intellectual property rights (including copyright, trademark and patent) in the Software are owned by LEAD and its suppliers and licensors, and are protected by the United States laws and international treaty provisions.  LEAD and its suppliers and licensors retain all rights not expressly granted herein.  You must treat the Software like any other copyrighted material, except that you may make one copy of the Software solely for backup or archival purposes.  You may transfer your rights under this Agreement on a permanent basis provided you transfer the license granted by this Agreement, and the Software and all associated printed materials, and you retain no copies, and the recipient agrees to all of the terms of this Agreement.

 You may not use the Software on or over a network or any other transfer device (including the Internet).  Use of the Software on more than one computer constitutes copyright infringement and may be punishable by civil fines, criminal penalties, or both.

 You may not rent or lease the Software

 You may not translate, reverse engineer, decompile or dissemble the Software, except to the extent that this restriction is expressly prohibited by applicable law.

 You may not remove any proprietary notices or labels in the Software.

 You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software or distribute printed copies of any user documentation provided in electronic format.

 You may not publicly perform or publicly display the Software.

In the event you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions of this license, your rights to use the Software will end, you shall stop using the Software, remove the Software from your computer and permanently erase all copies of the Software.  You may terminate this License at any time by destroying the Software and all copies thereof.  You may not export or reexport the Software or any underlying information or technology except in full compliance with all United States and other applicable laws and regulations.

LIMITED WARRANTY.

LEAD and its suppliers and licensors warrant to the original installer of the Software, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase, that the media on which the Software is distributed is substantially free from defects in materials and workmanship.  ANY AND ALL OTHER IMPLIED WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGMENT ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED.

REMEDIES.

Your exclusive remedy shall be, at LEAD’s sole option, (a) the refund of the amount you paid for the Software or (b) repair or replacement of the Software, provided that the defective Software is returned to LEAD (at LEAD Technologies, Inc., 1201 Greenwood Cliff, Suite 400, Charlotte, NC 28204, telephone 704-332-5532) along with proof of the date of purchase within thirty (30) days from the date of purchase.  This limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident, abuse, neglect or misapplication.  Any replacement Software will be warranted for thirty (30) days.  Except as set forth above, the Software is sold "as is," without any express or implied warranties of any kind.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES.

IN NO EVENT WILL LEAD OR ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, ECONOMIC, COVER, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, USER DOCUMENTATION, OR RELATED TECHNICAL SUPPORT, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES OR COSTS RELATING TO THE LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS, GOODWILL, DATA, TIME OR COMPUTER PROGRAMS, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  IN NO EVENT WILL LEAD’S AND ITS SUPPLIERS’ AND LICENSORS’ LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE CLAIM (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CONTRACT, PRODUCT LIABILITY OR TORT CLAIM).  BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS.

The Software and user documentation is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS AND LIMITED RIGHTS.  Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.  LEAD Technologies, Inc., 1201 Greenwood Cliff, Suite 400, Charlotte, NC 28204.

MISCELLANEOUS.

No change or modification of the License will be valid unless it is in writing and is signed by LEAD.  The provisions of this Agreement are severable; if any provision is held to be invalid or unenforceable, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.  If the Software was acquired outside the United States, then local law may apply.  Any and all disputes arising hereunder will be heard and settled exclusively in state or federal courts located in the city of Charlotte, County of Mecklenburg, North Carolina, and you hereby submit to the jurisdiction of such courts.


Installing and Uninstalling LEADViEW

Installing LEADViEW

To install LEADViEW, place the LEADViEW CD-ROM in the appropriate drive and run setup.exe from the LEADViEW CD-ROM root. Finally, follow the on-screen prompts.

Uninstalling LEADViEW

1.	Close LEADViEW if it is running.

2.	Click the Windows Start button.

3.	Choose Settings > Control Panel.

4.	Double-click the Add/Remove Programs button.

5.	Select the Install/Uninstall tab.

6.	Find LEADViEW in the list of installed programs and click on it to select it.

7.	Click the Add/Remove button.

8.	Follow the on-screen prompts.


Installation Directory

The installation procedure creates a directory tree for the LEADViEW files, and adds shortcuts to LEADViEW and the Help files to the Start Menu. You specify the root directory during installation.

The following is a list of the subdirectories in the root directory:

BORDER TILES	Contains images used as borders.

FRAMES	Contains images used as frames.

HELP	Contains the help files for LEADViEW and PhotoAlbum.

PATTERNS	Contains images used to fill the background when painting shapes or text. These images can also be used as filling styles when filling areas.

RESOURCES	Contains generated thumbnail files of the images in BORDER TILES, FRAMES, PATTERNS, TEXTURES and TUBES.

TEXTURES	Contains images used as textures.

TEMP	This is an initial swap folder used by LEADViEW to save temporary files used to swap large files throughout the application's lifetime.

TUBES	Contains images used for painting when the content type is image.


LEADViEW Requirements

The minimum requirements for using this program are:

 Microsoft Windows 95 or above.

 CD-ROM drive.

 Pentium processor or equivalent

 32 MB RAM

 255 MB of disk space

 Monitor capable of displaying 256 colors and 800x600 resolution or better.


File Formats

LEADViEW supports a number of image file formats.  Image formats can be divided into two categories: Raster formats and Meta/Vector formats.  These categories use different methods to represent the images they contain.  LEADViEW is primarily intended for use with raster images – LEADViEW can save only raster image formats.  However, you can import several types of vector image formats into LEADViEW.  When you load a vector image into LEADViEW, the image is rasterized (converted to a raster representation) and can be edited and saved to any raster format. The Batch Conversion Dialog can convert both Raster and Vector formats supported by LEADViEW to Raster formats. For more information about the supported image file formats, refer to Summary of All Supported Image File Formats.

Raster image representation

A Raster image is composed of a grid of colored dots, called "pixels".  Raster images are characterized primarily by the following:

 Spatial Resolution, refers to the size of the individual pixels.

 Dimensions, refers to the number of pixels along a picture’s width and height.

 Bit-Depth, refers to how much information is required for each pixel and determines how many different colors a picture can contain.

A color raster image is composed of tiny dots of color.  If the bit-depth of the image is n, the number of colors that can be represented by one of these dots is 2n.  So a 2 bit/pixel image can have 4 colors, a 3 bit/pixel image can have 8, etc.  The most common bit-depths for color images are 8 bits/pixel (256 colors) and 24 bits/pixel ("millions of colors" or "true color").

Because raster images are composed of discrete pixels, they appear more and more blocky as you zoom in on them.  They contain no information smaller than a unit pixel.

LEADViEW supports images with bit depths of 1-, 4-, 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bits. If you try to open an image with a bit depth other than those listed above, LEADViEW will promote or decrease the bit depth accordingly to fit within the supported bit depths. For example, if you try to open a 3-bit image LEADViEW will promote the image to a 4-bit image. If you try to open a 64-bit image LEADViEW will decrease the bit depth to 32-bits.

Note:	In the case of 48-bit images LEADViEW decreases the bit depth to 24-bits not 32-bits.

When opening a grayscale image, LEADViEW changes the image to a colored image.

Vector image representation

A vector image is composed of geometrical objects – lines, shapes, curves, etc.  These objects are stored using exact numbers that define their shape and position.  Consequently, they can be scaled to any degree.

LEADViEW can load images of certain vector formats as raster images.  Images opened in this fashion can be edited and saved just like any other raster format image.  LEADViEW does not currently support saving any vector formats.

LEADViEW does not support saving vector images. When you save a vector image LEADViEW will open the Save As dialog box so you can pick a raster image format with which to save the image.

For more information about the supported image file formats, refer to Summary of All Supported Image File Formats.


Summary of All Supported Image File Formats

Color and Grayscale

AFP Format

BMP Formats

Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

Corel Presentation Exchange Format (CMX)

DGN (DGN)

DICOM Format (DIC)

Dr. Halo (CUT)

DRaWing (DRW)

Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

DWF Format (DWF)

DWG Format (DWG)

Enhanced Compressed Wavelet Formats (ECW)

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

ESRI Shape (SHP) Format

Exif Formats (TIFF and JPG)

Flic Animation (FLC)

Gerber Format (GBR)

GIF and TIFF with LZW Compression

Icons and Cursors (ICO and CUR)

Interchange File Formats (IFF)

JBIG Format (JBG)

JPEG and LEAD Compressed (JPG, J2K, JP2, CMP, and CMW)

Kodak Digital Camera Formats (KCD and DCS)

Kodak Formats (PCD and FPX)

Macintosh Pict Format (PCT)

Microsoft Windows Clipboard (CLP)

PCX Formats (PCX and DCX)

PhotoShop 3.0 Format (PSD)

Paint Shop Pro Format (PSP)

PLT (PLT)

Portable Bitmap Utilities (PBM)

Portable Network Graphics Format (PNG)

Printer Command Language Format (PCL)

PTOCA Format (PTOCA)

Scalable Vector Graphics Format (SVG)

Scitex Continuous Tone Format

Silicon Graphics Image Format (SGI)

SUN Raster Format (RAS)

TIFF Without LZW Compression

Truevision TARGA Format (TGA)

Windows Animated Cursor (ANI)

Windows Metafile Formats (WMF and EMF)

Wireless Bitmap Format (WBMP)

WordPerfect Format (WPG)

X WindowDump (XWD)

XPicMap (XPM)

Bitonal (1-Bit)

Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA/MODCA)

Intergraph Format (ITG)

LEAD 1-Bit Format (CMP)

Miscellaneous 1-Bit Formats (MAC, IMG, and MSP)

SMP Format (SMP)

TIFF CCITT and Other FAX Formats

XBitMap Format (XBM)


Gerber Format (GBR)

The Gerber file format is a vector – based format used by GerbTools, ViewMate and CamTastic as a simple way of transferring printed circuit board information to a wide variety of devices. The Extended Gerber Format (RS-274X) handles information for defining shapes and sizes of lines and other features. This format supports Polygons, Circles, Ovals, Outlines, Arcs, Lines, Rectangles, Moire and Thermal.

The default extension used by this format is: GBR.

This file format does support layers.

LEADViEW can load the following objects: AD, AM and G commands, Circle, Line (vector, center, LowerLeft), Rectangle, Oval, Thermal, Polygon, Moire, and Arc.

For Gerber files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


JPEG and LEAD Compressed (JPG, J2K, JP2, CMP, and CMW)

LEADViEW reads and writes the following LEAD and JPEG compressed formats:

 LEAD. This is the LEAD CMP compressed format for grayscale and color images. This format results in smaller files and better image quality than industry-standard formats. In addition, LEAD also supports CMW files, which use Wavelet CMP compression in 8, 12, and 16-bit grayscale and 24-bit color.

 Progressive LEAD. This is a LEAD format that is useful for transmitting images, because the first part of the file contains the full dimensions of the image. In this format you can read and write 8 or 24 bits per pixel, where 8 is for grayscale and 24 is for color.

 Lossy JFIF. This is the JPEG File Interchange Format. LEADViEW supports YUV 4:4:4, 4:2:2, and 4:1:1 color spacing, and YUV 4:0:0 for grayscale.

 Lossless JFIF. This is the JPEG File Interchange Format. LEADViEW supports 8, 12, and 16-bit grayscale and 24-bit color spacing. Please note that not all applications support Lossless JPEG.

 Progressive JPEG. This is a JFIF format that is useful for transmitting images, because the first part of the file contains the full dimensions of the image. LEADViEW supports YUV 4:4:4, 4:2:2, and 4:1:1 color spacing, and YUV 4:0:0 for grayscale.

 Lossy JTIF. This is the JPEG Tagged Interchange Format. LEADViEW supports YUV 4:4:4, 4:2:2, and 4:1:1 color spacing, and YUV 4:0:0 for grayscale.

 Lossless JTIF. This is the JPEG Tagged Interchange Format. LEADViEW supports 8, 12, and 16-bit grayscale and 24-bit color spacing. Please note that not all applications support Lossless JPEG.

 J2K – Lossy or Lossless. This is a JPEG 2000 Format. LEADViEW supports 8, 12, and 16-bit grayscale and 24-bit color spacing. The J2K format contains only a stream of image data.

 JP2 – Lossy or Lossless. This is a JPEG 2000 Format. LEADViEW supports 8-bit grayscale and 24-bit color spacing. The JP2 format contains a stream of image data, plus extra data about the organization and contents of the file.

 TIF J2K – Lossy or Lossless. This is a Tagged Image File with JPEG 2000 Compression. This file format contains only a stream of image data. LEADViEW supports 8, 12, and 16-bit grayscale and 24-bit color spacing.

For general information, refer to Compression Using LEAD and JPEG Formats.


GIF and TIFF with LZW Compression

LEADViEW reads and writes the following LZW-compressed formats.

 GIF. This is the Graphics Interchange Format created by CompuServe for storing and exchanging color raster images.

You can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

 Animated GIF. This is a multipage GIF format that can be played as an animation by displaying the images sequentially.

You can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

 TIFF LZW. These files use the Tagged Image File Format with LZW compression. LEADViEW can read and write TIFF files that use RGB, CMYK, or YCbCr color space.

You can read the following bits per pixel, without regard for the color space: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64.

You can write the following bits per pixel, with RGB color space: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64.

You can write the following bits per pixel, with CMYK color space: 24, 32.

You can write the following bits per pixel, with YCbCr color space: 24.

You can write 16- bit grayscale.


TIFF Without LZW Compression

LEADViEW reads and writes several TIFF formats that do not require an LZW license.

TIFF is a tag-based file format designed to promote universal interchanges of digital image data. Because TIFF files do not have a single way to store image data, there are many versions of TIFF. LEADViEW supports the most common TIFF formats. The usual file extension is TIFF for single-image files, and MPT for multipage files (which can contain many images). TIFF files can contain many comment fields of various types.

LEADViEW can read and write TIFF files that use RGB, CMYK, or YCbCr color space. LEADViEW can also read and write files with PackBits compression.

LEADViEW can also read and write files with Lossless JPEG compression for 8, 12, and 16-bit grayscale and 24-bit color spacing.

LEADViEW can also read and write files with CMP Compression for 8-bit grayscale and 24-bit color.

LEADViEW can also read and write files with JBIG Compression for the following bits per pixel: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32.

You can read the following bits per pixel, without regard for the color space: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64.

You can write the following bits per pixel, with RGB color space: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64.

You can write the following bits per pixel, with CMYK color space: 24, 32.

You can write the following bits per pixel, with YCbCr color space: 24.

You can read and write 12- bit grayscale.

You can write 16- bit grayscale.


AFP Format (AFP)

The AFP format is part of IBM's document imaging system. It is a raster format, created to add enhanced formatting and indexing capabilities to documents for print applications in finance, retail, insurance and other industries. LEADViEW provides support for the user to open MODCA/PTOCA or AFP/PTOCA documents.

The default extension used by this format is: AFP.

This format is used by the IBM plug in.

This file format does not support stamps or Lossless JPEG compression, but it does support multi-page files.

For AFP files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.

Currently, LEADViEW does not save AFP files, but these files can be saved to IOCA.


BMP Formats

LEADViEW reads and writes the following BMP formats:

 Windows Bitmap (BMP). This is a file format created by Microsoft. Some BMP images are compressed with an RLE-type compression.

You can read and write the following bits per pixel, without RLE compression: 1, 4, 8, 16, 24, 32.

You can read and write the following bits per pixel, with RLE compression: 4, 8.

 OS/2 Bitmap (OS/2 BMP). These are files created on an OS/2 operating system. LEADViEW supports both 1.x and 2.x formats.

You can read and write the following bits per pixel, without RLE compression: 1, 4, 8, 24.

You can read (but not write) the following bits per pixel, with RLE compression: 4, 8.


ESRI Shape Format (SHP)

The ESRI Shape format is a vector format created by the Environmental System Research Institute. The SHP file can support point, multi-point, polygon, polyline and multi-patches. This file format has a much faster drawing speed and more editing capabilities than other data sources.

The default extension used by this format is: SHP.

This file format does not support layers, grouping objects or embedded raster objects.

LEADViEW can load the following objects: PolyLine, Point, Polygon, Multi Point, and Multi patch.

For SHP files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


Icons and Cursors (ICO and CUR)

LEADViEW reads and writes Windows Icon and Cursor files. LEADViEW is not designed as an icon editor, but this file support lets you create a bitmap from an icon or cursor, or create an icon or cursor from a bitmap.

LEADViEW supports these file formats as follows:

 Windows Icon (ICO). This is a multipage file format for storing one or more Windows icons. The background color when you read these images is always black. The size when you write these images can be no larger than 255-by-255 pixels. (Neither the width nor height can be greater than 255.)

You can read and write 1, 4, 8, 16, 24, and 32-bit, single-page or multi-page files.

 Windows Cursor (CUR). This is a file format for storing Windows cursors (mouse pointers). LEADViEW does not load or save transparency information in these files. The size when you write these images should be exactly 32-by-32 pixels.

You can read and write 1, 4, 8, and 24-bit, single-page or multi-page files.


PCX Formats (PCX and DCX)

LEADViEW reads and writes the following PCX formats:

 PCX. This is a file format created by ZSoft. This format compresses its image data with the RLE type compression.

 DCX. This is a multipage PCX format that enables a file to contain more than one image. It is handled the same as a regular PCX file, except for the multipage feature.

For PCX and DCX files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 24.


Kodak Digital Camera Formats (KCD and DCS)
Kodak Digital Camera Formats (KDC and DCS)

LEADViEW supports the following Kodak digital camera formats:

KDC

The KDC (Kodak Digital Camera) file format is a raster file format created by certain Kodak digital cameras. This format supports all versions of the KDC 40, KDC 50 and KDC 120 file types. These are created by the Kodak DC40, Kodak DC50, and Kodak DC120 digital cameras respectively.

LEADViEW can load all versions of the KDC 40, KDC 50, and KDC 120 file types, but it does not save any versions of this file format.

For KDC files you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.

DCS

The DCS (Kodak Professional Digital Camera System) file format is a raster file format created by Kodak digital cameras.

LEADViEW can load DCS files generated by the following camera types:

Camera	Type
NC2000	SCSI
EOS DCS3	SCSI
DCS 410	SCSI
DCS 420	SCSI
EOS DCS5	SCSI
DCS 460	SCSI
DCS 465	SCSI
EOS DCS1	SCSI
DCS 520	IEEE 1394
EOS D2000	IEEE 1394
DCS 315	IEEE 1394
DCS 330	IEEE 1394
DCS 560	IEEE 1394
EOS D6000	IEEE 1394
DCS 620	IEEE 1394
DCS 620x	IEEE 1394
DCS 660	IEEE 1394
DCS 660M	IEEE 1394.
LEADViEW does not save this file format.

For DCS files you can read the following bits per pixel: 16 (Grayscale) and 24 (Color).


Kodak Formats (PCD and FPX)

LEADViEW supports the following Kodak formats:

 PhotoCD (PCD). This is a common high-resolution format for images on CD-ROM. An image file can contain one or more physical resolutions, with fixed dimensions. You can choose which resolution to load, and thus control the size of the resulting bitmap.

You can read the following bits per pixel: 8, 24.

You cannot write PhotoCD files. They are read-only.

 FlashPix (FPX). The FlashPix file format was developed through the combined efforts of Eastman Kodak Company, Microsoft Corporation, Hewlett-Packard Company, and Live Picture Inc. It combines the best features of existing formats with object orientation to make the use of digital color images easier.

The format of a FlashPix file is based on compound object storage, which allows storage of various kinds of data. A FlashPix file may consist of several "pages" where each "page" has storage for a source image, non-image data in the form of comments, transform data, and a stamp or thumbnail. Each image is stored as an entire multi-resolution hierarchy where each resolution in the hierarchy differs from the next highest resolution by a factor of 2 in the x dimension and in the y dimension. Non-image data are treated as comments in FlashPix file format. Comments are used to store information pertaining to the image, not actual pixel data. This information may include image title, image subject, camera manufacturer, scan software version number, and so forth. In addition to the image itself, FlashPix files store transform information. This data indicates transformations which may be performed on the source image. By storing the transforms, the source image may be stored in its original state and transformed, using the stored transforms, at your discretion. A stamp, or thumbnail, provides a small bitmap representation of a FlashPix image.

You can read and write the following bits per pixel: 8, 24.


DICOM Format (DIC)

DICOM (DIC) files are commonly used in medical images. LEADViEW reads a broad range of DICOM formats, converting them to LEADViEW-supported bits-per-pixel as necessary. LEADViEW writes DICOM files in the LEADViEW-supported bits-per-pixel. DICOM files can contain many comment fields of various types.

You can read DICOM files as follows:

 Grayscale files in the 1- to 16-bit range are loaded as they are in the original file.

 Palettized color files in the 1- to 16-bit range are converted to 8-bit palettized or 24-bit unpalettized. By default, they are converted to 24-bit only if the palette contains more than 256 colors.

 Unpalettized color files (RGB, ARGB, or CMYK) with 1 to 16 bits per plane are converted to 24-bit RGB.

 Read multipage DICOM files by setting the page number.

You can write DICOM files as 8, 12, or 16-bit grayscale, 8-bit palettized color, or 24-bit RGB color (8 bits per plane).


Enhanced Compressed Wavelet Formats (ECW)

The Enhanced Compressed Wavelet file format is a raster file format created by the ER Mapper Company.

The ECW format uses wavelet compression, which results in small, high quality image files that can be loaded and saved quickly.

To compress ECW files the following two conditions must be met:

 The maximum sized image that can be compressed is 500MB.

 An image must be at least 128 X 128 to be compressed.

LEADViEW supports V2.0 of this file format.

For ECW files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 24.


Exif Formats (TIFF and JPG)

Exif is a standard for image files created with digital cameras and other input devices. The standard is set by the Japan Electronic Industry Development Association, and formally it is called the Digital Still Camera Image File Format Standard.

Exif files contain either uncompressed TIFF images or compressed JPEG images. In addition, these files can contain many comment fields of various types.

LEADViEW reads and writes the following Exif formats:

 TIFF. This is a tag-based file format designed to promote universal interchanges of digital image data. You can save any image size.

You can read and write 24 bits per pixel.

 JPG. This is the JPEG format with YUV 4:2:2 sampling. You can save any image size.

You can read and write 24 bits per pixel. (Grayscale is not supported.) For more information, refer to Compression Using LEAD and JPEG Formats.

An Exif JPG file can also contain a stamp (thumbnail) image, which is a small copy of the main image. The stamp size has been restricted to 160x120x24. If you are working with uncompressed (TIFF) Exif files, the stamp size is (width x height x 24 bpp), with no limitations on width and height.


Windows Metafile Formats (WMF and EMF)

The Windows Metafile (WMF and EMF) formats are vector formats that may or may not also contain a raster image.

EMF/WMF Vector files can be read as raster images.

LEADViEW can load the following objects: EMR_CREATEPALETTE, EMR_POLYBEZIER, EMR_POLYLINE, EMR_POLYBEZIERTO, EMR_POLYLINETO, EMR_POLYBEZIER16, EMR_POLYLINE16, EMR_POLYBEZIERTO16, EMR_POLYLINETO16, EMR_POLYGON, EMR_POLYGON16, EMR_POLYPOLYLINE, EMR_POLYPOLYLINE16, EMR_POLYPOLYGON, EMR_POLYPOLYGON16, EMR_SETPIXELV, EMR_LINETO, EMR_ANGLEARC, EMR_ELLIPSE, EMR_RECTANGLE, EMR_ROUNDRECT, EMR_ARC, EMR_CHORD, EMR_PIE, EMR_ARCTO, EMR_POLYDRAW, EMR_POLYDRAW16, EMR_EXTTEXTOUTA, EMR_EXTTEXTOUTW, EMR_POLYTEXTOUTA, EMR_POLYTEXTOUTW, EMR_BITBLT, EMR_STRETCHBLT, EMR_SETDIBITSTODEVICE, EMR_STRETCHDIBITS, EMR_MODIFYWORLDTRANSFORM, EMR_SETWORLDTRANSFORM, EMR_BEGINPATH, EMR_ENDPATH, EMR_SELECTCLIPPATH, EMR_FILLPATH, EMR_STROKEANDFILLPATH, EMR_STROKEPATH, and EMR_SELECTCLIPPATH.

LEADViEW can save the following objects: EMR_CREATEPALETTE, EMR_POLYBEZIER, EMR_POLYLINE, EMR_POLYBEZIERTO, EMR_POLYLINETO, EMR_POLYBEZIER16, EMR_POLYLINE16, EMR_POLYBEZIERTO16, EMR_POLYLINETO16, EMR_POLYGON, EMR_POLYGON16, EMR_POLYPOLYLINE, EMR_POLYPOLYLINE16, EMR_POLYPOLYGON, EMR_POLYPOLYGON16, EMR_SETPIXELV, EMR_LINETO, EMR_ANGLEARC, EMR_ELLIPSE, EMR_RECTANGLE, EMR_ROUNDRECT, EMR_ARC, EMR_CHORD, EMR_PIE, EMR_ARCTO, EMR_POLYDRAW, EMR_POLYDRAW16, EMR_EXTTEXTOUTA, EMR_EXTTEXTOUTW, EMR_POLYTEXTOUTA, EMR_POLYTEXTOUTW, EMR_BITBLT, EMR_STRETCHBLT, EMR_SETDIBITSTODEVICE, EMR_STRETCHDIBITS, EMR_MODIFYWORLDTRANSFORM, EMR_SETWORLDTRANSFORM, EMR_BEGINPATH, EMR_ENDPATH, EMR_SELECTCLIPPATH, EMR_FILLPATH, EMR_STROKEANDFILLPATH, EMR_STROKEPATH, and EMR_SELECTCLIPPATH.

For WMF and EMF files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 8, 24.


Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

DXF (Drawing Interchange Format) was first introduced by AutoDesk AutoCAD, and is one of the most widely used CAD/CAM/CAE applications in the world. DXF is very popular and is supported by most 3D formats on PC platforms.

A DXF file is an ASCII file containing 2D and 3D components representing a drawing. Those components are known as Entities. The DXF file can represent almost any CAD drawing using those entities, and can connect a group of entities together (such as windows, doors, etc.) and use them later in the file . The DXF file has seen many changes through the years, from version 2.6 to the latest release version 14. However, the latest release of AutoCAD still manages to open files created with any of the earlier versions.

LEADViEW supports all current variations of the DXF format (versions 2.6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14) with the following entities: 3DFACE, 3DSOLID, ARC, CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, INSERT, LINE, LWPOLYLINE, MTEXT, POINT, POLYLINE, SOLID, TEXT, and TRACE in full 2D or 3D DXF files.

For DXF files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 8.


XPicMap Format (XPM)

XPM files are used to store X Window PixMap information to disk. They are capable of storing black-and-white, grayscale, and color images. XPM stores image data in the form of ASCII text formatted as a standard C character string array.

For XPM files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 8, 24.


Interchange File Format (IFF)

IFF is a general purpose data storage format that can associate and store multiple types of data.

IFF reads RLE, and non-compressed images.

IFF writes only RLE compressed images.

For IFF files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1 - 8, 24.


Portable Bitmap Utilities (PBM)

The Portable Bitmap Utilities consists of Portable Greymap Utilities (PGM), Portable Pixmap Utilities (PPM), and Portable Anymap Utilities (PNM). Their source is the UNIX environment.

For PBM files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1.

For PGM files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 8 (Grayscale).

For PPM files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 24.


Printer Command Language Format (PCL)

The Printer Command Language vector format was developed by Hewlett-Packard, specifically to provide a means of communication between computers and printers. The PCL files contain the commands and the HP printers parse and decode those commands. This format also includes HPGL. For more information about HPGL, refer to PLT.

LEADViEW supports version 3.0 and 5.0 of this file format.

The default extensions used by this format are: PRN, PRT, PLT, HGL, HPG and PGL.

This format is used by Visual PCL and AutoVue, redtitan EscapE and AutoVue.

This file format does not support layers or grouping, but it does support embedded raster objects. LEADViEW supports all objects.

LEADViEW can load the following objects:

For PCL:

Raster Support (RLE, TIFF, DeltaRow, Adaptive, UnEncoded), Text support, Rectangle support.

For HPGL: IN, DF, PG, SP, PU, PD, PA, PR, LT, AA, AR, CI, EA, ER, EW, RA, RR, WG, FT, LB, CP, DT, SI, SR, SC, IP, BR, BZ, PE, IR, and TR.

LEADViEW can save the following objects:

For PCL: Vertex, Line, Rectangle, Polyline, Polybezier, Polygon, Ellipse, Circle, Arc, Text, EllipticalArc, Pie, Chord, Polydraw, and Raster

For: HPGL: IN, PU, PA, RA, PD, CI, AA, WG, SP, LT, and FT.

For PCL files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


Dr Halo (CUT)

Dr. Halo files are device-independent images. The image is stored in one file (.CUT) and the palette is stored in a separate file (PAL). If the image has no corresponding .PAL file, it is considered a grayscale image.

For CUT files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 8.


Microsoft Windows Clipboard (CLP)

CLP stands for Microsoft Windows Clipboard. This file format is used to store the contents of the clipboard to disk. The clipboard is an area of memory shared by the Windows operating system, and it is a simple mechanism for exchanging data between applications.

For CLP files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 24.


X Window Dump (XWD)

XWD stands for X Window dump. This file format is used to store and restore screen window images. Two versions of this file exist, the X10 window dump and the X11 window dump. These versions differ slightly in the format of the data (i.e. headers and bits per pixel).

The version X10 XWD file cannot have more than 8bpp image data.

For the version X10 XWD files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8.

For the version X11 XWD files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 16. 24, 32.


Flic Animation (FLC)

The Flic file is an animation file created by Auto-desk. This file supports image data but not audio data.

The frames of this file can be of 8bpp image data. The maximum number of frames is 4000.

This file has two versions. The FLI file types support 320 X 200 images with a maximum of 64 colors per image. The FLC file types support up to 64k X 64k images with 256 colors per image.

For FLI files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 8.

For FLC files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 8.


Windows Animated Cursor (ANI)

ANI is an animated cursor (animated mouse pointer). This file format is used for reading and storing Windows Animated Cursors. The LEADViEW filter does not support transparency information within these files.

Multipage ANI files will have an icon on each page.

For ANI files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 24.


DRaWing (DRW)

DRW()DRaWing) is a native format used in the popular Micrografx Designer CAD/CAM/CAE application for the Windows operating system.

LEADViEW supports versions 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the DRW file format.

For DRW files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)

Computer Graphics Metafile is a format used for the exchange of vector and bitmap data. LEADViEW supports versions 1, 2 and 3 of CGM, as well as the Binary data-encoding format of CGM.

For CGM files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


PLT (PLT)

PLT (also HPGL) is the standard language for printing line drawings created by Hewlett-Packard. HPGL is supported by many CAD programs, charting programs and word processors.

LEADViEW supports HPGL and HPGL/2.

For HPGL files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 4.

For HPGL/2 files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 4.


DWF Format (DWF)

DWF is a binary file format used by AutoDesk AutoCAD for storing DWG files on the World Wide Web. DWF is a 2D, vector-based description of drawings and illustrations. LEADViEW supports the following DWF object types: Polyline, Polygon, Ellipse (Filled and outlined), Text and Image.

For DWF files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


DWG Format (DWG)

DWG is a binary file format used by AutoDesk AutoCAD. It can contain 2D or 3D objects and offers compression and a CRC check for internal data.

LEADViEW supports DWG 13, 14 and 15 files with the following object types: TEXT, BLOCK, INSERT, MINSERT, VERTEX_2D, VERTEX_3D, VERTEX_MESH, VERTEX_PFACE, VERTEX_PFACE_MESH, POLYLINE_2D, POLYLINE_3D, ARC, CIRCLE, LINE, POINT, 3DFCE, POLYLINE_PFACE, POLYLINE_MESH, SOLID, TRACE, ELLIPSE, SPLINE, MTEXT and LWPOLYLINE.

LEADViEW supports the object types listed above, as well as, layers and the grouping of objects. Embedded raster objects are not supported.

For DWG files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


DGN (DGN)

DGN (also RDL) is a file format common to Intergraph's MicroStation and Interactive Graphics Design System (IGDS) CAD applications running on Intergraph workstations and PCs.

LEADViEW supports DGN versions 1, 2 and 3.

For DGN files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


JBIG Format (JBG)

JBIG (JBG) is an industry standard lossless compressed file format for bi-tonal (black and white), grayscale and color images.  LEADViEW’s JBIG support is comprehensive and handles the various flavors and bits per pixel as defined by the specification including progressive, where you can store and send multiple representations of images at different resolutions without any extra storage overhead.  In order to achieve highest compression ratios available by the JBIG format, LEADViEW also takes full advantage of all the functional blocks of this robust standard including the Adaptive Arithmetic Encoder, the Adaptive Template Block, the Typical Prediction Block, the Resolution Reduction Block, and the Deterministic Prediction Block.  Saving images in a JBIG format results in smaller image files sizes when compared to other industry standard compressed formats such as CCITT G3 or G4.

For JBIG files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32.


Paint Shop Pro Format (PSP)

Paint Shop Pro (PSP) is the format developed by JASC Software and supported by Paint Shop Pro. There are three versions of this format V5, V6, and V7. V7 includes support for Vector Shape layers.

The PSP format stores images as uncompressed, RLE compressed, or LZ77 compressed. Thumbnails stored in a PSP file are compressed using JPEG compression. LEADViEW supports all these compression types.

For PSP files, you can read V5, V6 and V7 files, as raster images, in the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, and 24 (uncompressed, RLE compressed or LZ77 compressed).

For PSP files, you can write V7 files in the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, and 24 (uncompressed or RLE compressed).


PhotoShop 3.0 Format (PSD)

Photoshop 3.0 (PSD) is the format produced by the Adobe Photoshop graphics editor.

For PSD files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 8, and 24.

You can also read and write layers to this file with the following bits per pixel: 8 (GrayScale), 24, and 32.


Portable Network Graphics Format (PNG)

PNG (Portable Network Graphics) is a replacement for the GIF format. It is a full-featured (non-LZW) compressed format intended for widespread use without legal restraints.

You can read the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 16, 24, 32.

You can write the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 24, 32.

LEADViEW supports reading (but not writing) interlaced PNG files.


Truevision TARGA Format (TGA)

Truevision TGA (TARGA) is a file format created by Truevision Inc. LEADViEW supports all uncompressed and RLE compressed TGA file formats.

For TGA files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel in either uncompressed or RLE compressed form: 8, 16, 24, 32.


Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

PostScript Raster (Encapsulated PostScript). These files are used primarily on PostScript printers. These printers usually offer more variety of fonts and higher resolution than standard laser printers. EPS files will work on any PostScript compatible printer and any end-user application that supports placement of EPS files in its work space.

The image that you read from an EPS file can be either a PostScript raster image, an embedded TIFF image, or an embedded WMF image. The image that you write to an EPS file is always a PostScript raster image.

For a PostScript raster image, you can read the following bits per pixel: 1, 8.

For an embedded TIFF image, you can read the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 16, 24, 32.

For an embedded WMF file, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.

You can write only an 8-bit PostScript raster image, which is grayscale.


PTOCA Format (PTOCA)

The Presentation Text Object Content Architecture (PTOCA) is the data object used in document processing environments for representing text, which has been prepared for presentation. Each file contains one or more pages of text and is always included as part of a document in a MODCA file. Each page may reference a PTOCA Overlay, which is merged with the text as a background.

There is no default extension.

This format originated at IBM.

This file format does not support QFactor, progressive loads and saves, stamps or Lossless JPEG compression, but it does support multi-page files.

For PTK files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.

LEADViEW does not save PTK files.


SUN Raster Format (RAS)

SUN Raster (RAS) is a format native to Sun UNIX platforms.

For RAS files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 24, 32.


Wireless Bitmap Format (WBMP)

The Wireless Bitmap file format is a 1-bit format used to send graphical information to a variety of handsets. It is terminal independent and describes only graphical information.

For Wireless Bitmap files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 1.

For Wireless Bitmap files, you can write the following bits per pixel: 1.


WordPerfect Format (WPG and VWPG)

The WordPerfect (WPG) format can contain vectored or raster images.

Raster Images

For WPG files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8.

Vector Images

VWPG (Vector Word Perfect Graphics) is a vector format created by COREL. There are two versions (version1 and version2) of the VWPG file format. Each has its own format and specifications. LEADViEW supports only version2 of this format.

The default extension used by this format is: WPG.

This file format does support layers and embedded raster objects, but not grouping.

LEADViEW can load the following objects: Poly Curve, Rect, Vertical Line, Horizontal Line, Poly Line, Text, and Image.

For VWPG files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


Macintosh Pict Format (PCT)

Macintosh Pict (PCT) files are produced using Macintosh QuickDraw, and are used in desktop publishing and imaging applications.

PCT Vector files can be read as raster images. LEADViEW supports multiple page files when reading PCT images as raster images.

For PCT files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 1, 4, 8, 16, 24.


Scitex Continuous Tone Format (SCT)

The Scitex Continuous Tone file format was developed by Scitex and is used for high-end image processing. The SCT/CT files are used primarily to store CMY and CMYK color space for the image. For saving the SCT file format, LEADViEW saves it as CMY instead of CMYK. This maintains the image quality, since the conversion from RGB to CMYK will result in some loss of data.

The default extensions used by this format are: SCT and CT.

This file format does not support progressive loads and saves, multi-page files, stamps, or Lossless JPEG compression.

For SCT/CT files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24, 32.

For SCT/CT files, you can write the following bits per pixel: 24.


Silicon Graphics Image Format (SGI)

The SGI file formats was developed at Silicon Graphics, and is used for black and white, gray-scale and color images. LEADViEW supports both uncompressed SGI and RLE compressed SGI.

For SGI files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 8, 24, 32.


SMP Format (SMP)

The SMP file contains a 1-bit raster bitmap. It may be uncompressed, compressed using CCITT Group 3 or compressed using CCITT Group 4. LEADViEW supports loading and saving for all these types. The SMP file format was created by Xionics.

The default extension is .SMP.

For SMP files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 1.

For SMP files, you can write the following bits per pixel: 1.


TIFF CCITT, TIFF-FX and Other FAX Formats

LEADViEW supports reading and writing of the following 1-bit formats that are commonly used in FAX transmissions:

 TIFF CCITT. These are compressed TIFF files that are commonly used for FAX transmission and document imaging.

 TIFF CCITT Group 3. These are TIFF CCITT files in a format that is more advanced and more compressed than TIFF CCITT. LEADViEW supports both 1-dimension and 2-dimension variations of this format.

 TIFF CCITT Group 4. These are TIFF CCITT files in a format that is more advanced and more compressed than TIFF CCITT Group 3.

 CALS Raster(Type 1, 2, 3, and 4). These are CCITT Group 4 CALS raster files. CALS is a United States government standard. CALS3 are multipage files.

 IOCA (ICA). This is the Image Object Content Architecture developed by IBM. LEADViEW supports these files in an MO:DCA wrapper with embedded 1-bit CCITT Group 3 or Group 4 images. LEADViEW also supports IOCA files without an MO:DCA wrapper.

 WinFax Group 3. This is a FAX format created by Delrina for Group 3 support.

 WinFax Group 4. This is a FAX format created by Delrina for Group 4 support.

 FAX Group 3. This is a raw FAX format (without a header) for Group 3 support. LEADViEW supports both 1-dimension and 2-dimension variations of this format.

 FAX Group 4. This is a raw FAX format (without a header) for Group 4 support.

 AWD. This is a Microsoft FAX format.

LEADViEW supports reading and writing of the following fax format:

 TIFF-FX. These are Internet Fax files developed and used by Xerox. This format supports several types of compression, which allows the user or developer to use the compression that best suits his or her needs. In addition, this file format can be extended as the need arises. The following modes are supported:

Minimal Black and White: This mode uses binary MH compression (T.4).

Extended Black and White: This mode uses binary MH, MR and MMR compression (T.4 and T.6).

Lossless JBIG Black and White: This mode uses JBIG compression (T.85, T.82).

Lossy Color and Grayscale: This mode uses JPEG compression (T.42, T.81).

Lossless Color and Grayscale: This mode uses JBIG compression (T.43, T.82).

For TIFF-FX files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1, 3, 8, and 24.


LEAD 1-Bit Format (CMP)

LEAD 1BIT is a proprietary 1-bit LEAD compressed format that has better compression and performance than other 1-bit formats.

You can read and write files in this format.


XBitMap (XBM)

XBM is a monochrome bitmap format in which data is stored as a C language data array. It is primarily used for the storage of cursor and icon bitmaps, for use in the X graphical user interface.

For XBM files, you can read and write the following bits per pixel: 1.


Image Object Content Architecture Format (IOCA/MODCA)

The Image Object Content Architecture format was developed by IBM. This architecture provides a consistent way to represent images, including conventions and directions for processing and interchanging image information. LEADViEW supports single and multi-page files in a MO:DCA wrapper with embedded 1-bit CCITT, Group 3 or Group 4 images, IBM MMR and uncompressed IOCA. LEADViEW also supports IOCA files without the MO:DCA wrapper. LEADViEW loads and saves all these formats.

The default extension used by this format is: ICA.

This file format does not support stamps or Lossless JPEG compression, but it does support multi-page files. For this file format, LEADViEW supports CCITT, G3(1D, 2D), CCITT G4, IBM MMR compression, and uncompressed files. LEADViEW does not support ABIC, RL4, and Color Compression used by OS/2.

For IOCA files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 1.

For IOCA files, you can write the following bits per pixel: 1.


IntergraphRLE (ITG)

Intergraph is a monochrome bitmap format developed by Intergraph. LEADViEW supports the RLE and CIT versions of this file format.

The default extensions used by this format are: ITG and CIT.

This file format does not support stamps or Lossless JPEG compression. For this file format, LEADViEW supports CCITT G4 and RLE compression.

Currently LEADViEW writes only the ITG format.

For ITG and CIT files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 1.

For ITG files, you can write the following bits per pixel: 1.


Miscellaneous 1-Bit Formats (MAC, IMG, and MSP)

LEADViEW supports reading and writing of the following 1-bit formats:

 MacPaint (MAC). These Macintosh Paint files are commonly used for monochrome clip art.

 GEM Image (IMG). These files are native to the Graphical Environment Manager developed by Digital Research.

 Microsoft Paint (MSP). These files from early versions of Windows are used for black-and-white drawings and clip art.

 JBIG. JBIG compression was designed primarily for bi-level images, however it can also compress grayscale and color images.


Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)
Scalable Vector Graphics Format (SVG)

The Scalable Vector Graphics file format is an Internet standard vector format for describing two-dimensional graphics in XML. SVG supports vector graphic shapes, images, and text.

The default extension used by this format is: SVG.

This file format does not support layers, but it can contain embedded raster objects.

LEADViEW can load the following objects: Group, Rectangle, Circle, Ellipse, Line, Polyline, Polygon, Path (Poly Draw, Pie, Chord, Elliptical arc, Arc), Text, and Image.

For SVG files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


File Formats: Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)
Corel Presentation Exchange Format (CMX)

The Corel Presentation Exchange file format is the presentation format of the CorelSuite applications. It is a recording of the display primitives of an application to a display interface. The CMX format supports Intel and Motorola binary formats.

The default extension used by this format is: CMX.

LEADViEW supports versions 5, 6, 7, and 8 of this format.

This file format does support layers. LEADViEW does not support RImage.

LEADViEW can load the following objects: BeginLayer 11, BeginPage 9, BeginParagraph 99, BeginProcedure 17, BeginTextGroup 72, BeginTextObject 70, BeginTextStream 20, CharInfo 101, Characters 102, DrawImage 69, DrawChars 65, Ellipse 66, EndEmbedded 23, EndGroup 14, EndLayer 12, EndPage 10, EndParagraph 100, EndSection 18, EndTextGroup 73, EndTextObject 71, EndTextStream 21, JumpAbsolute 111, PolyCurve 67, Rectangle 68, SetCharStyle 85, SimpleWideText 86, and TextFrame 98.

For CMX files, you can read the following bits per pixel: 24.


Multipage File Formats

LEADViEW supports the following file formats, which support multipage files. These formats are:

 Animated Gif

 CALS3

 DICOM (Read Only)

 DCX

 FlashPix

 IOCA/MODCA

 Tiff(MPT)


Introduction

LEADViEW is an easy to use yet powerful and full-featured image editor.  With LEADViEW, you can create, modify, enhance and retouch images.  Use LEADViEW to:

 Import images from scanners, digital cameras and screen captures.

 Save or convert images to any of over 60 image formats.

 Process images for color correction and enhancement using a wide variety of filters and effects.

 Edit or retouch images with powerful painting and drawing tools.

 Print images using an interactive visual print layout system.

 Generate image-maps to be used in web pages, using a visual image-map editor.

LEADViEW is ideal for users interested in image processing, digital painting, photo enhancement, web image tuning, color enhancement, capturing images from different sources like (screen, scanner, and digital video cameras), and sharing images with others through email.

LEADViEW is very helpful when dealing with different file formats as it can open and save a huge number of formats, and it has the ability to convert them in batches from one format to another.

Corrupted images can be automatically enhanced using the wide variety of functions included in LEADViEW.

Working with colors is easily done as LEADViEW supports HSB, CMY, CMYK, LAB, RGB, and HLS color spaces. When working with palletized images LEADViEW helps you edit image colors or apply pre-defined and commonly used palettes.

With LEADViEW digital painting tools, you can create, enhance, and edit images with ease, using the wide variety of available tools, and the unlimited flexibility provided by the tools' settings.

The size and position for printing an image can be customized using LEADViEW.

All these and more can be made easily through this intuitive and flexible working environment.

The LEADViEW comes in WIN32 editions so that it can run under the following environments:

Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows ME
Windows NT
Windows 2000
Windows XP


Dropping an Image into LEADViEW Workspace

LEADViEW can act as a drop target for image files.  This means that you can click and drag image file icons from Windows Explorer or any program that supports drag-and-drop and drag onto any of the following:

 Anywhere on LEADViEW’s main window.

 LEADViEW’s executable file icon in Windows Explorer.

 A shortcut icon for LEADViEW’s executable file.

Dropping a file onto the LEADViEW icon or shortcut icon will open LEADViEW and load that file.

When you use the LEADViEW Browser, you can drag a thumbnail into the workspace to open its image.

Notice that dropping an image over another will not overlay them; dropping will open a new window for the dropped image wherever it is dropped.

When dropping images in LEADViEW the Abort Dialog will appear enabling you to cancel the dropping operation, you will see the image being loaded in LEADViEW at the center of the Abort Dialog.

See Also

Abort Dialog


Rollup Snapping

When working with LEADViEW workspace you can attach a Color Rollup Dialog, Gradient Rollup Dialog, and/or a Cursor Info Rollup Dialog to the edge of the Tools Options Tabs. Once attached, folding and unfolding the Tools Options Tabs will move the rollup window attached with the Tools Options Tabs.

See Also

Tools Options Tabs

Color Rollup Dialog

Gradient Rollup Dialog

Cursor Info Rollup Dialog


Compression Using LEAD and JPEG Formats

Compression of color and grayscale graphic image files is useful because the files are big. They can range from 100 kilobytes to more than 200 megabytes. Compressing the image files does the following:

 Dramatically decreases the storage requirements

 Improves the input and output speed within a system

 Improves the transmission speed over networks or phone lines

The LEAD CMP compression format was created by LEAD Technologies, Inc., and it delivers a much smaller file size and better image quality than other compression techniques, including JPEG.

LEAD's CMP file format allows for decompression to a 24-bit medium at 24-bit color and to an 8-bit medium at 8-bit color without sacrificing image quality. This eliminates the need to convert all images to 8 bits in order to support the low end users or to save one 8-bit file and one 24-bit file. The result is one much smaller file size that can be viewed on a 24-bit video card at 24-bit true color, as well as on an 8-bit VGA card at 256 colors.

LEAD's CMW format uses Wavelet CMP compression. Currently, 24-bit color images and 8, 12 and 16-bit grayscale images are supported in this format.

Summary of All Supported Image File Formats describes the LEAD and JPEG compression formats, in addition to other formats that LEADViEW supports.

The amount of compression is controllable, allowing the compressed image quality to match the needs of your application. Compression Quality Factors describes how the quality factors are used.

JPEG Compliant

LEADViEW is fully JPEG compliant. Any file using compression that is compliant with the JPEG Interchange File Format can be viewed and converted.

4 and 1-bit Images

JPEG and LEAD CMP compression are intended for use with high resolution images, and they are impractical for use with 4- or 1-bit images.

You can use the CCITT, LEAD 1-bit, RLE, LZW, and ZIPLib compression methods available in many of LEADViEW supported formats.

8- and 24-bit Images

Using JPEG and LEAD CMP compression, color images are 24 bits per pixel, and grayscale images are 8 bits per pixel.

Compressing the original 24-bit image will result in a smaller file size and higher quality than compressing an optimized 8-bit color image.

You can use RLE, LZW, and ZIPLib compression methods available in many of LEADViEW supported formats.


Compression Quality Factors

You can specify a quality factor when saving an image file in the formats of LEAD, LEAD Wavelet, JPEG, and JPEG 2000. The quality factor is a number that determines the degree of loss in the compression process. You can set a value from 2 to 255, where 2 is the highest quality and 255 is the most compression.

When you want to produce lossless JPEG files use a quality factor of 0.

For LEAD CMP compression only, you can also use one of the following enhanced options:

Q Factor	Predefined options for LEAD only
-1	Perfect quality 1 This option compresses all colors of a 24-bit file and maintains the quality of the original image at a smaller file size. As the name suggests, there is no visual loss of color at this setting.
-2	Perfect quality 2 This will produce a smaller file size than Perfect Quality 1 while maintaining similar quality.
-3	Quality far more important than size This option removes colors not noticed by the human eye. Most viewers cannot tell the difference between an image compressed at this level and the original image.
-4	Quality more important than size While more colors are removed, most of them are colors or shades that are close to one another. The compressed image will appear very much like the original image. It will take some study to see the difference.
-5	Quality and size equally important This option provides the highest compression while maintaining good image quality. Try this option first, then move up or down the list accordingly to obtain acceptable compression size and image quality.
-6	Size more important that quality (sharp) This option is recommended for images that have sharp edges. For example, an image that has a text overlay or an image with many straight lines. While it creates a larger file than the next option, it retains better edges.
-7	Size more important than quality (less tiling) This option produces less tiling in the image than the previous options. However, it may distort text or straight lines. It is a good option for image database applications.
-8	Maximum compression keeping quality This option provides maximum compression while maintaining as high as possible image quality.
-9	Maximum compression This option gives maximum compression. It is equivalent to a Quality factor of 255.
To set the compression quality factor, use the Qfactor edit box of the Save As Dialog.

See Also

Save As Dialog


LEADViEW Main Window

The main display window and each opened image window contain a standard horizontal Windows title bar across the top of the window.  The main window's title bar has a program icon at the far left, followed by: the application name, the name of the active image, an asterisk (if the image has been changed since it was last saved), and the image's current zoom factor. On the far right there are the standard Windows Minimize, Maximize/Restore, and Close buttons.  The items on the taskbar can be used for the following:

 Closing LEADViEW: double-click on the application icon [image] or click the Close button [image] to close the application.

 Minimizing: click the Minimize button [image] to make the application window reduce to a button on the windows taskbar.  Click LEADViEW's taskbar button to restore the main display window and bring it to the front of any other running windows programs.

 Maximizing: double-click on the title-bar or click the Maximize button [image].

 Restoring: click the Restore button [image] to go from overlapped-window to full-screen (Maximize) and back (Restore).

 System Menu, click on the application icon [image] to bring up a standard windows system menu, which allows you to move, resize, and close the window.

When an image window is maximized, it expands to fill the main window's workspace.  When minimized, the image window is reduced to a small floating title-bar.  Clicking on the minimized image window restores it to its previous state.

Workspace

The workspace is the largest portion of LEADViEW's main window, and serves as a container for opened images.  It lies between the title bar and the status bar, and left of the Tools Options Tabs.  To change the size of the workspace, drag a border or corner of the main window.

Status Bar

Short descriptions of menu commands and buttons can be found in the Status Bar, located along the bottom of the LEADViEW window.

When the cursor is over a button or menu item, the status bar displays information on its use.

To display or hide the status bar, choose View > StatusBar (select or clear its checkbox).


Image View Window

Each open image has its own window in the LEADViEW workspace.  The window containing the image you are editing is called the Active Image View Window.  When you click on any of the open image windows, or select an image window from the list of open images in the window menu, it becomes the active window and is moved in front of any other open image windows.  You can also cycle through the open images by pressing <Ctrl> + <F6>.

Arranging Image View Windows

The open image windows can be moved by dragging the title bar, resized by dragging the borders or corners of the window, and maximized or minimized by using the buttons in the window’s title bar.

All of the open image windows can be arranged in the workspace by using the Window menu’s Tile, Cascade, and Arrange commands.

Scrolling Images

The image window for an open image may be too small to display the entire image at its current zoom settings. When this happens, Scrollbars will appear on the right and/or bottom edges of the image window.  The button shaped slider object in the scrollbar is called a Thumb, and can be repositioned along the scrollbar to change the current view of the image.  The thumb’s position on the scrollbar reflects what portion of the image is currently visible; e.g. you can view the far right side of an image by moving the thumb on the horizontal scrollbar to the far right.  The thumb can be moved in one of the following ways:

 Click on the thumb and drag it directly to the new position on the scrollbar, or

 Click the arrow buttons at each end of the scrollbar to move the thumb by a small increment, or

 Click between the thumb and an arrow button to move the thumb by a larger increment.

Scrollbar response to the following cursor keys:

 Press <Page Up>, <Page Down>, <Arrow Up>, or < Arrow Down> to scroll vertically.

 Press <Home>, <End>, < Arrow Left>, or < Arrow Right> to scroll horizontally.

You can also use the Arrow Tool, Pan Window to scroll the image.

Caption

The Caption is the text written in the title bar. This consists of the image file name, followed by an asterisk ‘*’ if the image has been modified, followed by the current zoom level.

 Document Icon

Located at the far left, double-click on it to close LEADViEW.

See Also

Pan Window


Pan Window

The Pan Window is a small window that displays a scaled view of a bitmap, which is also being displayed in the main window at a size that would require scrolling.  The Pan Window maintains the image’s aspect ratio.  In the Pan Window, a colored rectangle is displayed to indicate the portion of the image currently being displayed in the main window.

There are two ways to activate this window:

 Click and hold the Pan Window Activator Button at the lower-right corner of the image view window (between the horizontal and vertical scrollbars). This is the button with the four arrows on it.

 Using the Arrow Tool [image], click and hold the left mouse button anywhere within the image in the image view window.

The pan window appears in the lower-right corner of the main display. It remains visible and active as long as the left mouse button is pressed. You can pan the main image by dragging the rectangle in the pan window. This rectangle represents the visible area of the main image.

The pan window will disappear once the mouse button is released.

See Also

Image View Window


Using Keyboard Shortcuts

A shortcut provides an easier way to run a specific command or handle a menu item, than using the mouse.

LEADViEW supports the following shortcuts:

Main Menu Keyboard Shortcuts

Tools Toolbar Shortcuts

Tools Options Tabs Shortcuts

Rollup Dialogs Shortcuts

Browse Dialog Shortcuts

Stitch Dialog Shortcuts


Main Menu Keyboard Shortcuts

Open LEADViEW menus and choose the following commands using the keyboard shortcuts listed below:

Command	Keyboard Shortcuts
File Menu	Alt + F
New	Ctrl + N
Open	Ctrl + O
Save	Ctrl + S
Save As	F12
Print	Ctrl + P
Edit Menu	Alt + E
Undo	Ctrl + Z
Redo	Ctrl + Y
Cut	Ctrl + X
Copy	Ctrl + C or Ctrl + Ins
Paste as New Image	Ctrl + V
Paste as New Selection	Ctrl + E or Shift + Ins
Paste Into Selection	Ctrl + Shift + E
Clear	Del
Erase	Shift + Del
View Menu	Alt + V
Full Screen	Ctrl + Shift + U
Fit To Window	Ctrl + Shift + F
Normal Viewing	Ctrl + Shift + N
Zoom In	Ctrl + Num Plus
Zoom Out	Ctrl + Num Minus
Status Bar (check box)	Ctrl + U
Cursor Info Dialog (check box)	Ctrl + 2
Image Menu	Alt + I
Flip	Ctrl + L
Mirror	Ctrl + M
Rotate	Ctrl + R
Shear	Ctrl + Shift + R
Crop To Selection	Ctrl + T
Resize	Ctrl + Shift + Z
Image Information	Ctrl + Shift + G
Effects Menu	Alt + T
Color Menu	Alt + C
Brightness	Ctrl + Shift + B
Contrast	Ctrl + Shift + C
Hue	Ctrl + Shift + H
Saturation	Ctrl + Shift + Q
Gamma	Ctrl + G
Color Resolution	Ctrl + Shift + O
Customize Palette	Ctrl + Shift + P
Selection Menu	Alt + S
Select All	Ctrl + A
Select None	Ctrl + D
Invert	Ctrl + Shift + I
Feather	Ctrl + H
Hide Marquee	Ctrl + Shift + M
Float Selection	Ctrl + Shift + Ins
Defloat Selection	Ins
Window Menu	Alt + W
Help Menu	Alt + H
Contents	F1
What’s This	Shift + F1


Tools Toolbar Shortcuts

You can activate a specific tool in LEADViEW Tools Toolbar using the keyboard shortcuts listed below:

	Tool	Keyboard Shortcuts
	Arrow Tool	Q
	Eyedropper Tool	W
	Mover Tool	E
	Transform Floater Tool	R
	Paintbrush Tool	T
	Line Shape Tool	Y
	Rectangle Shape Tool	U
	Rounded Rectangle Shape Tool	I
	Ellipse Shape Tool	O
	Polygon Shape Tool	P
	Curve Shape Tool	A
	Rectangle Selection Tool	S
	Rounded Rectangle Selection Tool	D
	Ellipse Selection Tool	F
	Polygon Selection Tool	G
	Free Hand Selection Tool	H
	Surface Selection Tool	J
	Border Selection Tool	K
	Color Selection Tool	L
	Surface Fill	Z
	Border Fill	X
	Color Replace	C
	Text Tool	V
	Zoom Tool	B
See Also

Tools Toolbar


Tools Options Tabs Shortcuts

You can activate a specific tab in Tools Options Tabs by using keyboard shortcuts listed below:

Tab Name	Keyboard Shortcuts

Paintbrush Options Tab	1

Shape Options Tab	2

Selection Options Tab	3

Fill Options Tab	4

Text Options Tab	5

See Also

Tools Options Tabs


Rollup Dialogs Shortcuts

You can activate a specific Rollup dialog by using keyboard shortcuts listed below:

Dialog Name	Keyboard Shortcuts

Color Rollup	6

Gradient Rollup	7

Cursor Info Rollup	8


Stitch Dialog Shortcuts

You can activate a specific command in Stitch Dialog main menu by using keyboard shortcuts listed below:

Command	Keyboard Shortcuts
File Menu	Alt + F
Exit & Export	Ctrl + X
Export To HTML Map Mapper	Ctrl + M
Exit	Alt + F4
View Menu	Alt + V
Normal (1:1)	Ctrl + N
Zoom In	Ctrl + Num Plus
Zoom Out	Ctrl + Num Minus
Fit Always	Ctrl + F
Image Menu	Alt + I
Attributes	Ctrl + Shift + P
Stitch	Ctrl + S
Rotate 90°	Ctrl + Shift + R
Clear All	Ctrl + Shift + Del
Object Menu	Alt + O
Move To Previous	Ctrl + P
Move To Next	Ctrl + E
Flip Vertically	Ctrl + V
Flip Horizontally	Ctrl + H
Rotate 90° CCW	Ctrl + L
Rotate 90° CW	Ctrl + R
Scale Normal (1:1)	Ctrl + Shift + N
Scale To Fit	Ctrl + Shift + F
Edit	Ins
Delete	Del
Duplicate	Ctrl + D
Align Auto Arrange	Ctrl + A
Align Left Top	Ctrl + Num 7
Align Center Top	Ctrl + Num 8
Align Right Top	Ctrl + Num 9
Align Left Center	Ctrl + Num 4
Align Centered	Ctrl + Num 5
Align Right Center	Ctrl + Num 6
Align Left Bottom	Ctrl + Num 1
Align Center Bottom	Ctrl + Num 2
Align Right Bottom	Ctrl + Num 3
Order Bring To Front	Ctrl + Shift + Z
Order Send To Back	Ctrl + Z
Tiling Options	Ctrl + T
Help Menu	Alt + H
Help Topics	F1


Browse Dialog Shortcuts

You can activate a specific command in the Browse Folder Dialog main menu by using keyboard shortcuts listed below:

Command	Keyboard Shortcuts
File Menu	Alt + F
View Menu	Alt + V
Select All	Ctrl + A
Refresh	F5
Thumbnail Menu	Alt + T
Open	Enter
Move	Alt + M
Copy	Alt + C
Delete	Del or Shift + Del
Rename	F2
File Information	Alt + Enter
Help Menu	Alt + H or F1


LEADViEW Menus

Menu commands can be displayed by either:

 Clicking the menu in the menu bar, or

 Pressing the <Alt> key plus the underlined letter in the menu’s title. For example, to display the File menu, press <Alt> + <F>.

Menu commands can be selected or executed by:

 Clicking the item in the menu, or

 Pressing the <Alt> key plus the underlined letter in the menu’s title, then pressing the letter underlined in the menu item. For example, to select the menu item File > Open, press <Alt> + <F> + <O>, or

 Using the cursor or the < · >, and < · > keys to highlight a menu item, and then pressing the Enter key.

LEADViEW has two primary menus:

 Main Menu

 Context Menu


Main Menu

LEADViEW’s commands are grouped into several categories.  The main headings for each of these categories appear in the menu bar, at the top of the workspace, just below the title bar.  Click a menu heading to open the menu and choose a command. The commands you use frequently are also displayed on the toolbar(s).

Note:	Menu items that appear in gray either do not apply or are unavailable.  The layout of the menus can change, depending on whether no images are opened, one image is opened, or multiple images are opened.

The available menus in the LEADViEW main menu are:

File Menu

Edit Menu

View Menu

Image Menu

Effects Menu

Color Menu

Selection Menu

Window Menu

Help Menu


File Menu

The following table lists the command names and their description of the file menu:

	Command	Description
	New	Displays the New Dialog, which lets you create new images.
	Open	Displays the Open Dialog, which lets you open images that are available in your file system.
	Close	Closes the active image. If the image has changed you will be prompted to save the image.  See also Save As Dialog
	Close All	Closes all images. If an image has changed you will be prompted to save the image. See also Save As Dialog
	Save	Saves the active images using the same file name and image format. If the image is newly created and hasn’t been saved yet, or if the image’s file is read-only, the Save command will display the Save As Dialog. Note: LEADViEW can open vector files, but it cannot save vector files.  See also File Formats
	Save As	Displays the Save As Dialog, which lets you save newly created images and save your images with new names and formats.
	Send	Displays the Message Dialog, which lets you e-mail the current active image.
	Browse	Displays the Browse Folder Dialog, which lets you preview images in a selected folder.
	Batch Conversion	Displays the Batch Conversion Dialog, which lets you convert a batch of image files, with different formats, to new files in the folder you select, with the new file format that you choose. You can also convert pages in a multi-page image file to separate single image files, with the file format you select.
	Import	Imports an image from other devices, like the Screen Capture, TWAIN, and Video Capture.
	Export	Exports the image to the HTML Map Creator, the Web Tuner or as wallpaper.
	Preferences	Displays Preferences that serve the LEADViEW application.
	LEADViEW Plug-ins	Opens other LEADTOOLS products installed on your computer. LEADViEW comes with PhotoAlbum, and Converter Pro.
	Print	Prints a single image, stretched to fit the entire page. The Print Dialog that appears, lets you customize printer settings, click OK to print or Cancel to abort printing.  Note: The Print Preview Dialog lets you customize position, size or orientation before printing.
	Print Preview	Displays the Print Preview Dialog, which lets you see how the image will look when printed, and send the print command.
	Page Setup	Displays the Page Setup Dialog, which lets you select the page orientation, the margin width, the paper size, and change printer options.
	Recently Opened Image(s)	Lists the most recently opened files in LEADViEW. This list appears before the Exit option. Select one of these images to open it. If LEADViEW fails to open an image for any reason, it’ll be removed from the list. You can abort opening the image using the Abort Dialog.
	Exit	Ends your working session and exits LEADViEW. You may alternatively press <Alt>+<F4>. If there are any unsaved images, a dialog will appear asking if you want to save your work. If you choose cancel, the exiting process is aborted.


Screen Capture Sub Menu

LEADViEW lets you capture the entire screen, or some small part of the screen, including controls, menus, toolbars, areas, etc. These captured images can be used to create new images in the LEADViEW workspace. When capturing areas, LEADViEW can capture rectangular, elliptical, polygonal and freehand (user-outlined) areas.  When capturing multiple images, LEADViEW allows you to specify the number of captures to perform, the time interval between captures, and the delay, if any, before each capture starts.

When you choose one of capture commands (except for Wallpaper capture), LEADViEW waits for the HotKey specified in the Capture Options Dialog to be pressed. When the HotKey is pressed, the capture process begins. Depending the capture option selected, LEADViEW will:

 show crosshairs and the info window (in an Area-Selection Capture), or

 show Object-Highlight Rectangles (in an Object Selection Capture), or

 immediately perform the capture.

Most menu items in LEADViEW become unavailable while LEADViEW is capturing. During the capture process you may minimize LEADViEW and / or switch to any other running application.

After the capture has been performed, you will see a new image view window containing the captured image in the LEADViEW workspace. The image is ready for you to save or edit.

Screen capture generally involves:

 selecting capture from the file menu,

 hiding or minimizing LEADViEW,

 bringing the application you wish to capture from into focus,

 pressing the LEADViEW capture hotkey,

 picking visible objects or outlining the area to capture.

The following table lists the command names of the Screen Capture sub menu (File -> Import -> Screen Capture) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Full Screen	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to capture the entire screen.
	Active Window	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to capture the entire active window.
	Active Client	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to capture just the client portion of the active window. (That is, all of the active window except the title bar and borders.)
	Selected Object	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to capture the selected object. After you press the capture hot key, move the mouse cursor over the object to highlight it.  When the cursor is over the desired object, click to capture it.
	Selected Area	Shows the different types of areas that can be selected and captured. Select the shape of the area you want to capture, and then press the hot key. Crosshairs and the info window will be displayed. Outline the desired area by clicking and dragging the mouse. When the area has been drawn, it will be captured. For more information, refer to Selected Area.
	Window Under Cursor	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to capture the window under the mouse cursor.
	Menu Under Cursor	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to capture the menu directly under the mouse cursor.
	Wall Paper	Performs an immediate capture of the current wallpaper. If there is no wallpaper set, nothing is captured.
	Mouse Cursor	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to capture the current mouse cursor.
	Stop Capturing	Aborts the capture process. Capture can also be aborted by pressing the "Cancel key" which can be customized in Capture Options Dialog. The "Capture key" is <Esc> by default.  For more information, refer to the Capture Options Dialog
	Capture Options	Shows the Capture Options.  For more information, refer to the Capture Options Dialog
See Also

Capture Options Dialog


Selected Area Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Selected Area sub menu (File -> Import -> Screen Capture -> Selected Area) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Rectangle	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to let you select a rectangular area. The area is selected by clicking on one corner and dragging to the opposite corner of the bounding-box for the shape. The area is captured when the mouse button is released.
	Rounded Rectangle	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to let you select a rounded rectangle shaped area. The area is selected by clicking on one corner and dragging to the opposite corner of the bounding-box for the shape. The area is captured when the mouse button is released.
	Ellipse	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to let you select an elliptical area. The area is selected by clicking on one corner and dragging to the opposite corner of the bounding-box for the shape. The area is captured when the mouse button is released.
	Triangle	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to let you select a triangular area. The area is selected by clicking on one corner and dragging to the opposite corner of the bounding-box for the shape. The area is captured when the mouse button is released.
	Polygon	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to let you select a polygonal area. The shape is selected by clicking at each of the corner points of the polygon and double-clicking to close the shape. The area is captured when the mouse button is double-clicked to close the polygon.
	Free Hand	Causes the capture function, when invoked, to let you select an irregularly shaped area. The area is selected by clicking and dragging to draw the shape of the area boundary.  The freehand shape is closed when the mouse is released, and the area is captured.


Capture Options Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Capture Options sub menu (File -> Import -> Screen Capture -> Capture Options) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	General	Displays the Capture Options Dialog, which lets you set up general capture options.
	Object Selection	Displays the Capture Selected Object Options Dialog, which lets you set up object selection options.
	Area Selection	Displays the Capture Area Options Dialog. Use this dialog to set up area selection options.


TWAIN Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the TWAIN sub menu (File -> Import -> Twain) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Acquire	Displays the selected TWAIN device’s own dialog box (e.g. Scanner Setup), which lets you setup the image source device, and acquire an image. After the image has been acquired, the dialog will close and a new image view window will appear in LEADViEW’s workspace with the acquired image. LEADViEW can import images from Scanners, Digital Cameras, or any other device that uses a TWAIN interface.
	Select Source	Displays the Select Source Dialog, which lets you select the image source device from which to acquire the image (e.g. Scanner).


Video Capture

 Displays the Video Capture Dialog, which lets you import images from a video-capturing device.


HTML Map Creator

 Displays the HTML Map Creator Dialog, which lets you create an HTML Map over an image.


As Wallpaper Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the As Wallpaper sub menu (File -> Export -> As Wallpaper) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Tile	Sets the current image as tiled wallpaper. LEADViEW will create another copy of the image in the folder set by the user through the General Preferences Dialog.
	Center	Sets the current image as wallpaper, placing the center of the image at the center of the screen. LEADViEW will create a copy of the image in the folder set by the user in the General Preferences Dialog.
	Stretch	Sets the current image as wallpaper, sizing it to fit the screen. LEADViEW will create a copy of the image in the folder set in the General Preferences Dialog. Notice that this option is not available on Windows 95 and Windows NT.


Web Tuner Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Web Tuner sub menu (File -> Export -> Web Tuner) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	JPEG	Displays the JPEG Web Tuner Dialog, which lets you tune images to target the WEB.
	PNG	Displays the PNG Web Tuner Dialog, which lets you tune images to target the WEB.
	GIF	Displays the GIF Web Tuner Dialog, which lets you tune images to target the WEB.


Preferences Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Preferences sub menu (File -> Preferences) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	General Preferences	Displays the General Preferences Dialog, which lets you set the number of files to be included in the recent files list, the application’s swap file location, the wallpaper folder, the undo/redo levels, and some other options.
	File Format Associations	Displays the Image File Format Associations Dialog, which lets you set the image file formats to be opened using LEADViEW.
	Directories	Displays the Directories Dialog, which lets you set the image folders to use for Textures, Tubes, Patterns, Frames, and Borders.
	Email Profile	Displays the Email Profile Dialog, which lets you create an e-mail profile (required to send an email).  For more information, refer to the Message Dialog


Edit Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Edit menu and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Undo	Reverses the last change(s) performed on the active image, including individual paint strokes, an effect or filter applied, the selection of a region, etc. Note: The number of operations you can undo depends on the settings in the General Preferences dialog.
	Redo	Re-applies a change that has been undone.
	Cut	Copies the active selection to the Windows clipboard and removes the active selection from the image, replacing it with the selection background color. The background color can be set on the Selection Options Tab. Cutting a floater copies the floater to the Windows clipboard and removes it without affecting the underlying image. The cut selection can then be pasted into the same image or a new image in LEADViEW, or into any windows application that can paste image data from the clipboard. If there is no active selection, the entire image will be cut and placed into the clipboard. Note: you can remove a selection’s information without storing it on the clipboard using Clear.
	Copy	Places a copy of the active selection into the windows clipboard. The copied selection can then be pasted into the same image or a new image in LEADViEW, or into any Windows application that can paste image data from the clipboard. If there is no active selection, the entire image will be copied and placed into the clipboard.
	Paste	Places image data that has been stored on the Windows clipboard (via Copy or Cut) into a new image or into the active image. For more information, refer to the Paste sub menu.
	Clear	Removes any selection outlines on the image. Clearing a floater simply removes the floater without affecting the underlying image. Clearing a floater that is being transformed removes the floater without affecting the underlying image, and exits the deformation mode.  For more information, refer to Tools Options Tabs
	Erase	Replaces the active selection with the selection’s background color. The selection background color can be set on the Selection Options Tab.
	Empty	Empties the contents of the windows clipboard or the undo/read buffer. See the Empty sub menu.


Paste Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Paste sub menu (Edit -> Paste) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	As New Image	Creates a new image, just large enough to completely contain the image on the clipboard. The selection background color, set on the Selection Options Tab is used as the new image's background color.  The image data on the clipboard is copied onto this new image, and a new image view window is opened in the LEADViEW workspace to display it.
	As New Selection	Places the image data on the clipboard on the active image as a currently selected floater. This floater can then be dragged to any position in the image.  The underlying image is not modified.
	Into Selection	Places the image data on the clipboard on the active image as a floater, inside of and clipped by the currently active selection.  The resulting floater becomes the currently active selection and may then be dragged to any position in the image.  The underlying image is not modified.


Empty Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Empty sub menu (Edit -> Empty) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Undo Buffer	Empties the contents of the Undo/ Redo buffer and frees any memory / disk space used by it.
	Clipboard	Frees the resources used by the windows clipboard. This action removes the clipboard contents, making the data unavailable for pasting. Putting images or portions of images into the windows clipboard consumes system resources. You may see a performance slowdown if you put very large images into the clipboard.


View Menu

The following table lists the command names of the View menu and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Full Screen	Displays the image against the Image Window Background that covers the screen. To close the Full Screen Preview, click on the image or press the <Esc> key on the keyboard. Note: when in full screen preview mode, all functions are disabled except scrolling and Pan Window.
	Fit To Window	Toggles the fit to window mode On or Off. When zoom to fit mode is On, the image will be resized automatically to fill the available space. For example if you resize the image view window, the image will be resized automatically. This mode is canceled when Zoom In, Zoom Out, or Zoom to Normal options are applied (as well as using the zoom tool).
	Normal (1:1)	Shows the image at actual size; i.e., one pixel in the image corresponds to 1 pixel on the screen, with no zoom applied.
	Zoom In	Increases the zoom level. LEADViEW supports zooming in up to 32 times (3200%). The current zoom level appears in the title bar of the image window, immediately following the image’s name. Zoom level is the amount of magnification applied to the displayed image.  You may want to zoom in to work on small details, or zoom out to see more of a large image.
	Zoom Out	Decreases the zoom level. LEADViEW supports zooming out to 1/100 of the original image size. The current zoom level appears in the title bar of the image window, immediately following the image’s name. Zoom level is the amount of magnification applied to the displayed image.  You may want to zoom in to work on small details, or zoom out to see more of a large image.
	Toolbars	Shows or hides the toolbars supported by the LEADViEW application. For more information, refer to the Toolbars sub menu.
	Status Bar	Displays or hides the Status Bar.  For more information, refer to the LEADViEW Main Window
	Cursor Info	Displays or hides the Cursor Info Rollup Dialog.


Toolbars Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Toolbars sub menu (View -> Toolbars) and gives a brief description of each command:

Please note that due to the size of some of the images in this table, the toolbar images are displayed above the Command and Description information. This is done to make viewing the image, the Command and the Description easier.

	Command	Description
	File	Shows or hides the file toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Edit	Shows or hides the edit toolbar.
	Command	Description
	View	Shows or hides the view toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Image	Shows or hides the image toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Effects	Shows or hides the effects toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Color	Shows or hides the color toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Selection	Shows or hides the selection toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Window	Shows or hides the window toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Help	Shows or hides the help toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Tools	Shows or hides the tools toolbar.


Image Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Image menu and gives a brief description or each command:

	Command	Description
	Flip	Reverses the top and bottom of an image. The resulting image is a "mirror image" of the original. Text on the image becomes "Upside-down". If the image contains a floating selection, only the floater is reversed and the underlying image remains unchanged. If the image contains a non-floating selection, the entire image, including the selection is reversed. Applying both flip and mirror has the same effect as rotating the image 180 degrees.
	Mirror	Reverses the left and right sides of an image. The resulting image is a "mirror image" of the original, Text on the image becomes "Backward". If the image contains a floating selection, only the floater is reversed and the underlying image remains unchanged. If the image contains a non-floating selection, the entire image, including the selection is reversed. Applying both flip and mirror has the same effect as rotating the image 180 degrees.
	Rotate	Displays the Rotate Dialog, which lets you rotate the active image around its center.
	Shear	Displays the Shear Dialog, which lets you distort the original rectangular shape of the image into a parallelogram.
	Deskew	Rotates an image in order to straighten it. This is typically used to automatically straighten scanned images. Deskew is intended for images, such as scanned documents, that are mainly horizontal lines of text. The results are less predictable with other types of images.
	Add	Adds borders or frames. For more information, refer to the Add sub menu
	Crop	Crops the image. For more information, refer to the Crop sub menu.
	Canvas Resize	Displays the Canvas Resize Dialog which lets you change the dimensions of the image.
	Resize	Displays the Resize Dialog, which lets you change the active image’s size and resolution.
	Histogram	Displays the Histogram Dialog, which lets you see a chart of the image’s histogram.
	Image Information	Displays the Image Information Dialog which contains information about the current image.


Add Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Add sub menu (Image -> Add) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Border	Displays the Add Border Dialog, which lets you place a border outside or inside an image.
	Frame	Displays the Add Frame Dialog, which lets you place a frame image on your active image.


Crop Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Crop sub menu (Image -> Crop) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	To Selection	Deletes everything except the smallest rectangular area that entirely contains the selection, when used with irregularly shaped selections, and reduces the image size to the height and width of that area. This command becomes available whenever an image contains a non-floating selection. (It is not available for a floating selection.) This is the same result as changing the canvas size to a smaller height and / or width using custom offsets. LEADViEW allows you to specify the cropping rectangle explicitly. If a scanned image is to be cropped and otherwise modified, it is better to crop the image first, if possible. This reduces the memory requirements and can speed up processing, by eliminating extraneous areas of color. This will also give you better color corrections.  For more information, refer to the Canvas Resize Dialog, Selection Tools
	Auto Trim	Displays the Auto Trim Dialog, which lets you trim blank space from the edges of an image.


Effects Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Effects menu and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Blur	Displays a sub menu containing several options for blurring the image. For more information, refer to the Blur sub menu.
	Noise	Displays a sub menu containing several options for adding or removing noise to or from the image. For more information, refer to the Noise sub menu.
	Sharpen	Displays a sub menu containing several options for sharpening the image. For more information, refer to the Sharpen sub menu.
	Calculations	Displays a sub menu containing several options for calculating a new image, based on one or more original images. For more information, refer to the Calculations sub menu.
	Distort	Displays a sub menu containing several options for distorting the image. For more information, refer to the Distort sub menu.
	3D Effects	Displays a sub menu containing several options for adding three-dimensional effects to the image. For more information, refer to the 3d Effects sub menu.
	Artistic	Displays a sub menu containing several options for adding artistic effects to the image. For more information, refer to the Artistic sub menu.
	Texture	Displays a sub menu containing several options for adding texture to the image. For more information, refer to the Texture sub menu.
	Pixelate	Displays a sub menu containing several options for working with cells or tiles within an image. For more information, refer to the Pixelate sub menu.
	Edge	Displays a sub menu containing several options for detecting or highlighting edges in the image. For more information, refer to the Edge sub menu.
	Spatial Filters	Displays a sub menu containing several options for applying spatial filters to the image. For more information, refer to the Spatial Filters sub menu.


Blur Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Blur sub menu (Effects -> Blur) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Motion Blur	Displays the Motion Blur Dialog, which lets you create an illusion of movement in the active image.
	Radial Blur	Displays the Radial Blur Effect Dialog, which lets you spin the active image pixels around a selected center point.
	Zoom Blur	Displays the Zoom Blur Effect Dialog, which lets you blur the active image along radial lines, starting from the selected center point.
	Gaussian Blur	Displays the Gaussian Filter Dialog, which lets you smooth or blur the active image by applying a Gaussian filter.
	Anti Alias	Displays the Anti Alias Dialog, which lets you apply an anti-aliasing filter to the active image.
	Average	Displays the Average Dialog, which lets you remove noise from the entire image.


Noise Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Noise sub menu (Effects -> Noise) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Median	Displays the Median Dialog, which lets you remove or minimize noise.
	Despeckle	Detects the edges in an image (areas where significant color changes occur) and blurs all of the selection except those edges. This blurring removes noise while preserving detail. It does that by removing 1-pixel dots from the image. Typically, this method is used to clean up scanned images (such as FAX images). Despeckle can shrink speckles which are larger than 1 pixel. Larger speckles can sometimes be completely removed by running the filter more than once.
	Add Noise	Displays the Add Noise Dialog, which lets you spread noise over an image or over a selection.
	Max	Displays the Max Dialog, which lets you contract dark objects.  Use it to make dark lines or text on a light background thinner.
	Min	Displays the Min Dialog, which lets you expand dark objects.  Use it to make dark lines or text on a light background thicker.


Sharpen Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Sharpen sub menu (Effects -> Sharpen) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Unsharp Mask	Displays the Unsharp Mask Dialog, which lets you sharpen the active image.
	Sharpen	Displays the Sharpen Dialog, which lets you increase or decrease the sharpness of the active image.


Calculations Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Calculations sub menu (Effects -> Calculations) and gives a brief description:

	Command	Description
	Combine	Displays the Combine Dialog, which lets you combine two images using different mathematical operations to create a new image.
	Multiply	Displays the Multiply Dialog, which lets you increase or decrease the brightness in the image by multiplying the colors in the active image.
	Add Bitmaps	Displays the Add Bitmaps Dialog, which lets you add or average groups of bitmaps.
	Stitch	Displays the Stitch Dialog, which lets you combine one or more images into a single new image.


Distort Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Distort sub menu (Effects -> Distort) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Free Hand Wave	Displays the Hand Wave Dialog, which lets you distort the active image using a wave you have drawn.
	Wind	Displays the Wind Effect Dialog, which lets you create thin lines, directed by the wind angle, on the active image.
	Polar	Displays the Polar Effect Dialog, which lets you convert the active image from rectangular to polar coordinates and vice versa.
	Zoom Wave	Displays the Zoom Wave Effect Dialog, which lets you distort the active image using a wave zoomed from the specified center.
	Radial Wave	Displays the Radial Wave Effect Dialog, which lets you distort the active image using a wave radiating from the specified center.
	Swirl	Displays the Swirl Effect Dialog, which lets you produce a swirl pattern by spinning the active image around the specified center point, using the specified rotation angle.
	Wave	Displays the Wave Effect Dialog, which lets you distort the active image with two perpendicular waves at any rotation and with any wave type you select.
	Wave Shear	Displays the Wave Shear Effect Dialog, which lets you shear the active image, horizontally or vertically, using a wave you have drawn.


3D Effects Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the 3D Effects sub menu (Effects -> 3D Effects) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Emboss	Displays the Emboss Dialog, which lets you create the appearance of a three-dimensional relief surface using the active image.
	Punch	Displays the Punch Effect Dialog, which lets you warp the active image by pinching it toward the center or punching it outward.
	Ripple	Displays the Ripple Effect Dialog, which lets you warp the active image in concentric rings around the specified center.
	Bending	Displays the Bending Effect Dialog, which lets you warp the active image along the inside or outside of an arc pattern around a center point.
	Cylindrical	Displays the Cylindrical Effect Dialog, which lets you warp the active image to a cylindrical shape.
	Spherize	Displays the Spherize Effect Dialog, which lets you warp the active image into a 3D spherical shape, around the specified center point.


Artistic Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Artistic sub menu (Effects -> Artistic) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Impressionist	Displays the Impressionist Effect Dialog, which lets you apply an impressionist painting effect on the active image.
	Oilify	Displays the Oilify Dialog, which lets you give the active image an oil painting appearance.


Texture Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Texture sub menu (Effects -> Texture) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Underlay	Displays the Underlay Dialog, which lets you combine two images so that one appears to be an underlying texture for the other.


Pixelate Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Pixelate sub menu (Effects -> Pixelate) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Pixelate	Displays the Pixelate Effect Dialog, which lets you divide the active image to rectangular or circular cells.
	Mosaic	Displays the Mosaic Dialog, which lets you simulate the appearance of an image built from colored tiles.
	Picturize	Displays the Picturize Dialog, which lets you create a tiled version of an image, where each tile, or "cell" in the resulting image is a small version of another image.


Edge Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Edge sub menu (Effects -> Edge) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Detect	Displays the Edge Detector Dialog, which lets you apply an edge detection filter to the active image.
	Erosion	Displays the Erosion Dialog, which lets you erode, or contract, dark objects.  Use it to make dark lines or text on a light background thinner.
	Dilation	Displays the Dilation Dialog, which lets you dilate, or expand, dark objects.  Use it to make dark lines or text on a light background thicker.
	Contour	Displays Contour Filter Dialog, which lets you create a contour diagram of the image in a variety of styles.  Contours lie along lines in the image where the color gradient, or the rate of color change, is high perpendicular to the detected edges, but relatively low along or parallel to the detected edges.


Spatial Filters Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Spatial Filters sub menu (Effects -> Spatial Filters) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Gradient	Displays the Gradient Dialog, which lets you assign colors to detected edges. The detected edges lie where the color in the original image changes most rapidly when moving in the specified direction.
	Laplacian	Displays the Laplacian Dialog, which lets you specify which of 6 pre-defined Laplacian filters to apply.  The filters labeled "Filter 1", "Filter 2", and "Filter 3" are omnidirectional filters which detect edges in all directions, while the remaining three filters, "Diagonal", "Horizontal", and "Vertical" detect edges based on their strength in the given direction.
	Sobel	Displays the Sobel Dialog, which lets you specify whether to apply "Horizontal" or "Vertical" Sobel edge detection.
	Prewitt	Displays the Prewitt Dialog, which lets you specify whether to apply "Horizontal" or "Vertical" Prewitt edge detection.
	Shift and Difference	Displays the Shift and Difference Dialog, which lets you specify whether to apply "Horizontal", "Vertical", and "Diagonal" edge detection.
	Line Segment	Displays the Line Segment Dialog, which lets you specify whether to apply "Horizontal", "Vertical", "Left to Right diagonal" or "Right to Left diagonal" edge detection.


Color Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Color menu and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Invert	Inverts the colors of an image, creating a negative of that image. If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the effect will ignore any selection, embedded or floating, and the effect will be applied to the entire image.
	Intensity Detect	Displays the Intensity Detect Dialog, which lets you change the Red, Green, and Blue components of each pixel to either 0 (minimum) or 255 (maximum), depending on the specified range.
	Solarize	Displays the Solarize Dialog, which lets you invert the colors in the image which are brighter than a specified threshold.
	Posterize	Displays the Posterize Dialog, which lets you apply a poster effect to the whole image or a selected region.
	Adjust	Displays a sub menu that contains options for adjusting contrast, hue, saturation, etc. For more information, refer to the Adjust sub menu.
	Transform	Displays a sub menu that contains options generating grayscale images and changing color resolution. For more information, refer to the Transform sub menu.
	Remap	Displays a sub menu that contains options remapping intensities and hues. For more information, refer to the Remap sub menu.
	Histogram	Displays a sub menu that contains options for modifying the image based on the histogram. For more information, refer to the Histogram sub menu.
	Split Channels	Separates an image into its component color channels. The colors in an image can be represented in a number of ways.  The most common way to specify a color is to specify the individual RGB values, or Red, Green, and Blue components of that color.  You can also break down a color into its Hue, Saturation, and Brightness components.  These various ways to describe colors are different "color models".  LEADViEW supports the following color models:  RGB – Red, Green, Blue  CMYK – Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black  HSB – Hue, Saturation, Brightness  HLS – Hue, Luminosity, Saturation  CMY - Cyan, Magenta, Yellow Alpha (not really a color model, just a way to obtain the alpha channel from the image) An image can be split into its individual channels of color information.  For example, if a 24-bit RGB image is split, the result will be three 8-bit grayscale images, each of which contains the amount of Red, Green, or Blue in the original image.  In such a case, the red channel would appear dark gray or black in areas where the original image contained very little red, and it would appear light gray or white in areas where there is a lot of red.   Wherever the original image is white, all three RGB channels would be very bright. After performing the Split Channels command, the original image remains unchanged and a new image window is created for each of the original image’s color channels.  Each of these channel images is given the name of its channel color – that name appears in the image window’s title bar. Note: Alpha splitting is available only on 16-bit, and 32-bit images, and it creates a grayscale image from the source image‘s alpha channel data. For more information, refer to the Split Channels sub menu.
	Merge Channels	Merges separate color component images into a single colored image. For more information, refer to the Merge Channels sub menu.
	Unique Colors	Determines how many unique colors there are in the image.  This can be useful when determining how many bits per pixel you need when decreasing the bit-depth of your image.  For more information, refer to the Color Resolution Dialog
	Customize Palette	Displays the Customize Palette Dialog, which lets you create your own palettes that can be set later using the Color Resolution Dialog.


Adjust Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Adjust sub menu (Color -> Adjust) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Brightness	Displays the Brightness Dialog, which lets you increase or decrease the brightness of all pixels in the image.
	Contrast	Displays the Contrast Dialog, which lets you brighten bright pixels and darken dark pixels.
	Hue	Displays the Hue Dialog, which lets you shift all the pixels in an image (or in a selection) around a color wheel by the same amount.
	Saturation	Displays the Saturation Dialog, which lets you shift the color-intensity of all pixels in an image or in a selection.
	Gamma	Displays the Gamma Adjustment Dialog, which lets you change the brightness of image pixels, primarily in the mid-range intensities.
	Balance Colors	Displays the Balance Colors Dialog, which lets you redistribute the RGB values of the active image.


Transform Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Transform sub menu (Color -> Transform) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Halftone	Displays the Halftone Dialog, which lets you convert 4-, 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bit images to 1-bit images, with a specified pattern rotation.
	Color Resolution	Displays the Color Resolution Dialog, which lets you change the bit depth of your image. LEADViEW supports images with bit depths of 1, 4, 8, 16, 24, and 32.
	Gray Scale	Displays the Gray Scale Dialog, which lets you convert an active image to a gray scale bitmap without changing its resolution.
	Colored Gray	Displays the Convert to Colored Gray Dialog, which lets you convert an active image to a gray scale bitmap, then enhances the color components. This can be used to give images a sepia appearance by adding a blue or brown color.


Remap Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Remap sub menu (Color -> Remap) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Intensity	Displays the Remap-Intensity Dialog, which lets you change the active image's intensity values.
	Hue	Displays the Remap-Hue Dialog, which lets you change the active image's hue values.


Histogram Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Histogram sub menu (Color -> Histogram) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Equalize	Changes the intensity of pixels so that brightness levels are more evenly spread out throughout the range of possible intensities. This is accomplished by linearizing the number of pixels in an image.  This can be used to bring out the detail in dark areas of an image. If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the effect will ignore any selection, embedded or floating, and the effect will be applied to the entire image.
	Stretch Intensity	Increases the contrast in an image by centering, maximizing and proportioning the range of intensity values. The lightest and darkest pixels in the image become as light and dark as possible, while maintaining their original color. This tends to increase the contrast in low contrast, overly dark, or over-exposed images. If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the effect will ignore any selection, embedded or floating, and the effect will be applied to the entire image.
	Local Equalize	Displays the Local Histo-Equalize Dialog, which lets you linearize the number of pixels locally in the active image, based on the specified color space.
	Contrast	Displays the Histo-Contrast Dialog, which lets you make bright pixels brighter, and dark pixels darker.


Split Channels Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Split Channels sub menu (Color -> Split Channels) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	RGB	Splits an image into its RGB – Red, Green, and Blue - color components.
	CMYK	Splits an image into its CMYK – Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black - color components.
	HSB	Splits an image into its HSB – Hue, Saturation, and Brightness - color components.
	HLS	Splits an image into its HLS – Hue, Light, and Saturation - color components.
	CMY	Splits an image into its CMY – Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow - color components.
	Alpha	Extracts the Alpha channel information into a new bitmap.


Merge Channels Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Merge Channels sub menu (Color -> Merge Channels) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	RGB	Displays the RGB Merge Dialog, which lets you select the RGB components to merge.
	CMYK	Displays the CMYK Merge Dialog, which lets you select the CMYK components to merge.
	HSB	Displays the HSB Merge Dialog, which lets you select the HSB components to merge.
	HLS	Displays the HLS Merge Dialog, which lets you select the HLS components to merge.
	CMY	Displays the CMY Merge Dialog, which lets you select the CMY components to merge.


Selection Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Selection menu and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Select All	Sets the current selection to cover the entire active image.
	Select None	Deselects the current selection. Once a selection or floater has been deselected, there is no longer an active selection and the selection marquee disappears. If a floater is deselected, the floater is pasted into the underlying image at its current position. After deselecting, operations that were previously confined to the selection can now operate on the entire image.
	Invert	Inverts the selected and unselected portions of the image. The entire unselected portion of the image becomes the new selection and the originally selected portion becomes unselected.  Use this when specifying the part of the image you don’t want to select is easier than specifying the portion you do want to select.  For example, if you wish to select the foreground of an image, where the background is a single color, you can use the surface selection Tool to select the background and then invert the selection.
	Scale	Displays the Selection Scale Dialog which lets you scale the selection, making it larger or smaller.
	Resize	Displays the Selection Resize Dialog which lets you resize the selection by the specified number of pixels.
	Include/Exclude Color	Displays the Selection Include/Exclude Color Dialog which lets you include or exclude a specific color within the selection.
	Feather	Displays the Selection Feather Dialog, which lets you soften the edges of the selection.
	Hide Marquee	Toggles the visibility of the marquee on and off without deselecting the active selection.
	Load	Loads from a disk or Alpha channel. For more information, refer to the Load sub menu.
	Save	Saves to a disk or Alpha channel. For more information, refer to the Save sub menu.
	Float Selection	Floats the current selection. When you float a selection, a copy of the selected image pixels are temporarily placed "above" the image in a floater. Any operations on the selection are actually performed on this floater. A selection is the portion of the image, which is surrounded by the selection border. A selection is "embedded" in the image. Cutting or deleting the selection will cause the selection area to be filled with the selection background color. Modifying the selection (painting, using a filter, etc) will change the underlying image. After floating a selection, cutting or deleting the selection or otherwise modifying it (painting, filtering, etc) will leave the original image intact. When the selection extends out of bitmap boundaries, it will be clipped to the bitmap before it can be floated. If there is no intersection between the selection and the bitmap, the selection can’t be floated. A selection can also be floated by:  Moving the selection with the Mover Tool.  Pasting a selection by choosing Edit > Paste > As New Selection  Pasting a selection by choosing Edit > Paste > Into Selection  Creating a Selection then choosing Image > Flip  Creating a Selection then choosing Image > Mirror See also Selection Tools
	Defloat Selection	Returns a floater selection to a standard non-floating selection. If the floater is transformed, this option will merge a copy of current floater image into the background. A selection can also be defloated by:  Performing an operation that modifies the current selection.  Removing a selection by selecting none.  Deleting a floater by choosing Clear. For more information, refer to the Selection Tools


Load Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Load sub menu (Selection -> Load) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	From Disk	Loads a selection from disk. From the Open dialog that appears, browse to the folder containing the .LVS file which was previously saved by LEADViEW. Then, click the open button to load the selection into the active image.
	From Alpha Channel	Loads any saved selection or mask from the image’s alpha channel. The alpha channel should have a saved selection or mask. If the alpha channel is empty, the whole image will get selected.


Save Sub Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Save sub menu (Selection -> Save) and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	To Disk	Saves selections and masks to a special LEADViEW .LVS ("LEADViEW Selection") format.  Once you have saved a selection to an .LVS file, the selection can be loaded into any image.  From the standard Save as Dialog that appears, browse to the directory where you would like to save the file. Enter the desired file name, and click OK to save or Cancel to abort.  This command is not available when there is no active selection.
	To Alpha Channel	Saves a selection or mask to an alpha channel. When you save a selection to an alpha channel, LEADViEW stores the selection within the image.  Only images with a color resolution of 16-bits, 32-bits or 64-bits can store a selection as an alpha channel. A single channel contains information about the color elements in an image. For example, an RGB image contains a red channel, a green channel, and a blue channel. An alpha channel is an additional channel that saves information about a mask or selection you create.  This menu item is not available when there is no active selection. Note: The Alpha channel can be saved along with the image, if the image format allows saving an alpha channel. A warning will be displayed if you try to save to a format that doesn’t support alpha channels.  For more information, refer to the Color Resolution Dialog


Window Menu

The following table lists the command names of the Window menu and gives a brief description of each channel:

	Command	Description
	Cascade	Moves and resizes all of the opened image windows so that they overlap in a stacked fashion. Each window’s position is slightly offset down and to the right of the one below it.  Use cascade when you want to view all of the image view windows’ title bars.  For more information, refer to the Image View Window
	Tile	Moves and resizes all of the open image windows so that they all become visible and completely cover the workspace without overlapping.  For more information, refer to the Image View Window
	Arrange Icons	Arranges all of the minimized Image View Window icons into a grid.
	Opened File Image(s)	Contains a list of all opened image view windows. The active image has a check beside it. Choose an image to make it active and to bring it in front of the other windows.  For more information, refer to the Image View Window


Help menu

The following table lists the command names of the Help menu and gives a brief description of each command:

	Command	Description
	Contents	Displays the help file.
	What’s This	Switches to context Help mode.  The cursor changes and becomes an arrow with a question mark. Click on an item to find the specific help for it. You may click on menu items, toolbars, rollup windows,…etc. Context help is also provided for an item by hitting the <F1> key when that item has the focus. In dialogs, context help is provided by pressing the Help button or by hitting the <F1> key.
	About LEADViEW	Displays LEADViEW’s About dialog.


Context Menu

Using the Arrow tool, right-click on an image window to see a context-menu with some frequently used commands.


LEADViEW Toolbars

The toolbars contain buttons for common tasks and frequently used commands.

The user can show or hide any toolbar by selecting its checkbox in the View > Toolbars menu.  Each toolbar can be docked to the top, left side, or bottom of the main window, or can be made free-floating, by dragging it to a new position.

A button appears grayed-out if its corresponding command is unavailable.  Hovering over any button causes that button's name to pop-up in a small tool tip near the cursor, while a short textual description of the button's function is displayed in the status bar located at the bottom of the main window.

LEADViEW toolbars reflect the main menu. Each toolbar contains the most frequently used options of the corresponding menu commands. Only the Tools Toolbar doesn’t reflect any menu command. It contains tools for painting, drawing, selecting, and other operations.

See Also

Tools Toolbar


Tools Toolbar

The Tools toolbar contains the painting, drawing, selection and other tools.  When the mouse cursor is over a tool button, a tool-tip or pop-up description displays the name of the tool, while a hint is displayed in status bar.

The Tools toolbar can be docked to the left side (default), top, or bottom of the main window, or can be made free-floating, by dragging it to a new position.

The following table shows the tools and their descriptions:

Please note that due to the size of some of the images in this table, the toolbar images are displayed above the Command and Description information. This is done to make viewing the image, the Command and the Description easier.

	Command	Description
	Arrow Tool	The Arrow tool is the default tool in the Tools toolbar. Pressing the left mouse button inside the Image View Window when this tool is selected activates the Pan Window. Clicking the right mouse button will cause the Image View Window Context Menu to appear.
	Command	Description
	Eyedropper Tool	Use the Eyedropper tool to select the active paintbrush solid color, shape border solid color, shape background solid color, selection border solid color, selection background solid color, fill solid color, text border solid color, and text background solid color.  These colors are displayed in the Tools Options Tabs.
	Command	Description
	Mover Tool	Use the Mover tool to move the selection (the portion of the image bounded by the marquee). The Mover tool has many behaviors depending on the keyboard state. For more information, refer to Mover Tool Behaviors.
	Command	Description
	Transform Floater Tool	Use the Transform Floater tool to rotate, resize and reposition floating selections. When you select this tool, the Transform Floater handles and guides appear on the image and the cursor changes to the transform floater cursor [image] when it’s over the active image.
	Command	Description
	Paintbrush Tool	Use the Paintbrush tool to draw on your images, with an effect similar to an artist's brush.  All settings related to the paintbrush size, contents, and how it applies its effects on an image, can be set using the Paintbrush Options Tab.
	Command	Description
	Shape Tools	Use the Shape tools to paint lines, rectangles, rounded rectangles, ellipses, polygons, and curved lines on the image. The shape tool currently selected is previewed on the Tools Toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Selection Tools	Use the Selection tools to select rectangles, rounded rectangles, ellipses, polygons, free hand, surface, border and color areas on the image. The Selection tool currently selected is previewed on the Tools Toolbar.
	Command	Description
	Fill Tools	Use the Fill tools to fill specific areas with certain colors or images, replacing the original image pixels with new ones. Use the Fill Options Tab to set fill options like fill style, opacity, tolerance, color, and paper texture. The Fill tool currently selected is previewed on the Tools toolbar. Note: If the image contains an active selection, only the active selection will be filled.
	Command	Description
	Text Tool	Use the Text tool to add text to the active image. Text added to the active image can be drawn in any available font, font size, and style, and can be drawn with both a border and an interior color or image.  The border can be transparent or any color and width, and the interior can be transparent, solid colored, or filled with a tiled image.  Additionally, the overall opacity of the text can be adjusted so that it appears completely opaque or at any level of transparency.  All of these options may be set with the Text Options Tab on the right side of the workspace.
	Command	Description
	Zoom Tool	Use the Zoom tool to change the zoom level of an image.  When you select this tool, the cursor changes to the magnifying glass cursor [image] when it’s over the active image.
See also

Topics:	How to Use Eyedropper Tool
How to Use the Mover Tool
How to Use the Transform Floater Tool
How to Use the Paintbrush Tool
How to Use the Shape Tool
How to Use the Fill Tool
How to Use the Text Tool
How to Use the Zoom Tool

Fill Options Tab
Paintbrush Options Tab
Shape Options Tab
Selection Options Tab
Text Options Tab

Color Rollup Dialog
Cursor Info Rollup Dialog

Fill Tools
Selection Tools
Shape Tools
Mover Tool Behaviors
Selection Tools Behaviors
Zoom Tool Behaviors


How to Use the Eyedropper Tool

1.	Click the Eyedropper tool button [image] on the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the Eyedropper cursor [image] when it’s over the active image.

2.	Move the cursor over the active image and click on the image to select the color under the cursor.

Left click to select the paintbrush color, shape border color, selection border color, and text border color.

Right click to select the shape background color, selection background color, fill solid color, and text background color.

3.	The selected color appears in the corresponding color picker button in the appropriate options tab.

Note:	If you have the Cursor Info Rollup Dialog shown, you can preview the color you want to pick before picking it. You can also read its value in any of several color models.


How to Use the Mover Tool

1.	Make sure the active image contains an active selection.

2.	Click the Mover tool button [image] on the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the Mover cursor [image] when it’s over the active image.

3.	Move the cursor over the active selection.

4.	Left click on the active selection, and start dragging.

5.	While the mouse button is pressed, you can move the cursor to move the selection.

6.	Release the mouse button to set the selection’s new position.


Mover Tool Behaviors

The Mover tool has many behaviors depending on the keyboard state, they are as the following:

 Copy and move selection. By default, when a selection is dragged with the Mover tool, the selection is floated, and the underlying image remains intact. Any part of the original selection that is uncovered by moving the floater still contains the original image pixel values.

The cursor changes to the Move floater cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

If the selection extends beyond the bitmap boundaries, then floating this selection will cause it to be clipped to the bitmap boundaries. If the selection is totally beyond the bitmap boundaries, you can’t float it.

 Move marquee. To reposition the marquee without dragging the selected portion of the image, press the <Ctrl> key. The cursor will turn into the marquee mover cursor [image], and you can move the marquee.

 Cut and move selection. Unlike the Copy and move selection behavior, when a selection is cut and moved, any part of the original selection that is uncovered by moving the selection is replaced with the background color. To cut and move a selection, press the <Shift> key. The cursor will turn into the cut mover cursor [image]. With the <Shift> key still pressed, press the left mouse button, within the selection boundaries, and drag to cut and move the selection. The selection background color can be set on the Selection Options Tab.

If the selection extends beyond the bitmap boundaries, then floating this selection will cause it to be clipped to the bitmap boundaries. If the selection is totally beyond the bitmap boundaries, you can’t float it.


How to Use the Transform Floater Tool

1.	Make a selection and float it.

2.	Click the Transform Floater tool button in the Tools toolbar. The resize and rotate handles appear on the image and most menu items become unavailable.

3.	The cursor changes when it’s moved over the resize handle to become the resize cursor [image]. It becomes the rotate cursor [image] when it moves over the rotate handle.

4.	Resize the floater by dragging the corners. Rotate the floater by dragging the rotate handle.

5.	To apply the changes, either double click the image, or choose any other tool.

6.	To delete the floater being transformed, choose Edit > Clear (or press the <Del/Delete> key).

7.	To paste a copy of the floater being transformed, choose Selection > Defloat (or press the <Ins/Insert> key).


How to Use the Paintbrush Tool

1.	To select the paintbrush tool, click on the Paintbrush tool button [image] in the Tools toolbar.

2.	Use the Paintbrush Options Tab to set the paintbrush options like color, size, hardness, opacity, density, fade rate, paper texture, etc.

3.	Click and drag over the active image to apply paint. The cursor will appear as a paintbrush [image] when the paintbrush tool is selected.


How to Use the Shape Tool

1.	To select the shape tool, click on the Shape tool button in the Tools toolbar.  Select from among the various shape tools by clicking on the dropdown arrow to the right of the shape tool button.

2.	Use the Shape Options Tab to set the shape options like background style and color, border style and color, opacity, paper texture, etc.

3.	Click and drag over the active image to apply the shape to the image.  The shape is fit into the bounding rectangle created by clicking and dragging.  The cursor will appear in the active image window as the appropriate shape when any of the Shape tools are selected.


Shape Tools Sub Toolbar

The following table lists the tool names in the Shape sub toolbar of the Tools toolbar and gives a brief description of each tool:

	Tool	Description
	Line Shape Tool	Use the line tool to draw straight lines on your image. The line color, thickness, and dot styles can be changed using the Shape Options Tab.
	Rectangle Shape Tool	Use the rectangle tool to draw rectangles on your image. The border color, thickness, background style, and dot styles can be changed using the Shape Options Tab.
	Rounded Rectangle Shape Tool	Use the rounded rectangle tool to draw rounded rectangles on your image. Rounded rectangles are rectangles that contain curved edges at the corners, The border color, thickness, background style, and dot styles can be changed using the Shape Options Tab. Note: Only rounded rectangles use the ellipse width and height values. These values determine the shape of the rounded rectangle’s corners.
	Ellipse Shape Tool	Use the ellipse tool to draw elliptical shapes on your image. The border color, thickness, background style, and dot styles can be changed using the Shape Options Tab.
	Polygon Shape Tool	Use the polygon tool to draw closed shapes on your image. The border color, thickness, background style, and dot styles can be changed using the Shape Options Tab.
	Curve Shape Tool	Use the curve tool to draw lines on your image. The line color, thickness, and dot styles can be changed using the Shape Options Tab.
See also

Topics:	How to Use the Line Shape Tool
How to Use the Rectangle Shape Tool
How to Use the Rounded Rectangle Shape Tool
How to Use the Ellipse Shape Tool
How to Use the Polygon Shape Tool
How to Use the Curve Shape Tool
Shape Options Tab


How to Use the Line Shape Tool

To draw a line:

1.	Select the Line tool [image] from the Shape tools in the Tools toolbar.

The cursor changes to the line cursor [image] when it is over the active image.

2.	Click on the active image to locate the line’s starting point, and drag the mouse to locate the line’s ending point.  When the mouse is released, the line is drawn onto the active image’s canvas using the specified options in the Shape Options Tab.

Note:	To abort the drawing operation, right click the mouse.


How to Use the Rectangle Shape Tool

To draw a rectangle:

1.	Select the Rectangle tool [image] from the Shape tools in the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the rectangle cursor [image] when it is over the active image.

2.	Click on the active image to locate one corner of the rectangle.

3.	Drag the mouse to locate the opposite corner.

4.	When the mouse is released, the rectangle is drawn onto the active image’s canvas using the specified options in the Shape Options Tab.

Note:	To abort the drawing operation, right click the mouse.


How to Use the Rounded Rectangle Shape Tool

To draw a rounded rectangle:

1.	Select the Rounded Rectangle tool [image] from the Shape tools in the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the rounded rectangle cursor [image] when it is over the active image.

2.	Click on the active image to locate one corner of the rectangle.

3.	Drag the mouse to locate the opposite corner.

4.	When the mouse is released, the rounded rectangle is drawn onto the active image’s canvas using the specified options in the Shape Options Tab.

Note:	To abort the drawing operation, right click the mouse.


How to Use the Ellipse Shape Tool

To draw an ellipse:

1.	Select the Ellipse Tool [image] from the Shape tools in the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the ellipse cursor [image] when it is over the active image.

2.	Click on the active image to locate one corner of the ellipse’s bounding rectangle.

3.	Drag the mouse to locate the opposite corner.

4.	When the mouse is released, the ellipse is drawn onto the active image’s canvas using the specified options in the Shape Options Tab.

Note:	To abort the drawing operation, right click the mouse.


How to Use the Polygon Shape Tool

To draw a polygon:

1.	Select the Polygon tool [image] from the Shape tools in the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the polygon cursor [image] when it is over the active image.

2.	Click on the active image to locate the first corner point (vertex) of the polygon.

3.	Continue clicking on the image to locate additional corner points (vertices).

4.	Double click on the image to locate the last vertex.

5.	A final line segment is drawn from the last vertex to the first as the entire polygon is drawn onto the active image’s canvas using the specified options in the Shape Options Tab.

Note:	To abort the drawing operation, right click the mouse.


How to Use the Curve Shape Tool

To draw a curve line:

1.	Select the Curve tool [image] from the Shape tools in the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the curve cursor [image] when it is over the active image.

2.	Click on the active image to locate the first point of the curve.

3.	Drag the mouse to the last point position.

4.	Release the left mouse button. The curve outline will be drawn with handles that you can manipulate to set the shape of your curved line. Click and drag each handle to adjust the shape of the curve.

5.	Double click to apply your curved line on the image.

Note:	To abort the drawing operation, right click the mouse.


Selection Tools Behaviors

A selection is an isolated part of an image that can be manipulated independently without affecting the rest of the image. If an image contains a selection, painting, filling, and the application of effects (in most cases) and filters take place only within the boundaries of that selection. To display the shape and position of the current selection, a moving dashed line surrounds the selected portion of the image; this moving border is called a "Marquee".

Selections can be copied and pasted into the same or into different images and they can have hard or soft (feathered) edges.

All settings related to Selection tools, can be set using the Selection Options Tab.

Selection tools have many behaviors depending on the keyboard state and the mouse position relative to the existing image selection:

 Create a new selection. Using any of selection tools outside the existing selection, and without pressing either the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys will create a new selection or replace an existing one. This is the default behavior.

 Add to the existing selection. To add a new selection to an existing selection, press the <Ctrl> key while using any selection tool. The selection cursor will show an addition "+" sign, and the newly created selection will be added to the existing selection, if one exists.

The following example shows the addition of a rectangular region to the existing selection (in green):

1.	Original Selection

2.	Adding the new selection

3.	Resulting Selection

 Subtract from an existing selection. To subtract from an existing selection, press the <Shift> key while using any selection tool. The selection cursor will show a subtraction "-" sign, and the newly created selection will be subtracted from the existing selection if one exists.

The following example shows the subtraction of an elliptical region from the existing selection (in green):

1.	Original Selection

2.	Subtracting From the Existing Selection

3.	Resulting Selection

 Copy and move selection. To copy and move the active selection, move any selection tool over the active selection. The cursor will turn into the Mover tool cursor. Left click inside the selection and drag to the new location.

 Move Marquee. To reposition the marquee without dragging the selected portion of the image, move the selection tool over the active selection and press the <Alt> and <Ctrl> keys. The cursor will turn into the marquee mover cursor [image], and you can move the marquee.

 Cut and Move Selection. Unlike the Copy and move selection behavior, when a selection is cut and moved, any part of the original selection that is uncovered by moving the selection is replaced with the background color. To cut and move a selection, press the <Alt> and <Shift> keys. The cursor will turn into the cut mover cursor [image]. With the <Alt> and <Shift> keys still pressed, press the left mouse button, within the selection boundaries, and drag to cut and move the selection. The selection background color can be set on the Selection Options Tab.

See Also

How to Use Mover Tool

Selection Feather Dialog

Selection Options Tab


Selection Tools Sub Toolbar

The following table lists the tool names in the Selection sub toolbar of the Tools toolbar and gives a brief description of each tool:

	Command	Description
	Rectangle Selection	Use the rectangle selection tool to create a rectangular selection area.
	Rounded Rectangle Selection	Use the rounded-rectangle selection tool to create a rounded-rectangle selection area.
	Ellipse Selection	Use the elliptical selection tool to create an elliptical selection area.
	Polygon Selection	Use the polygon selection tool to create a selection area bounded by straight line segments.
	Free Hand Selection	Use the free hand selection tool to create a selection from a freehand drawn border.
	Surface Selection	Use the surface selection tool to create a selection based on a specified range of colors. Surface selection selects a contiguous group of pixels that have color values similar to the selected pixel’s color. When you click on the active image with the surface selection tool, the image is searched in all directions, starting with the selected pixel, for pixels with color values near the selected pixel’s color value (within the specified tolerance). Any pixel with a color value close enough to the selected pixel's color value is added to the selection, and searching continues from that pixel’s position.
	Border Selection	Use the border selection tool to create a selection that is surrounded by a specific color range.  Border selection selects a contiguous group of pixels around the selected pixel that doesn’t have color values similar to the specified border color. When you click on the active image with the border selection tool, the image is searched in all directions, starting with the selected pixel, for pixels that don’t have color values near the specified border color value (within the specified tolerance). Border color can be set on the Selection Options Tab.  Any pixel meeting this criterion is added to the selection, and searching continues from that pixel’s position.
	Color Selection	Use the color selection tool to create a selection of the pixels in the active image that have color values similar to the selected pixel’s color. When you click on the active image with the color selection tool, any pixels in the image with color values close to the selected pixel’s color value (within the specified tolerance) are added to the selection.
See also

Topics:	How to Use the Rectangle Selection Tool
How to Use Mover Tool
How to Use the Rounded Rectangle Selection Tool
How to Use the Ellipse Selection Tool
How to Use the Polygon Selection Tool
How to Use the Free Hand Selection Tool
How to Use the Surface Selection Tool
How to Use the Border Selection Tool
How to Use the Color Selection Tool

Selection Feather Dialog
Selection Options Tab


How to Use the Rectangle Selection Tool

1.	Select the Rectangle Selection tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the rectangle cursor [image] when it’s over the active image.

2.	Left click on the active image to define one corner of the bounding rectangle for the selection.

3.	Drag the mouse to locate the opposite corner.

4.	Release the mouse to accept the selection, or right click to abort.


How to Use the Rounded Rectangle Selection Tool

1.	Select the Rounded Rectangle Selection tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the rounded rectangle cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

2.	Left click on the active image to define one corner of the bounding rectangle for the selection.

3.	Drag the mouse to locate the opposite corner.

4.	Release the mouse to accept the selection, or right click to abort.


How to Use the Ellipse Selection Tool

1.	Select the Ellipse Selection tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the ellipse cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

2.	Left click on the active image to define one corner of the bounding rectangle for the selection.

3.	Drag the mouse to locate the opposite corner.

4.	Release the mouse to accept the selection, or right click to abort.


How to Use the Polygon Selection Tool

1.	Select the Polygon Selection tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the polygon cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

2.	Left click on the active image to locate the first point of the polygon.

3.	Continue clicking to define additional points.  Each point it joined to the last with a line segment.

4.	Double click to select the final point.  A line segment is generated to join the last point with the first, or right click to abort creating a polygon selection.


How to Use the Free Hand Selection Tool

1.	Select the Free Hand Selection tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the freehand selection cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

2.	Left click on the active image at the starting point.

3.	Drag the mouse to draw a freehand border, or release the mouse and click again to define a straight line segment.

3.	Double click the image to close the selection, or right click to abort the selection.


How to Use the Surface Selection Tool

1.	Select the Surface Selection tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the surface selection cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

2.	Left click on the active image.  The point in the image where the cursor was clicked becomes the current selection.  Pixels that touch the current selection and are within the specified tolerance of the selected pixel’s color are added to the selection, and so on, until no more pixels meeting the color criteria are found.

3.	When the process ends, the marquee surrounds the new selection.

Example:

The surface selection after clicking on the red area


How to Use the Border Selection Tool

1.	Select the Border Selection tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the border selection cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

2.	Left click on the active image.  The point in the image where the cursor was clicked becomes the current selection.  Pixels that touch the current selection and are not within the specified tolerance of the order color are added to the selection, until no more pixels meeting the color criteria are found.

3.	When the process ends, the marquee surrounds the new selection.

Example:

Border selection when the border color is red and after clicking in the area inside the red border.


How to Use the Color Selection Tool

1.	Select the Color Selection tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the color selection cursor [image] when it’s over the active image.

2.	Left click on the active image.  Pixels, which are within the specified tolerance of the selected pixel’s color, are added to the selection.

3.	When the process ends, the marquee surrounds the new selection.

Example:

The color selection after clicking on the yellow area


How to Use the Fill Tool

1.	To select the Fill tool, click on the Fill tool button in the tools toolbar.  Select among the various fill tools by clicking on the dropdown arrow to the right of the fill tool button.

2.	Use the Fill Options Tab to set the fill options like fill style and color, border color, opacity, paper texture, etc.

3.	Click on the position where your fill operation will start, and from there it will continue as long as it satisfies the criteria set in the Fill Options Tab and the fill tool selected.


Fill Tools Sub Toolbar

The following table lists the tool names in the Fill sub toolbar of the Tools toolbar and gives a brief description of each tool:

	Command	Description
	Surface Fill	Use the surface fill tool to fill an area that contains a specified color, plus or minus some tolerance value. The process starts at a specified point in the active image and continues in all directions, as long as pixels have the same color as the starting pixel, plus or minus the specified tolerance value. Tolerance and fill color can be set in the Fill Options Tab. Larger tolerance values create larger fill regions.
	Border Fill	Use the border fill tool to fill an area, starting at a specified point in the active image and continuing in all directions until pixels are found with the specified fill border color, plus or minus the specified tolerance. Tolerance, fill color and border color can all be set in the Fill Options Tab. The border color can also be selected from the active image using the Eyedropper tool. Larger tolerance values create smaller fill regions.
	Color Replace	Use the color replace fill tool to fill every pixel that has a color value, which is the same as the specified point’s color, plus or minus the specified tolerance.  Unlike the other fill tools, the pixels replaced in this process do not have to be contiguous; they can be in disconnected areas. Tolerance and the replacement color (fill color) can be set in the Fill Options Tab. Larger tolerance values create larger fill regions.
See also

Topics:	How to Use the Surface Fill Tool
How to Use the Border Fill Tool
How to Use the Eyedropper Tool
How to Use the Color Replace Fill Tool
Fill Options Tab


How to Use the Surface Fill Tool

To begin a surface fill:

1.	Select the Surface Fill tool [image] from the Fill tools in the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the surface fill cursor [image] when it's over the active image. You can set the fill style, fill color or image, opacity and tolerance on the Fill Options tab.

2.	Left click on the active image to select the starting point of the fill and begin the fill process.


How to Use the Border Fill Tool

To begin a border fill:

1.	Select the Border Fill tool [image] from the Fill tools in the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the border fill cursor [image] when over the active image.You can set the fill style, fill color or image, border color, opacity and tolerance on the Fill Options tab.

2.	Left click on the active image to select the starting point of the fill and begin the fill process.


How to Use the Color Replace Fill Tool

To begin a color replace fill:

1.	Select the Color Replace Fill tool [image] from the Fill tools in the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the color replace fill cursor [image] when over the active image. You can set the fill style, fill color or image, opacity and tolerance on the Fill Options tab.

2.	Left click on the active image to select the color to be replaced and begin the fill process.


How to Use the Text Tool

To begin entering text onto the active image:

1.	Select the Text tool [image] from the Tools toolbar.  The cursor changes to the text cursor [image] when over the active image. You can set the font, text, background style, background color, border style, border color, border width, transformation, opacity, alignment and whether to use paper texture on the Text Options tab.

2.	Type the desired text into the Text entry box near the top of the Text Options Tab.  Set the font, background style, background color, border style, border color, border width, scale, opacity, and texture settings at this time.

3.	To define the rectangle into which the text will be drawn, left click on the active image to locate one corner and drag to the opposite corner.  When the mouse is released, the text is drawn on the image inside this rectangle using the settings specified in the Text Options Tab.

Note:	To abort the operation, right click with the mouse before releasing the left mouse button.


Zoom Tool Behaviors

Zoom Tool has two different behaviors, zooming in and zooming out:

 Zoom In. Zooming in increases the magnification of the image with respect to the zooming location or rectangle. This is the default behavior.

You can zoom in either by clicking on an image location, or by selecting a zoom rectangle.

To select a zoom rectangle click on the active image to create one corner of the rectangle. Drag the cursor until the area is enclosed, then release the mouse button. The area will be zoomed as much as possible.

 Zoom Out. Zooming out decreases the magnification of the image with respect to the zooming location. To zoom out, press the <Shift> key and click on the image to zoom out. The cursor will change to the zoom out cursor [image].


How to Use the Zoom Tool
How to the Use Zoom Tool

To begin Zooming In:

1.	Select the Zoom tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the zoom in cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

2.	Left click on the active image or click on the image to create one corner of the zoom rectangle and drag the cursor until the area to zoom in on is enclosed.

3.	Release the mouse button.

To begin Zooming Out:

1.	Select the Zoom tool [image] from the Selection tools in the Tools toolbar. The cursor changes to the zoom in cursor [image] when it’s over an active image.

2.	Press the <Shift> key and left click on the active image. The cursor will change to the zoom out cursor. .

3.	The image will change the zooming level with respect to the clicked location.


Tools Options Tabs

LEADViEW lets you control the various painting tools by setting options in the Tools Options Tabs, aligned along the right side of workspace.  These tabbed pages can be folded to gain more space, and they can be scrolled left and right by clicking on any blank area of the page and dragging.

To fold the tabs, click the arrow [image] button while tabs are open.

To unfold the tabs, click Arrow [image] button while tabs are closed.

To scroll tabs, left click on a blank area on the active tab, and start dragging in any direction to bring hidden areas to view.

Note:	A hand-shaped cursor [image] will appear when scrolling is available.

LEADViEW supports the following tools options tabs:

Paintbrush Options Tab

Shape Options Tab

Selection Options Tab

Fill Options Tab

Text Options Tab


Paintbrush Options Tab

Use the Paintbrush tab in the Tools Options Tabs on the right side of the workspace to set paintbrush options.

The edit boxes used in the tab provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, use the arrows to set the desired value, or drag the meter bar.

The color picker button, image picker button(s), and drop-down list box can be used to set the paintbrush style and texture.

Contents

Use the Contents drop-down list box to set the style of your paintbrush.  Available options are:

 Color. Select this and the paintbrush touch will be painted using a solid color. Clicking the color picker button (visible when color option is selected) will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the color.

Note: You can also set the color of the paintbrush to a color in the active image by using the Eyedropper tool, the second tool on the Tools toolbar. To use this tool, left click on the active image and the color under the cursor becomes the new paint color.

 Image. Select this and the paintbrush touch will be painted using a tube image. Clicking the image picker button (visible when image option is selected) will activate an image list that will be used to pick the image.

Additional images may be selected for use by the paintbrush using the Directories Dialog box.

Diameter

Use the Diameter edit box to set the width of the paintbrush, in pixels. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value. Valid values for paintbrush diameter are 1 to 200.

Hardness

Use the Hardness edit box to set the sharpness of a paintbrush edge. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value. Valid values are 1 to 100.

At 1, the paintbrush has a very soft, faded edge.  At 100, the paintbrush edge is completely sharp (not faded at all).

Spacing

Use the Spacing edit box to set a value that indicates, in pixels, how often the paintbrush tip touches the surface during a paint stroke. Valid values are from 1 to 1000.

A value of 1 creates a continuous stroke. A value of 30 means that the paintbrush tip will touch the painting surface once every 30 pixels. Values larger than the paintbrush diameter will make the paintbrush applications appear as discrete drops.

Opacity

Use the Opacity edit box to set the transparency of the brush touch.  Valid values are 0 to 255. A color or an image with an opacity value of 255 is transparent. A color or an image with an opacity value of 0 is completely opaque (solid).

Density

Use the Density edit box to set a value indicating the amount of paint the brush applies with each stroke. Increasing the density of the brush is comparable to increasing the number of bristles in the brush. With more bristles, more paint is applied in a stroke. Similarly, decreasing the density decreases the number of bristles in the brush. With fewer bristles, less paint is applied in a stroke. Valid values are 1 to 100 and represent a percentage. A value of 100% results in the surface being completely covered with paint. A value of 1% results in very little paint being applied to the surface. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Fade Out Rate

Use the Fade Out Rate edit box to set a value indicating the rate at which the brush contents will fade (become more transparent). Valid values are between 0 and 10000. 0 means no fadeout will occur. Other values (1-10000) will increase transparency every Spacing pixels until total transparency is reached.

Paper Texture Section:

This section contains a Use check box. Check this to simulate painting a paper texture. Clicking the image picker button (visible when the Use check box is checked) will activate an image list that will be used to pick the image to use as the paper texture to paint.

See Also

How to Use the Paintbrush Tool

Color Rollup Dialog

Image List Dialog

How to Use the Eyedropper Tool

Directories Dialog


Shape Options Tab

Use the Shape tab in the Tools Options Tabs on the right side of the workspace to set the shape options.

The edit boxes used in the tab provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, use the arrows to set the desired value, or drag the meter bar.

The color picker buttons, image picker buttons, and drop-down list boxes can be used to set the shape style, color, background, and texture.

Use the shape tools to create geometrical shapes like lines, curves, rectangles, ellipses, and polygons.  Lines and curves can be drawn with any thickness and color, and rectangles, ellipses and polygons can be drawn with or without borders and interiors.  Borders can be any width and color, and interiors can be any color, transparent, or filled with tiled images.  See below for an illustration of available shapes and styles.

Background Section:

The Background section consists of a Style Drop-down box and a color, image or gradient picker button. The button that is displayed depends on the style selected in the Style Drop-down box.

Style Drop-down List box:

Use the Style drop-down list box to specify how the background or interior of the shape is to be drawn.  The following options are available:

 Transparent: this option will leave the shape interior unfilled.

 Opaque: this option fills the shape's interior with a solid color. Clicking the color picker button (visible when the opaque option is selected) will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the background color.

Note: You can also set the color of the shape's background to a color in the active image by using the Eyedropper tool, the second tool on the Tools toolbar. To use this tool, right click on the active image and the color under the cursor becomes the new background color.

 Gradient: This option fills the shape's background or interior with a gradient of colors. Clicking the gradient picker button (visible when gradient option is selected) will activate a Gradient Rollup Dialog that will be used to pick the gradient style.

 Tiled Image: this option fills the shape's background or interior with a tiled image. Clicking the image picker button (visible when tiled image option is selected) will activate an image list that will be used to pick the background image.

Note:	You can add more images to the tiled image list by using the Directories Dialog box.

Border Section:

The Border section consists of a Style Drop-down list box, a Joins Drop-down list box, a Width edit box and a color picker button for setting the characteristics of the shape's border.

Style Drop-down List box:

Use the Style drop-down list box to select the shape's border style. These include Solid, Dashed, Dotted… etc.

Opening the drop-down list box displays the following list from which to set the border style:

If any style other then transparent is selected, a color picker button will be available to set the border color. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the required color.

Note:	You can also set the border color using the Eyedropper tool, the second tool on the Tools toolbar.  When the Eyedropper tool is selected and the shape tab is active, left click the mouse on the active image and the color beneath the cursor will be set as the current border color.

For the line and curved shapes this style will be used to draw the shape itself.

Joins Drop-down List box:

Use the Joins: drop-down list box to indicate how the ends of lines will be drawn. The following end cap options are available.

The following image demonstrates the use of the end cap.

Width Edit box:

Use the Width edit box to set the width, in pixels, of the shape's border. If the shape is a line or a curve, then this is the width of the line or curve. Valid values range from 1 to 100.

Rounded Rect Ellipse Section:

The Rounded Rect Ellipse section consists of a Width Edit box and a Height Edit box, used to set the width and height of an ellipse used to draw rounded rectangle shapes.

Width Edit box:

Use the Width edit box to set the width, in pixels, of the ellipse used to create the corners of a rounded rectangle shape. Values range from 0 to 500.

Height Edit box:

Use the Height edit box to set the height, in pixels, of the ellipse used to create the corners of a rounded rectangle shape. Values range from 0 to 500.

Opacity Edit box:

Use the Opacity edit box to set the transparency of the shape when combined with the painting canvas.  Valid values are 0 to 255. A color or an image with an opacity value of 255 is transparent. A color or an image with an opacity value of 0 is completely opaque (solid).

Paper Texture Section:

The Paper Texture section consists of a Use check box and an image picker button, if the Use check box is checked.

Use Check box:

Check this to simulate painting on a paper with texture. If this box is checked, an image picker button is visible. Use the image picker button to select the image with the desired texture.

Note:	You can add more images to the list using the Directories Dialog box.

See Also

Color Rollup Dialog

Image List Dialog

Gradient Rollup Dialog

How to Use the Eyedropper Tool

How to Use the Line Shape Tool

How to Use the Rectangle Shape Tool

How to Use the Rounded Rectangle Shape Tool

How to Use the Ellipse Shape Tool

How to Use the Polygon Shape Tool

How to Use the Curve Shape Tool

Directories Dialog


Selection Options Tab

Use the Selection tab in the Tools Options Tabs on the right side of the workspace to set selection options.

The edit boxes used in the tab provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, use the arrows to set the desired value, or drag the meter bar.

The color picker buttons can be used to set the selection’s border color and the background color to fill in with when cutting a selection.

Tolerance Edit box:

Use the Tolerance edit box or slider to set the amount of color variability allowed when selecting pixels using the following selection tools:

 Surface Selection Tool.

 Border Selection Tool.

 Color Selection Tool.

To use any of these tools, click anywhere on the active image.  The pixel under the cursor is the "seed" pixel.

For the surface selection tool and color selection tool, the pixels that are added to the selection must have a color value whose difference from the seed pixel’s color value is no more than the specified tolerance value.  Higher tolerance values produce larger selections.

For the border selection tool, the selection is expanded around the seed pixel, and new pixels are added to the selection as long as they have a color value that is different from the border color value by at least the value specified by Tolerance. Higher tolerance values produce smaller selections.

Rounded Rect Section:

The Rounded Rect section consists of a Width edit box and a Height edit box.

 Width Edit box: Use this edit box to set the width of the ellipse used to create the corners of a rounded rectangle selection.  The higher values produce larger, rounder corners.

 Height Edit box: Use this edit box to set the height of the ellipse used to create the corners of a rounded rectangle selection. The higher values produce larger, rounder corners.

Border Button:

Click the color picker button to activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the border color.

This is the color of the border around a selection.

Background Button:

Click the color picker button to activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the background color.

This is the color that is used to fill any areas that are exposed when a selection is cut or deleted, and to fill empty areas when pasting a selection as a new image.

See Also

Color Rollup Dialog

How to Use the Surface Selection Tool

How to Use the Border Selection Tool

How to Use the Color Selection Tool


Fill Options Tab

Use the Fill tab in the Tools Options Tabs on the right side of the workspace to set the fill options.

Use the fill tools to fill an image or a selected region with a color, color gradient, or tiled image.  There are three fill tools available: Surface Fill, Border Fill, and Color Replace tools.

The edit boxes used in the tab provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, use the arrows to set the desired value, or drag the meter bar.

The color picker buttons, image picker buttons, and drop-down list box can be used to set the fill style and texture.

Style Section:

This section includes a Style Drop-down box, and an image or color picker button for setting the Fill style.

Style Drop-down List box:

Use the Style drop-down list box to specify how to fill a selected area.  The following options are available:

 Solid: The selected area will be filled with a solid color.  Clicking the color picker button (visible when solid option is selected) will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the fill color.

Note: You can also set the fill color to a color in the active image by using the Eyedropper tool, the second tool on the Tools toolbar. To use this tool, right click on the active image and the color under the cursor becomes the new background color.

 Gradient: The selected area will be filled with a gradient of colors.  Clicking the gradient picker button (visible when gradient option is selected) will activate a Gradient Rollup Dialog that will be used to pick the gradient style.

 Tiled Image: The selected area will be filled with a tiled image. Clicking the image picker button (visible when tiled image option is selected) will activate an image list that will be used to pick the fill image.

Note:	You can add more images to the tiled image list by using the Directories Dialog box.

Tolerance Edit box:

Use the Tolerance Edit box to set a tolerance value for the fill option.  Valid values range from 0 – 255.

Different fill methods use tolerance differently:

 Surface Fill: When you click on the active image with the surface fill tool, the color under the cursor becomes the "seed" color.  Only pixels in a contiguous region containing the seed pixel, that have this seed color plus or minus the tolerance value are filled.  Larger tolerances create larger filled areas.

 Color Replace: This process uses tolerance in the same way as the surface fill, except the filled area does not have to be contiguous.  All pixels in the image having the seed color plus or minus the tolerance value are filled.  Larger tolerances result in more pixels being filled.

 Border Fill: This process uses the border color, specified in the fill options tab, and the tolerance value to determine where to stop a border fill operation.  When you click on the active image with the border fill tool, the pixel under the cursor becomes the "seed" pixel.  The region around this seed pixel is expanded in all directions until a pixel having the fill border color plus or minus the tolerance value is encountered.  The fill border color (plus or minus the tolerance) must completely surround the region for the region to stop growing.  Larger tolerances create smaller filled regions.

Opacity Edit box:

Use the Opacity edit box to set a value indicating the transparency of the fill when combined with the existing image. Valid values are 0 to 255. A color or an image with an opacity value of 255 is transparent (the original pixel color remains unchanged). A color or an image with an opacity value of 0 is completely opaque (the pixels are changed to the fill color). Enter the value directly into the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Border Color Button

Use the Border Color picker button to set the color that is used to stop a border fill. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the border color.  See "Tolerance" above for an explanation of the border fill process.

Note: You can also set the border color to a color in the active image by using the Eyedropper tool, the second tool on the Tools toolbar. To use this tool, left click on the active image and the color under the cursor becomes the new fill border color.

Paper Texture Section:

The Paper Texture section consists of a Use check box and an image picker button, if the Use check box is checked.

Use Check box:

Check this to simulate painting on a paper with texture. If this box is checked, an image picker button is visible. Use the image picker button to select the image with the desired texture.

Note:	You can add more images to the list using the Directories Dialog box.

See Also

How to Use the Surface Fill Tool

How to Use the Border Fill Tool

How to Use the Color Replace Fill Tool

Color Rollup Dialog

Image List Dialog

Gradient Rollup Dialog

Directories Dialog


Text Options Tab

Use the Text tab in the Tools Options Tabs on the right side of the workspace to set text options.

The edit boxes used in the tab provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, use the arrows to set the desired value, or drag the meter bar.

The color picker buttons, image picker buttons, and dropdown list boxes can be used to set the text style and texture.

Font button:

Use the Font button to set the text font, which includes the text font name, style, and size. Clicking the font picker button will activate a Font Dialog that will be used to pick the font.

Text

Use the text edit box to type the text you wish to paint on your image. The text edit box is at the top of the text tab, just below the font picker button.  The text that you type here will be inserted into a rectangular region that you specify on the active image, using word-wrap when necessary.

Background Section:

The Background section consists of a Style Drop-down box and a color, image or gradient picker button. The button that is displayed depends on the style selected in the Style Drop-down box.

Style Drop-down List box:

Use the Style drop-down list box to specify how the background or interior of the text is to be drawn.  The following options are available:

 Transparent: this option will leave the text background or interior unfilled. Only the text border will be drawn onto the image.

 Opaque: this option fills the text's background or interior with a solid color. Clicking the color picker button (visible when opaque option is selected) will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the background color.

Note: You can also set the color of the text's background to a color in the active image by using the Eyedropper tool, the second tool on the Tools toolbar. To use this tool, right click on the active image and the color under the cursor becomes the new background color.

 Tiled Image: this option fills the text's background or interior with an image. Clicking the image picker button (visible when tiled image option is selected) will activate an image list that will be used to pick the background image.

Note:	You can add more images to the tiled image list by using the Directories Dialog box.

Border Section:

The Border section consists of a Style Drop-down list box, a Width edit box and a color picker button for setting the characteristics of the text's border.

Style Drop-down List box:

Use the Style drop-down list box to select the text's border style. These include Transparent and Color.  The following options are available:

 Transparent: this option makes the text border invisible.

 Color: this option makes the text border a solid color. Clicking the color picker button (visible when the color option is selected) will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the border color.

Note:	You can also set the border color using the Eyedropper tool, the second tool on the Tools toolbar.  When the Eyedropper tool is selected and the text tab is active, left click the mouse on the active image and the color beneath the cursor will be set as the current text border color.

Width Edit box:

Use the Width edit box to set the width, in pixels, of the text's border. Valid values range from 1 to 100.

Transform Section:

The Transform section consists of a Rotate Edit box and a Scale Edit box for setting the transformation information for the text.

Rotate Edit box:

Use the Rotate edit box to set the angle, in degrees, at which the added text will be drawn onto the active image.

Note:	The Align Drop-down list box (see below) must be set to Center in order to set a non-zero rotation value.

Scale Edit box:

Use the Scale edit box to set the scaling percent applied to the drawn text. A value of 100, the default, will draw the text at the actual specified font size.

Note:	Lines will be wrapped based on 100% scaling, so that larger values may cause the text to be clipped by the specified text area and smaller values may cause line-breaks to occur before the edge of the specified text area is reached.  To avoid this, use the font size rather than scale to change text size.

Opacity Edit box:

Use the Opacity edit box to set the transparency of the text when combined with the underlying image. Valid values are 0 to 255. A color with an opacity value of 255 is transparent. A color with an opacity value of 0 is completely opaque (solid).

Align Drop-down List box:

Use the Align drop-down list box to set the method of aligning or justifying text into the specified text area.  Options are Align Left, Align Center, and Align Right.

Paper Texture Section:

The Paper Texture section consists of a Use check box and an image picker button, if the Use check box is checked.

Use Check box:

Check this to simulate painting on a paper with texture. If this box is checked, an image picker button is visible. Use the image picker button to select the image with the desired texture.

Note:	You can add more images to the list using the Directories Dialog box.

See Also

How to Use the Text Tool

Color Rollup Dialog

Image List Dialog

Directories Dialog

Font Dialog


LEADViEW Dialogs

LEADViEW supports the following dialogs:

Effects Dialogs:

Blur

Anti Alias Dialog	Average Dialog

Gaussian Filter Dialog	Motion Blur Dialog

Radial Blur Effect Dialog	Zoom Blur Effect Dialog

Noise

Add Noise Dialog	Max Dialog

Median Dialog	Min Dialog

Sharpen

Sharpen Dialog	Unsharp Mask Dialog

Calculations

Add Bitmaps Dialog	Combine Dialog

Image Attributes Dialog	Multiply Dialog

Objects Properties Pane Dialog	Tiling Options Dialog

Stitch Dialog

Distort

Hand Wave Dialog	Polar Effect Dialog

Radial Wave Effect Dialog	Swirl Effect Dialog

Wave Effect Dialog	Wave Shear Effect Dialog

Wind Effect Dialog	Zoom Wave Effect Dialog

3D

Bending Effect Dialog	Cylindrical Effect Dialog

Emboss Dialog	Punch Effect Dialog

Ripple Effect Dialog	Spherize Effect Dialog

Artistic

Impressionist EffectDialog	Oilify Dialog

Texture

Underlay Dialog

Pixelate

Mosaic Dialog	Picturize Dialog

Pixelate Effect Dialog

Edge Detection

Dilation Dialog	Contour Filter Dialog

Edge Detector Dialog	Erosion Dialog

Spatial Filters

Gradient Dialog	Laplacian Dialog

Line Segment Dialog	Prewitt Dialog

Shift and Difference Dialog	Sobel Dialog

Color Dialogs:

Balance Colors Dialog	Brightness Dialog

CMY Merge Dialog	CMYK Merge Dialog

Color Resolution Dialog	Contrast Dialog

Convert To Colored Gray Dialog	Customize Palette Dialog

Gamma Adjustment Dialog	Gray Scale Dialog

Halftone Dialog	Histo-Contrast Dialog

HLS Merge Dialog	HSB Merge Dialog

Hue Dialog	Intensity Detect Dialog

Local Histo-Equalize Dialog	Posterize Dialog

Remap Hue Dialog	Remap Intensity Dialog

RGB Merge Dialog	Saturation Dialog

Solarize Dialog

Image Dialogs:

Add Border Dialog	Add Frame Dialog

Auto Trim Dialog	Canvas Resize Dialog

Histogram Dialog	Preferences Dialog

Resize Dialog	Rotate Dialog

Shear Dialog

File Dialogs:

Abort Batch Conversion Dialog	Advanced JPEG 2000 Options Dialog

Batch Conversion Dialog	Browse Folder Dialog

Capture Area Options Dialog	Capture Options Dialog

Capture Selected Object Options Dialog	Capturing Properties Dialog

Confirm File Formats Associations Dialog	Conversion Log-Report Dialog

Directories Dialog	DWF File Format Options Dialog

DXF/DWG FileFormat Options Dialog	Email Profile Dialog

File Save Options Dialog	File Information Dialog

General Preferences Dialog	GIF Settings Dialog

GIF Web Tuner Dialog	HTML Map Creator Dialog

Image File Format Association Dialog	JPEG Settings Dialog

JPEG Web Tuner Dialog	Load Options Dialog

Message Dialog	New Dialog

Open Dialog	Page Setup Dialog

PLT File Format Options Dialog	PNG Settings Dialog

PNG Web Tuner Dialog	Print Dialog

Print Preview Dialog	Save As Dialog

Video Capture Dialog	WMF Import Resolution Dialog

Selection Dialogs:

Selection Scale Dialog	Selection Resize Dialog

Selection Include/Exclude Color Dialog	Selection Feather Dialog

General Dialogs

Abort Dialog	Browse for Folder Dialog

Color Dialog	Color Rollup Dialog

Cursor Info Rollup Dialog	Customize Toolbar Dialog

Font Dialog	Get Directory Dialog

Get Resolution Dialog	Gradient Rollup Dialog

Image Information Dialog


New Dialog

Use the New dialog box to create a new, empty image.

When you create a new image, you must specify the image’s size, resolution, and color-depth.  Size can be specified in pixels ("dots", or the smallest unit of the actual image), centimeters, or inches.  Color-depth basically translates to number of colors available for an image.

Color depth refers to the number of bits required for each pixel in an image.  A 24-bit image requires 24 bits per pixel, and is capable of displaying over 16 million different colors.  An 8-bit image requires 8 bits per pixel, and can display 256 different colors.  If you are doing extensive editing and/or image processing, you may find it better to work with a 24-bit image, only converting to a smaller color-depth if necessary before saving.

The size of an image in pixels can be obtained by multiplying the size of an image in inches by the value of the image’s resolution in dpi (dots per inch).  Since the pixel is the smallest unit of the image, how "finely" you can edit an image depends on the pixel size of an image.  To make extremely fine changes to an image, you may find that you have to resize the image so that its pixel dimensions are larger. However, the memory requirements of an image depends entirely on the pixel size of the image, so larger pixel dimensions means more use of your computer’s resources and possibly decreased performance/responsiveness of editing functions.

To display the New dialog, from the main menu, choose File -> New... or press the <Ctrl> + <N> key combination.

The following are the fields in the New dialog:

Name Edit box:

Use the Name edit box to give your image a name. This name will be shown in the image window’s title bar.

Width Edit box:

Use the Width edit box to enter the image’s width.  This value may use pixels, centimeters, or inches as its unit of measure, based on the option selected in the drop-down list box beside the Width edit box.

Height Edit box:

Use the Height edit box to enter the image’s height.  This value may use pixels, centimeters, or inches as its unit of measure, based on the option selected in the drop-down list box beside the Height edit box.

Resolution Edit box:

Use the Resolution edit box to enter a resolution for the image.  For images to be printed, you may want to set the resolution higher than the printer resolution while editing.  The resolution can be in pixels per centimeters or pixels per inch, based on the option selected in the drop-down list box beside the Resolution edit box.

Image Type Drop-down List box:

Use the Image Type drop-down list box to select the image's bit-depth. Increasing the bit depth increases the number of colors an image can display. It also increases the memory required to store and edit an image.

Image Memory Size

The memory required to hold the new image is displayed in the box labeled Image Memory Size. As you select different bit-depths in the Image Type drop-down list box, you can see the value in the Image Memory Size box change.

Back Color button:

Use the Back Color button to bring up the Color Dialog. This dialog can then be used to set the background color of the new image.

Customize Palette

Use the customize palette button to open the Customize Palette Dialog where you can choose a palette to be set as a default palette on your newly created image, palettes are only available when you create images of bit-depth 8 or less.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and create the image.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Color Dialog

Customize Palette Dialog

Main Menu


Open Dialog

Use the Open dialog to browse to the folder your image is in, and then select the image you want to open in LEADViEW.

For more general descriptions of supported file formats in the Open dialog, refer to Summary of All Supported Image File Formats.

To display the Open dialog, from the main menu, choose File -> Open... or press the <Ctrl> + <O> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Open dialog:

Look in Drop-down List box:

Use the Look in drop-down list box to select the drive or folder where your images are stored. When you select a drive or folder from the Look in list, the content of the selected drive or folder will appear in the list below the Look in drop-down list box.

File Name Edit box:

Use the File Name edit box to enter the name and path of the file you wish to open.

Files of type Drop-down List box:

Use the Files of type drop-down list box to select the file format that you wish to open.

Load Rotated Check box:

Use the Load Rotated check box to indicate whether to load image files that have been saved with a rotated view-perspective without rotating them. If the Load Rotated box was checked in the dialog, then the image will be loaded in a rotated state. If the Load Rotated box was not checked, then the image will be loaded in its original state.

Load Compressed Check box:

Use the Load Compressed check box to indicate whether to load 1-bit (black & white or 2-color) files as 1-bit RLE-compressed images or as uncompressed images.  This can significantly decrease the memory requirements of 2-color images like scanned text documents and line drawings. If the Load Compressed box is checked, the images will be loaded compressed. If the Load Compressed box is not checked, then the images will be loaded uncompressed.

Progressive Passes Drop-down List box:

Use the Progressive Passes drop-down list box to select the number of passes (scans through the image) used when loading a progressive JPEG, LEAD CMP, interlaced PNG or JBIG file.

Page No. Edit box:

Use the Page No. edit box, to set the page number of the multi-page file. (Only applies to multi-page files) This page will be displayed in the preview box. Page numbering is one-based. Therefore, the first page in the file is page 1, the second page is page 2, etc.

Delete Page button:

Use the Delete Page button to delete the page indicated in the Page No. edit box from the selected file in the file list.

Open

Use the Open button to open the selected file. When this button is pressed, the dialog box closes and the file is opened in a new image window. When opening files in LEADViEW, the Abort dialog will appear to enable you to abort the loading operation.

Some file formats require extra information provided by the user. When a file format that require extra information is opened, the Open dialog will display the appropriate dialog to let the user supply the necessary information.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog box without opening the file.

 Go To Last Folder Visited

Use the Go To Last Folder Visited button to move to the last visited folder. (This button is only available on Windows 2000 and later versions).

 Up One Level

Use the Up One Level button to move up one folder as you navigate.

 New Folder

Use the New Folder button to create a new folder.

 View Menu

Use the View Menu button to select the view in the list of the folders and files, the view will be Large Icons, Small Icons, List, Details, or Thumbnails.  (This button is only available on Windows 2000 and later versions).

 Preview Selected File

Use the Preview Selected File button to view the selected file image before opening it.

Shortcut Bar

Along the left side of the dialog, there is a panel containing icons for History, My Documents, Desktop, and File Info.

.

 History

Use History button to view the recently visited folders and recently opened files.

 My Documents

Use My Documents button to view the files on your "My Document" folder.

 Desktop

Use Desktop button to view the files on your desktop.

 File Info

Use the File Info button, to display a File Information Dialog containing more information about the selected image file.

See Also

Main Menu

DWF File Format Options Dialog

DXF/DWG File Format Options Dialog

Get Resolution Dialog

PLT File Format Options Dialog

WMF Import Resolution Dialog

File Information Dialog

File Formats


Save As Dialog

Use the Save As dialog to specify the save options for an image file.

For more general descriptions of supported file formats in the Save As dialog, refer to Summary of All Supported Image File Formats.

To display the Save As dialog, from the main menu, choose File -> Save As... or press the F12 key.

The following are the fields in the Save As dialog:

Save in Drop-down List box:

Use the Save in drop-down list box to select the drive or folder in which to save the image file. When you select a drive or folder from the Save in list the content of the selected drive or folder will appear in the list below the Save in drop-down list box.

File Name Edit box:

Use the File Name edit box to enter the name of the file you wish to save.

Save as type Drop-down List box:

Use the Save as type drop-down list box to select the file format to use when saving the file.

When saving an image with alpha channel information, the file should be 16, 32 or 64-bit.  Saving alpha channel information to a file with any other bit depth will cause a loss in data in the alpha channel.

Subfile Type Drop-down List box:

Use the Subfile Type drop-down list box to select the sub-types available for the image format selected in the "Save as type" box.  This will often list alternate image compression techniques for a given type of file.

Qfactor Edit box:

Use the Qfactor edit box to specify a number that determines the degree of loss in the compression process when saving to an image that uses a lossy compression technique.  Valid values are 2 (highest quality) to 255 (lowest file size), or you can use values from -1 to -9 to specify a preset quality factor.  This only applies to files saved as LEAD CMP or Wavelet, JPEG, JPEG2000, and TIFF with JPEG compression. For more information, refer to Compression Quality Factors.

Progressive Options Drop-down List box:

Use the Progressive Passes drop-down list box to select the number of passes (scans through the image) used when saving a progressive JPEG, LEAD CMP, interlaced PNG or JBIG file.  This value is not relevant to any other file format.

Multipage Drop-down List box

Use the Multipage drop-down list box to indicate how to save a page to a multi-page file. This is used only with TIFF and PCX multi-page files. Possible values are:

 Overwrite the file.

 Append the page to the end of the file.

 Replace the page.

 Insert the page. This will be inserted as the page specified in the Page edit box.

Page Edit box:

Use the Page edit box to specify the page number in the selected multi-page file where you would like to replace or insert the image. This is only valid if you have specified either Replace page or Insert page in the Multi-page drop-down list box.

Compression Control Drop-down List box:

Use the Compression Control drop-down list box to select the compression to use when saving the file.  Available options are:

 Lossless compression. Use lossless compression when saving the file. The decoded image will exactly match the encoded image.

 Compression Ratio. Compress the image file using the ratio set in the Comp Ratio edit box.

 Target File Size. Compress the image file to the size specified in the Target Size edit box.

 Use q-factor. Compress the image file based on the value in the QFactor edit box.

Comp. Ratio Edit box:

Use the Comp. Ratio edit box to enter the target compression ratio if the Compression Ratio option has been set in the Compression Control drop-down list box. The Comp. Ratio value is the ratio of the uncompressed file size to the compressed file size. For example, a value of 25.00 means the uncompressed image file is 25 times as large as the compressed image file.

Progressing Order Drop-down List box:

Use the Progressing Order drop-down list box to select one of the following options:

 Quality–axis order. The image starts out blurry and becomes clearer and more detailed as additional data is decoded.

 Resolution-axis order. The image starts out small and becomes larger as additional data is decoded.  Higher compression ratios are achieved by leaving lower resolutions in the file.

 Position–axis order. The image starts out as a series of blocks starting from the top left corner.  Additional portions of the image become visible as more data is decoded.   Image data is stored by spatial location.

 Color-axis order. The image starts out gray.  Color is added as more data is decoded.  Image data is stored by color channel, starting with channel Y, then U, then V.  If the transform to YUV option is used, the lowest decompressed image level for RGB is grayscale. Otherwise, the output is only the red channel.

Target Size Edit box:

Use the Target Size edit box to enter the desired size of the output file. This is only available if the Target File Size option has been set in the Compression Control drop-down list box.

Advanced… button:

Use the Advanced…button to open the Advanced JPEG 2000 Options Dialog box. This button appears only if you are saving a JPEG2000 file.

Stamp Options Section:

The Stamp Options Section, found on the right side of the dialog box, consists of the Save Stamp Check box, the 8-bit and 24-bit radio buttons, and the Stamp Width and Stamp Height edit boxes. These are used to save a stamp with the image file. This is only available if the selected image format supports stamps.  LEAD 24-bit and JPEG 24-bit file formats support saving a stamp.

 Save Stamp check box. Check this box to save a stamp in the image file.

 8-bit. Save the stamp as 8-bit.

 24-bit. Save the stamp as 24-bit.

 Stamp Width edit box. Enter the width of the stamp to save.

 Stamp Height edit box. Enter the height of the stamp to save.

Save

Use the Save button to save the file and close the dialog box.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog box, without saving the image to a file.

 Go To Last Folder Visited

Use Go To Last Folder Visited button to move to the last visited folder. (This button is only available on Windows 2000 and later versions).

 Up One Level

Use Up One Level button to move up one folder as you navigate.

 New Folder

Use New Folder button to create a new folder.

 View Menu

Use View Menu button to select the view in the list of the folders and files, the view will be Large Icons, Small Icons, List, Details, or Thumbnails.  (This button is only available on Windows 2000 and later versions).

Shortcut Bar

Along the left side of the dialog, there is a panel containing icons for History, My Documents, Desktop, and File Info.

 History

Use History button to view the recently visited folders and recently opened files.

 My Documents

Use My Documents button to view the files on your "My Document" folder.

 Desktop

Use Desktop button to view the files on your desktop.

 Favorites

Use Favorites button, to view the files on your Favorites folder.

See Also

Main Menu

Advanced JPEG 2000 Options Dialog

Compression Quality Factors


Message Dialog

Use the Message dialog to e-mail the current active image.

Before you can send e-mail, you must configure the e-mail profile.  The Email Profile Dialog will appear if you try to send e-mail without first setting up an e-mail profile.

To successfully send a message, at least one recipient should be specified (no other part of the message is required).

A file is not actually attached when it is added to the attachment list-view control; the file is attached when the "Send" option is issued.  If an error occurs while attaching the file, the message cannot be sent and an error dialog box is displayed indicating the file.

Any other errors will cause the dialog to be closed and a message box will show the corresponding error.

A message box will notify you when the message has been successfully sent.

Note:	The image must be saved on disk before it can be sent.  If the image was modified, LEADViEW will prompt you to save changes before you can send the email.

To display the Message dialog, from the main menu, choose File -> Send….

To exit this dialog without sending the email, choose File -> Exit from menu, or press <Alt>+<F4>.

The following are the fields in the Message dialog:

To Edit box:

Use the To : edit box to enter the addresses of the primary recipients of the message. To specify more than one recipient in the field, separate the addresses by spaces or by semicolons. This is part of the message header.

Cc Edit box:

Use the Cc : edit box to enter the addresses of others who are to receive the message, though the content of the message may not be directed at them. To specify more than one recipient in the field, separate the addresses by spaces or by semicolons. This is part of the message header. Cc refers to "Carbon Copy".

Bcc Edit box:

Use the Bcc : edit box to enter the addresses of recipients of the message whose addresses are not to be revealed to other recipients of the message. To specify more than one recipient in the field, separate the addresses by spaces or by semicolons. This is part of the message header. Bcc refers to "Blind Carbon Copy".

Subject Edit box:

Use the Subject edit box to enter the subject for your email. This is part of the message header.

Email Body Edit box:

Use the Email Message Body edit box, located right below the Subject edit box, to enter the text for your email message. Text formatting is not available, but some basic editing options are available, such as copy, cut, paste, undo, and text file import.

Attachments:

Use the Attachments box at the bottom of the dialog to contain the attachments added to the email. LEADViEW will automatically attach the current active image to your message.

To bring up the Attachments pop up menu, right-click anywhere in the Attachments box. A new menu will pop up with following options:

 Attach File. Attaches one or more files to the email. When you choose this option, an open dialog box is displayed, which lets you select the desired files. Selected files will be added to the Attachments box.

 View. Determines how the attachments will be displayed.

 Select All. Selects and highlights all the contents of the Attachments box.

If you right-click on any attachment, the following two options will also be available:

 Open. Opens the attachment using its associated program. You also can open the attachment by double-clicking on it.

 Remove. Removes the attachment from Attachments list. You also can remove it by pressing the <Del> key.

The following are buttons in the toolbar, just above the "To: edit box".

 Copy

Use this button to copy all or part of the message body, the To edit box, the Cc edit box, the Bcc edit box or the Subject edit box contents. Highlight the desired area and:

 choose Edit -> Copy, or

 press the Copy button [image] on the toolbar, or

 press the  <Ctrl> + <C> keys or

 press the <Ctrl> + <INS> keys.

 Cut

Use this button to cut all or part of the message body, the To edit box, the Cc edit box, the Bcc edit box or the Subject edit box contents. Highlight the desired area and:

 choose Edit -> Cut, or

 press the Cut button [image] on the toolbar, or

 press the  <Ctrl> + <X> keys.

 Paste

Use this button to paste text to the message body, the To edit box, the Cc edit box, the Bcc edit box or the Subject edit box contents. Place the cursor in the desired location and:

 choose Edit -> Paste, or

 press the Paste button [image] on the toolbar, or

 press the  <Ctrl> + <V> keys or

 press the  <Shift> + <INS> keys.

 Undo

Use this button to undo an editing or typing action in the message body, the To edit box, the Cc edit box, the Bcc edit box or the Subject edit box contents. To undo:

 choose Edit -> Undo or

 click the [image] Undo button on the toolbar, or

 press the <Ctrl> + <Z> keys.

 Attach File

Use this button to attach one or more files to the email. When you choose this option, an Open Dialog box is displayed, which lets you select the files to attach. Selected files will be added to the Attachments box.

 Importance

Use this button to specify the importance level of the email. To set the importance level (low, normal, or high), either press the arrow portion of the ‘Importance’ toolbar button and then select the desired level from the popup menu, or press the main part of the button until it switches to the desired importance level. The tool tip displayed when the mouse cursor moves over the button reflects the level selected.

 Send

Use this button to send your email, once you have finished editing it. This can also be done using the File -> Send option from the menu.

If an invalid address is specified, the message cannot be sent and an error dialog box will be displayed indicating the field containing the invalid address.

The following commands can be found in the menus of the menu bar. These commands do not have a corresponding button on the toolbar.

Select All

Use this command (Edit -> Select All) to highlight the entire contents of the message body, the To edit box, the Cc edit box, the Bcc edit box, the Subject edit box, or the Attachments contents, depending on the location of the cursor.

Import File

Use this command (File -> Import Files…) to import a text file.

If an error occurred while importing the file, the error dialog box is displayed and the text already existing in the body field will not be affected. Otherwise, the existing text is replaced with the imported text (this cannot be undone).

See Also

Email Profile Dialog

Main Menu


Capture Options Dialog

Use the Capture Options dialog to set up some general capturing preferences like hotkey, multi-capture settings, and cursor options.

To display the Capture Options dialog, from the main menu, choose File -> Import -> Screen Capture -> Capture Options -> General….

The following are the fields in the Capture Options dialog:

HotKey Edit box:

Use this to set the key that you will be using to trigger screen capture.  Click inside the edit box and then press the key you wish to use.  The screen capture hotkey is <F11> by default.

Delay Edit box:

Use this to set the time interval to wait between pressing the HotKey and beginning capture.  This value defaults to 0 (capture starts immediately).

Repeat Edit box:

Use this to set the number of captures to perform.  This value defaults to 1.

Interval Edit box:

Use this to specify how long to wait between captures.  Only applicable if the repeat value is greater than 1.

Cancel Key Edit box:

Use this to specify which key to use to end the capture process.  This box is disabled if the Use Esc Key check box is checked.

Use Esc Key Check box:

Use this to specify that the <Esc> key is to be used to end capture.

Captured Cursor Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the cursor that is placed on the captured image. To choose no cursor, select the cursor with the X over it.

Delay Cursor Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the cursor to use between multiple captures. To choose no cursor, select the cursor with the X over it.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Capture Selected Object Options Dialog

Use the Capture Selected Object Options dialog to set the capture selected object options, like cursor, border, and other options for use during object capture.

To display the Capture Selected Object Options dialog, from the main menu, choose File -> Import -> Screen Capture -> Capture Options -> Object Selection….

The following are the fields in the Capture Selected Object Options dialog:

Draw Cursor Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the cursor that will be visible during the object capture operation.

Border Width Edit box:

Use this to set the width of the border that will appear around objects under the cursor during object capture.

Invert Selected Object Check box

Check this to cause the object under cursor to appear in inverted colors during object capture.

Enable Key Board Check box

Check this to enable the <Shift> key during the selection process. Pressing the <Shift> key will select the interior area of the object.

Default

Press the Default button to restore the default settings of all dialog options.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Capture Area Options Dialog

Use the Capture Area Options dialog to set the capture area options.

To display the Capture Area Options dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Import -> Screen Capture -> Capture Options -> Area Selection….

The following are the fields in the Capture Area Options dialog:

Area Type Drop-down List box:

Use this to choose the shape that you wish to capture.  Available shapes are rectangle, rounded rectangle, ellipse, triangle, polygon, and freehand.

Note:	The Rounded Rectangle shape uses the values of the ellipse width and ellipse height to define its corners.

Draw Line Style Drop-down List box:

Use this to choose the line style for the visible border during area selection.

Fill Pattern Drop-down List box:

Use this to choose the pattern to be used to fill the background of the capture.

There will be some background area to fill for any non-rectangular capture, as the captured area will be placed onto the smallest rectangle that can fully contain it.

Draw Cursor Drop-down List box:

Use this to choose the cursor to be displayed during the area selection.  This is only enabled if the Cross Line Cursor checkbox is not checked.

Ellipse Width Edit box:

Use this to set the width of the ellipse used to create the corners of the Rounded Rectangle area.

Ellipse Height Edit box:

Use this to set the height of the ellipse used to create the corners of the Rounded Rectangle area.

Include Cursor In Captured Area Check box

Check this to include the capture cursor (defined in the General Capture Options Dialog) in the captured image, if the cursor is inside the captured area during the capture process.

Cross Line Cursor Check box

Check this to use the default cross line cursor for area selection.

Bitmap With Region Check box

Check this to create an image from the screen capture with the current selection set to the area that was captured.

Show Draw Cursor Check box

Check this to make the area-selection cursor visible during capture.

Enable Keyboard Check box

Check this to enable the <Ctrl>, <Shift>, <+>, and < - > keys while drawing the area to capture.

The <+> and < - > keys are used for zooming in and zooming out, respectively, in the info window.

If an area is a rectangle, round rectangle, or ellipse, pressing the <Ctrl> key will center the drawing. If an area is a rectangle, round rectangle, or ellipse, pressing the <Shift> key will draw regular shapes (that is ellipse becomes a circle, rectangle becomes a square, etc.).

Position X Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the info-window position to left, right, or custom.

Position Y Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the info window position to top, bottom, or custom.

Width Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the width of the info window to Tiny, Small, Medium, Large, X-Large or custom.

Height Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the height of the info window to Tiny, Small, Medium, Large, X-Large or custom.

Position X Edit box:

Use this edit box to set the info window x position value when the Position X drop-down list box is set to custom.

Position Y Edit box:

Use this edit box to set the info window y position value when the Position Y drop-down list box is set to custom.

Width Edit box:

Use this edit box to set the info window width value when the Width drop-down list box is set to custom.

Height Edit box:

Use this edit box to set the info window height value when the Height drop-down list box is set to custom.

Zoom Drop-down List box:

Use this drop-down list box to set the amount of magnification applied to the pixels around the mouse cursor when viewed in the info window.

Show Cursor Position Check box

Check this to show the cursor position, while drawing the area, right next to the cursor.

Show Info Window Check box

Check this to make the info window visible.

Show Capture Size check box

Check this to show the capture size information, while drawing the area, right next to the cursor.

Sensitive Info Window Check box

Check this to enable Sensitive detection for the Info window position.

Show Opaque Text Check box

Check this so that the text for the cursor position and the capture size will have an opaque background when displayed.

Colors Section:

This section consists of a drop-down list box and a Set Color button for customizing color options.

Use the drop-down list box to select the attribute for which to customize its color options. Then choose the proper color using the Set Color button.

Default

Press the Default button to restore default dialog options.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Video Capture Dialog

Use the Video Capture dialog to import images from a video capturing device.

LEADViEW can capture a single image or a series of images from a video capturing device, and import them as new images.

This dialog requires that you have a video device installed.

To display the Video Capture dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Import -> Video Capture….

The following are the fields in the Video Capture dialog:

 Properties

Use this to bring up the Capturing Properties Dialog box. Use this dialog to set various capture options.

 Capture Frame

Use this to capture a single frame immediately. The frame will be imported to LEADViEW as a new image. Be sure to adjust the capturing device properly to get the desired image.

 Capture a Series of Frames

Use this to capture a series of frames with a delay between each capture. This option can be customized from the Capturing Properties Dialog box by setting the values Count and Delay.

When this option is chosen, the capturing state begins. Frames will be captured, one after another, depending on the delay, until the set number of frames have been captured.

To cancel this capturing process at any time, just uncheck the Capture a Series of Frames button [image], or you can safely close the dialog.

Close

Use the Close button to close the dialog. The dialog can also be closed by pressing the <Esc> key or by pressing the <Alt> + <F4> keys.

Video Preview Window

This preview window shows a live preview of the video source. It will be resized dynamically, depending on the dialog size.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the capturing operation that has been completed.

Status Window

Displays a short message to indicate the capturing state. Is also displays some errors as well.

See Also

Capturing Properties Dialog

Main Menu


HTML Map Creator Dialog

Use the HTML Map Creator dialog to create an HTML map over an image.

An image map provides a means of navigating web pages via clickable areas on an image.  An image map consists of an image and associated HTML code.  The HTML code specifies the locations of that image's active areas (hotspots) and the behavior that is linked to those areas.  Typically, clicking on one of the hotspots will take the user to a new web page, but other behaviors are possible.

This dialog provides an easy way to generate the HTML for an image map.

To display the HTML Map Creator dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Export -> HTML Map Creator….

The following are the fields in the HTML Map Creator dialog:

Workspace View

This is the main workspace used to create and edit map areas on an image.

The view can be dragged, using the Pan Image Tool, when it is not in ‘Zoom to Fit’ mode.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire image to the workspace view.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view the image with normal scale in the workspace view.

 Pan Image Tool

Use this tool to navigate the previewed image when it is not in ‘Zoom to Fit’ zoom mode. Place the mouse cursor over the preview window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the open hand cursor [image], when it’s over the previewed image, and to the closed hand cursor [image] when dragging.

 Select Area Tool

Use this tool to select an area by clicking on it.  The currently selected area is surrounded by a green bounding rectangle.  The selected area’s information is displayed on the left pane of the dialog box.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the select cursor [image] when it’s over the previewed image.

 Edit Area Tool

Use this tool to begin editing an area by clicking on it. When editing begins, the edit frame will be shown instead of the dotted frame. In addition, the point handles will be shown, and any of the following operations will be available:

 Move. Click and drag within the area to move it.

 Resize. Click and drag the upper left or lower right corner of a rectangular, square, or circular area to resize it.

 Edit Points. Click and drag any of the points of a polygon to move them.

 Accept Changes. Double-click on the image to exit editing mode and apply the changes.

 Cancel Changes. Right-click on the image or choose another tool to exit editing mode and discard changes.

 To abort editing at any time, right-click the mouse.

 If editing results in too small an area, it will be automatically discarded.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the edit cursor [image] when it’s over the previewed image.

 Delete Area Tool

Use this tool to remove a map area. Choose this tool and click on the desired map area to be removed.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the delete cursor [image] when it’s over the previewed image.

 Rectangle Tool

Use this tool to create rectangular areas. Click on the image in the workspace view to create one corner of the area. Drag the cursor until the area is enclosed, then release the mouse button.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the rectangle area cursor [image] when it’s over the previewed image.

To abort area creation at any time, right-click before releasing the left mouse button.

If the created area is too small, it will be automatically discarded.

 Square Tool

Use this tool to create square areas. Left click on the image in the workspace view to create one corner of the area. Drag the cursor until the area is enclosed, then release the mouse button.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the square area cursor [image] when it’s over the previewed image.

To abort area creation at any time, right-click before releasing the left mouse button.

If the created area is too small, it will be automatically discarded.

 Circle Tool

Choose this tool to create circular areas. Left click on the image in the workspace view to create one corner of the bounding square for the circle. Drag the cursor until the area is enclosed, then release the mouse button.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the circle area cursor [image] when it’s over the previewed image.

To abort area creation at any time, right-click before releasing the left mouse button.

If the created area is too small, it will be automatically discarded.

 Polygon Tool

Use this tool to create polygonal areas. Left click on the image in the workspace view to set the first vertex of the polygon. Continue clicking on the image to set the other vertices.  To set the position of the last vertex, double-click on the image.  A line between the last vertex and the starting point is generated.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the polygon area cursor [image] when it’s over the previewed image.

To abort area creation at any time, right-click before closing the polygon.

If the created area is too small, it will be automatically discarded.

 Clear All

Use this to remove all areas on the workspace and start over.

 Delete Current Selection

Use this to delete a selected area on the workspace.

 Edit Current Selection

Use this to start editing a selected area on the workspace. When editing begins, the edit frame will be shown instead of the dotted frame. In addition, the point handles will be shown, and any of the following operations will be available:

 Move. Click and drag within the area to move it.

 Resize. Click and drag the upper left or lower right corner of the rectangular, square, or circular area to resize it.

 Edit Points. Click and drag any of the points in the polygon to move them.

 Accept Changes. Double-click on the image to exit editing mode and apply the changes.

 Cancel Changes. Right-click on the image or choose another tool to exit editing mode and discard the changes.

To abort editing at any time, right-click the mouse.

If the editing results in too small an area, it will be automatically discarded.

 Duplicate Selection

Use this to duplicate an area.  When this is clicked a new area is created with a shape similar to the selected area. Information like URL link, alternative text… etc is not copied. The new area is placed over the area that was duplicated, and becomes the currently selected area.

 Select Next Area

Use this to move the selection between areas on the workspace by clicking repeatedly until the desired area is selected.

The currently selected area is surrounded by a green bounding rectangle.  The selected area’s information is displayed on the left pane of the dialog box.

 Preview In Browser

Use this to bring up a new web browser window with a page containing your image map loaded.

If tuning settings were changed, the appropriate Web Tuner Dialog will be shown to set the proper tuning options needed to preview the image.

A web browser must be installed on your system in order to preview the resulting HTML image map. If you check the "Only include selected object" check box, then only the selected object will be used when creating the HTML code.

 Copy to Clipboard

Use this to generate HTML code and copy it to the clipboard. If an HTML file was not saved before, a Directory dialog will be displayed to let you select the destination folder for the HTML file. This information is required to generate an HTML file. If an HTML file was saved before, the copy process will use the same folder location as the HTML file destination. Copying allows you to specify an image name every time. LEADViEW automatically generates an HTML file and copies it to the clipboard. You can paste the generated text in other applications (like Notepad).

When the Save As Dialog is displayed, browse to the desired folder and enter the desired name for the HTML file and the image.

When the Browse for Folder Dialog shows, navigate through the folders tree, and choose the desired output folder for the HTML file.

You can generate and copy only the selected object area by checking the "Only include selected object" checkbox.

 Save to Disk

Use this to save an HTML file to disk. If any changes are made that require new file names, then a Save As Dialog box will be displayed to save the HTML file, and another dialog  will be displayed to save the image file. LEADViEW automatically generates an HTML file and saves it. If this occurs successfully, a message indicating success will appear. If the HTML file is not generated successfully or if it is not saved successfully, a message describing the error will be displayed.

When the Save As Dialog is displayed, browse to the desired folder and enter the desired name for the HTML file and the image.

You must specify the HTML file name and image file name only when you first save the files, or when you make a change that requires new file names, like changing the image format for example.

Rollover images will be copied (with the same name) to the same mapped image directory.

When the HTML Map Creator dialog box generates the HTML code for the positions of the map areas, it also saves the image to the format you selected in the format group. This information is used for reassembling the image and map areas on a web page.

You can generate and save only the selected object area by checking the "Only include selected object" checkbox.

 Save to Disk with a New Name

Use this to generate an HTML file to disk. A Save As dialog box will be displayed to save the HTML file and another dialog to save the image file. LEADViEW automatically generates an HTML file and saves it. If this occurs successfully, a message indicating success will appear. If the HTML file is not generated successfully or if it is not saved successfully, a message describing the error will be displayed.

When the Save As Dialog is displayed, browse to the desired folder and enter the desired name for the HTML file and the image.

Rollover images will be copied (with same name) to the same mapped image directory.

When the HTML Map Creator dialog box generates the HTML code for the positions of the map areas, it also saves the image to the format you selected in the format group. This information is used for reassembling the image and map areas on a web page.

You can generate and save only the selected object area by checking the Only include selected object checkbox.

URL Edit box:

Use this to set the URL of the web page that will be accessed when the user clicks the area.

Alt Text Edit box:

Use this to enter a short description of the area. Some browsers can display this text as a tool tip when the user hovers over the area.

Target Edit box/List box:

Use this to determine how the new page should be displayed. The following are possible options:

 If you have a named frame into which you would like the new page to load, specify that name here.

 _self. The new page should replace the current page or frame in the browser.

 _blank. The new page should load in a new browser window.

 _parent. The new page should load in the parent or containing frameset of the current page

 _top. The new page should load in the top level of the current browser window, replacing any existing framesets.

Image Format Drop-down List box:

Use this to select an image format from the image format drop-down list box.  Supported formats are GIF, JPEG, and PNG.

Web TunedCheck box:

Check this to generate a tuned image. When the image is to be saved and tuning settings are changed, the appropriate Web Tuner Dialog box for the selected format will be displayed to set the tuning properties.

Only include selected object Check box:

Check this to create a hotspot for the image using only the selected area.

Event List box

Use this to assign a rollover image to one or more mouse events. A rollover image is an image that will be displayed when a mouse event occurs, instead of the image currently being displayed. Each event may specify a separate rollover image and each map area can have more than one event associated with it.

Select the event to handle, and check the Enabled check box to enable that event. (Clear the box to disable that event.) Select the rollover image to associate with that event. When the event is fired, the associated rollover image will be displayed instead of the image that is currently displayed.

Enabled Check box:

Check this to enable the selected event. Clear it to disable the selected event.

Image Edit box:

Use this to set the rollover image, which is the image that will be displayed when the corresponding event is fired.

Type the path name of the new image file, or click on the box to show a history of image files, or press the Open button [image] to browse and select the image file to use.

This image file will replace the original image in a web browser when the corresponding event happens. Leave this box empty to use the same background image as a rollover image.

Close

Use the Close button to close the dialog.

See Also

GIF Web Tuner Dialog

JPEG Web Tuner Dialog

PNG Web Tuner Dialog

Main Menu


JPEG Web Tuner Dialog

Use the JPEG Web Tuner dialog to tune images to target the web.

Most web browsers can display images in JPEG format.  Since the amount of time it takes to download an image file depends directly on how large that image file is, one of the most important issues to consider in saving your image is how to best reduce the size of the image file without sacrificing too much quality.

Quality vs. File Size Issue

There is typically a tradeoff between image quality and image file size.  Ideally, you want to keep images as small as possible to reduce the time it takes to download them, but quality generally decreases as file compression increases.

JPEG files can be made smaller by increasing the value of the "q-factor" specified when saving, but very large q-factors can make the image appear "blocky".

JPEG Lossy Image Compression

JPEG provides very high compression ratios using a lossy compression technique.  This means that when you save a jpeg image, the pixel values you see when you re-open that image will be slightly different from the original.   At low q-factors, these changes will usually be almost imperceptible, particularly with photographic or continuous tone images.  As you increase the q-factor, the file size will become smaller, but the changes will become more noticeable.

When to Use the JPEG Format

Use this format to compress photographic or continuous tone images.

It supports 24-bit (16.7 million) color, uses lossy compression, and is recognized by most browsers.

To display the JPEG Web Tuner dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Export -> Web Tuner -> JPEG….

The following are the fields in the JPEG web tuner dialog:

Compression Drop-down list box:

Use this to select which JPEG compression format will be used. There are three choices:

 JPEG File Interchange Format with YUV 4:4:4 color space. This is the default format, and has the highest quality.

 JPEG File Interchange Format with YUV 4:2:2 color space.

 JPEG File Interchange Format with YUV 4:1:1 color space.

Progressive Check box:

Use this to control the appearance of an image as it is being loaded. There are two choices:

 Standard (unchecked), the image is displayed in consecutive lines, one line at a time, from top to bottom.

 Progressive (checked), the image is displayed incrementally in several passes, and detail is added each time. Use this option with larger images so that the viewer can get an idea of how the image looks while waiting for it to download.

Compression Edit box and Slider:

Use the slider or the edit box to set the compression value. Valid values are between 2 (highest quality) and 255 (smallest file size).

Use the preview display to determine the right balance between quality and file size.

Save Thumbnail Check box:

Check this to save a thumbnail with the file.

JPEG images support storing a small thumbnail of the image in the image file.  Some browsers and image editors use this thumbnail to display a preview or thumbnail of the image quickly.

Uncompressed Size

Displays the file size with no compression applied.

Compressed Size

Displays the file size of the compressed JPEG image.

Baud Rate Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the modem speed used to calculate the estimated download time.

Estimate Download Time

Displays an estimation of the time required to download the image using the modem speed specified in the Baud Rate drop-down list box.

Export

After you have selected the options, click the Export button to open the Save As Dialog. Browse to the folder in which you want to save the new image and enter a name for the file. When you click the Save button, a copy of the image is saved as a JPEG file, and the original image is left unchanged. You can then return to the dialog to export another copy, or to exit the dialog.

Close

Use the Close button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Before View

This view, located above the "Uncompressed Size" box, shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

This view can be dragged when it is not in ‘Zoom to Fit’ zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view, located above the "Compressed Size" box, shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in ‘Zoom to Fit’ zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Click this button to fit the entire preview image in both the Before View and After View windows.

 Zoom to Normal

Click this button to view the images at normal scale in both the Before View and After View windows.

See Also

GIF Web Tuner Dialog

PNG Web Tuner Dialog

Main Menu


PNG Web Tuner Dialog

Use the PNG Web Tuner dialog to tune images to target the web.

Many browsers now support the PNG image format.  Since the amount of time it takes to download an image file depends directly on how large that image file is, one of the most important issues to consider in saving your image is how to best reduce the size of the image file without sacrificing too much quality.

PNG is a replacement for the GIF format. It is a full-featured (non-LZW) compressed format intended for widespread use without legal restraints.

Quality vs. File Size Issue

There is typically a tradeoff between image quality and image file size.  Ideally, you want to keep images as small as possible to reduce the time it takes to download them, but quality generally decreases as file compression increases.

When to Use the PNG Format

This format compresses most images efficiently. It supports up to 24-bit (16.7 million) color and uses lossless compression, but not all browsers support it yet. You may use it as a replacement for GIF images.

To display the PNG Web Tuner dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Export -> Web Tuner -> PNG….

The following are the fields in the PNG web tuner dialog:

Color Depth Drop-down List box:

Use this to select a standard color depth to be used with the exported PNG image. Possible color depths for PNG images are 1-bit, 4-bits, 8-bits, and 24-bits per pixel. Using fewer colors results in smaller files, but also reduces the quality of the image.  As you change the color depth, you can see the resulting image in the After View window.

Number of Colors Edit box:

When the color depth is 8-bits or less (the image is using indexed colors), you may specify the maximum number of colors that the PNG image can have. Indexed PNG images can have from 2 colors to 256 colors.  Using fewer colors results in smaller files, but also reduces the quality of the image.  As you change the number of colors, you can see the resulting image in the After View window.

Dithering Drop-down List box:

When the color depth is 8-bits or less (image is using indexed colors), use dithering to approximate colors that are not in the image’s palette.  Dithering works by arranging pixels with existing palette colors so that the average color of a pixel and its neighbors is close to the desired missing palette color.

LEADViEW supports the following dithering algorithms:

Nearest Color Matching
Floyd-Steinberg dithering
Stucki dithering
Burkes dithering
Sierra dithering
Stevenson Arce dithering
Jarvis dithering
Ordered dithering
Clustered dithering

See the Color Resolution Dialog box for more information on dithering methods.

Palette Drop-down List box:

When the color depth is 8-bits or less (image is using indexed colors), you can choose one of the following palettes to use with the image:

 Fixed. This uses the system’s fixed palette.

 Custom. This allows the user to choose the maximum number of colors to use, and LEADViEW will generate the proper palette that best matches the image’s colors.

Add Windows Colors Check box:

Check this box to include the 16 standard windows colors in the palette. If the image will be used on the web, it is recommended that you select this option.

Enabled Check box:

Check this if the resulting PNG image should have a transparent color.

Transparent Color button

Use this to select the color you wish to be transparent. You can also use the [image] Eyedropper tool to select a color directly from the image.

Tolerance Edit box:

Use this to specify a tolerance value that determines how close a pixel's RGB value should be to the specified transparent color to be considered transparent.  Specifying larger numbers will make more of the image transparent.

Uncompressed Size

Displays the file size with no compression applied.

Compressed Size

Displays the file size of the compressed PNG image.

Baud Rate Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the modem speed used to calculate the estimated download time.

Estimated Download Time

Displays an estimation of the time required to download the image using the modem speed specified in the Baud Rate drop-down list box.

Export

After you have selected the options, click the Export button to open the Save As Dialog. Browse to the folder in which you want to save the new image and enter a name for the file. When you click the Save button, a copy of the image is saved as a PNG file, and the original image is left unchanged. You can then return to dialog to export another copy, or to exit the dialog.

Close

Use the Close button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Before View

This view, located above the "Uncompressed Size" box, shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

This view can be dragged when it is not in ‘Zoom to Fit’ zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view, located above the "Compressed Size" box, shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in ‘Zoom to Fit’ zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Click this button to fit the entire preview image in both the Before View and After View windows.

 Zoom to Normal

Click this button to view the images at normal scale in both the Before View and After View windows.

 Eyedropper Tool

Choose this tool and click on the Before view, or the active image opened in LEADViEW to select the transparent color from the image directly. The chosen color will be displayed in the Transparent Color button in the dialog. When the color is selected directly from the image, the current color value can be read using the Cursor Info Rollup Dialog. If the color is selected from the Before view, the tool-tip box will show the current value in RGB.

See Also

Color Resolution Dialog

GIF Web Tuner Dialog

JPEG Web Tuner Dialog

Main Menu


GIF Web Tuner Dialog

Use the Gif Web Tuner dialog to tune images to target the web.

Most web browsers can display images in GIF format.  Since the amount of time it takes to download an image file depends directly on how large that image file is, one of the most important issues to consider in saving your image is how to best reduce the size of the image file without sacrificing too much quality.

Quality vs. File Size Issue

There is typically a tradeoff between image quality and image file size.  Ideally, you want to keep images as small as possible to reduce the time it takes to download them, but quality generally decreases as file compression increases.  GIF files can be made smaller by using fewer colors in an image’s palette, but the more you decrease the number of colors, the more "grainy" the image will appear.

In addition, some computers are only capable of displaying up to 256 colors.  If an image on a web page contains more colors, the Web browser uses its own dithering (color reduction) method to display the image. This can produce color distortion.   If you reduce the color depth of the image to 8 bits (256 colors) before placing it on your Web page, its appearance will be more consistent.

GIF’s Lossless image compression

Lossless, in this context, means that you can obtain exactly the same pixel RGB values when you open (decompress) an image file as the pixel values that were originally saved (compressed).  Bear in mind, however, that GIF can store a maximum of 8 bits/pixel, and the conversion of a 24 bit per pixel "true color" image to 8 bits/pixel is itself a lossy process (if the original image contains more than 256 unique colors).

When to Use the GIF Format

Use GIF images to save:

 images like text and line art on solid or simply colored backgrounds,

 images with large blocks of a single solid color,

 images with a small number of unique colors, and

 images that must have "transparent" sections (such as an irregularly shaped object that will be displayed over another background image).

GIF supports up to 8-bit (256) color.

To display the GIF Web Tuner dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Export -> Web Tuner -> GIF….

The following are the fields in the GIF web tuner dialog:

Color Depth Drop-down list box:

Use this to select a standard color depth to be used with the exported GIF image. Possible color depths for GIF images are 1-bit per pixel (2 color) to 8-bits per pixel (256 colors). Using fewer colors results in smaller files, but also reduces the quality of the image.  As you change the color depth, you can see the resulting image in the After View window.

Number of Colors Edit box:

Another way to specify the color depth is to choose the maximum number of colors that a GIF image can have. GIF images can have from 2 colors to 256 colors.  Using fewer colors results in smaller files, but also reduces the quality of the image.  As you change the number of colors, you can see the resulting image in the After View window.

Dithering Drop-down list box:

When the color depth is 8-bits or less, use dithering to approximate colors that are not in the image’s palette.  Dithering works by arranging pixels with existing palette colors so that the average color of a pixel and its neighbors is close to the desired missing palette color.

LEADViEW supports the following dithering algorithms:

Nearest Color Matching
Floyd-Steinberg dithering
Stucki dithering
Burkes dithering
Sierra dithering
Stevenson Arce dithering
Jarvis dithering
Ordered dithering
Clustered dithering

See the Color Resolution Dialog box for more information on dithering methods.

Palette Drop-down List box:

When the color depth is 8-bits or less, you can choose one of the following palettes to use with the image:

 Fixed. This uses the system’s fixed palette.

 Custom. This allows the user to choose the maximum number of colors to use, and LEADViEW will generate the proper palette that best matches the image’s colors.

Add Windows Colors Check box:

Check this box to include the 16 standard windows colors in the palette. If the image will be used on the web, it is recommended that you select this option.

Enabled Check box:

Check this if the resulting GIF image should have a transparent color.

Transparent Color button:

Use this to select the color you wish to be transparent. You can also use the [image] Eyedropper tool to select a color directly from the image.

Tolerance Edit box:

Use this to specify a tolerance value that determines how close a pixel's RGB value should be to the specified transparent color to be considered transparent.  Specifying larger numbers will make more of the image transparent.

Uncompressed Size

Displays the file size with no compression applied.

Compressed Size

Displays the file size of the compressed GIF image.

Baud Rate Drop-down List box:

Use this to set the modem speed used to calculate the estimated download time.

Estimated Download Time

Displays an estimation of the time required to download the image using the modem speed specified in the Baud Rate drop-down list box.

Export

After you have selected the options, click the Export button to open the Save As Dialog. Browse to the folder in which you want to save the new image and enter a name for the file. When you click the Save button, a copy of the image is saved as a GIF file, and the original image is left unchanged. You can then return to dialog to export another copy, or to exit the dialog.

Close

Use the Close button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Before View

This view, located above the "Uncompressed Size" box, shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

This view can be dragged when it is not in ‘Zoom to Fit’ zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view, located above the "Compressed Size" box, shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in ‘Zoom to Fit’ zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Click this button to fit entire preview images in both the Before View and After View windows.

 Zoom to Normal

Click this button to view the images at normal scale in both the Before View and After View windows.

 Eyedropper Tool

Choose this tool and click on the Before view, or the active image opened in LEADViEW to select the transparent color from the image directly. The chosen color will be displayed in the Transparent Color button in the dialog. When the color is selected directly from the image, the current color value can be read using the Cursor Info Rollup Dialog. If the color is selected from the Before view, the tooltip box will show the current value in RGB.

See Also

Color Resolution Dialog

JPEG Web Tuner Dialog

PNG Web Tuner Dialog

Main Menu


Image File Format Association Dialog

Use the Image Formats File Association dialog box to select the image file formats that will automatically be opened on your system by LEADViEW.

Once you have associated an image file format with LEADViEW, any files of that type on your system will use the LEADViEW icon when they appear in the Windows Explorer, on your Desktop, or in Windows Common Dialogs.  When you open a file of that type by double-clicking its icon, LEADViEW will start and then load that file into its workspace.

To display the Image Formats File Association dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Preferences -> File Format Associations….

The following are the fields in the Image Formats File Association dialog:

Formats Association List

Use the Formats Association List to select the image formats to associate with LEADViEW.

Select All

Use the Select All button to select all the image formats that are supported by LEADViEW.

Select None

Use the Select None button to have no image formats associated with LEADViEW.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes. Changes include associating the following icon [image] with the selected file formats.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Directories Dialog

Use the Directories dialog box to change, add, or delete image directories in your system.

When LEADViEW is installed, it creates some default folders on your system where it loads images used for tubes, patterns, textures, border tile images, and frames images.  Use the Directories dialog box to set additional folders that LEADViEW will search when loading these files.

To display the Directories dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Preferences -> Directories….

The following are the fields in the Directories dialog:

Pattern Images Tab

Use the Pattern Images tab to set the folders from which to load images used by the Tools Options Tabs when a tiled image style is selected. For example, the shape background color, the fill style, and the text background style may all use a tiled image style.

To add a new folder, click the Pattern Images tab on the dialog box. Click the New Item button [image] and add the pathname to the list by typing it into the next available slot, or by browsing to it using the Browse button [image].

To delete an item from the list, select it, then press the Delete Item button [image] or press the <Del> key.

Texture Images Tab

Use the Texture Images tab to set the folders from which to load images used by the Underlay Dialog and the Tools Options Tabs, whenever using textures is enabled.

To add a new folder, click the Texture Images tab on the dialog box. Click the New Item button [image] and add the pathname to the list by typing it into the next available slot, or by browsing to it using the Browse button [image].

To delete an item from the list, select it, then press the Delete Item button [image] or press the <Del> key.

Tube Images Tab

Use the Tube Images tab to set the folders from which to load images used by the Tools Options Tabs for the paintbrush style.

To add a new folder, click the Tube Images tab on the dialog box. Click the New Item button [image] and add the pathname to the list by typing it into the next available slot, or by browsing to it using the Browse button [image].

To delete an item from the list, select it, then press the Delete Item button [image] or press the <Del> key.

Add Border Tile Images Tab

Use the Add Border Tile Images tab to set the folders from which to load images used by the Add Border Dialog.

To add a new folder, click the Add Border Tile Images tab on the dialog box. Click the New Item button [image] and add the pathname to the list by typing it into the next available slot, or by browsing to it using the Browse button [image].

To delete an item from the list, select it, then press the Delete Item button [image] or press the <Del> key.

Add Frame Images Tab

Use the Add Frame Images tab to set the folders from which to load images used by the Add Frame Dialog.

To add a new folder, click the Add Frame Images tab on the dialog box. Click the New Item button [image] and add the pathname to the list by typing it into the next available slot, or by browsing to it using the Browse button [image].

To delete an item from the list, select it, then press the Delete Item button [image] or press the <Del> key.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu

Add Border Dialog

Add Frame Dialog

Underlay Dialog

Paintbrush Options Tab

Shape Options Tab

Fill Options Tab

Text Options Tab

Image Lists


General Preferences Dialog

Use the General Preferences dialog to set or change the undo/redo levels, swap file location, recent files list size in LEADViEW, and other options.

To display this dialog, from the main menu select File > Preferences > General Preferences….

The following are the fields in the General Preferences dialog:

Recent File List Size

The Recent File List Size controls the number of files included in the recent files list, found in the file menu. When a file is opened in LEADViEW, its name will be added to the recent files list. Enter the value directly in the edit box, or use the arrows to set the desired value. Possible values are from 1 to 10.

Swap Folder Edit box:

Use the edit box to set the path to the folder in which LEADViEW will create temporary files to help optimize memory use. Use the the browse button to browse to the destination folder.

Wallpaper Folder box:

Use the Wallpaper Folder box to view the current folder in which wallpaper images are saved. LEADViEW creates a copy of the selected image and stores it in this folder so Windows can use it as wallpaper. Use the browse button to browse to the destination folder.

Undo/Redo Level Edit box:

Use the Undo/Redo level edit box to set the undo level for LEADViEW.  Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value. Valid values range from 1 to 99.

LEADViEW provides undo and redo commands to reverse and re-apply the last change(s) performed on the active image.  It can undo or redo individual paint strokes, or the application of an effect or filter, the selection of a region, etc.

Changing the Undo/Redo level clears the Undo/Redo buffer, so you will lose the ability to undo changes to the image made before resetting the Undo/Redo level.

File Formats Association

Select the "Always verify file associations on startup" option to enable LEADViEW to check the association of some file formats normally associated with it at startup. When this option is selected, and some file formats are not associated with LEADViEW, the Confirm File Formats Associations Dialog will be displayed at start up.

Viewing

Select the "Auto size image view window and adjust the zoom level when creating/loading large images" option to enable LEADViEW to adjust the zoom level when an image is opened, so that the entire image is visible.

Email

Select the "Show information message when mail is sent successfully" check box to enable LEADViEW to show an information message when email is sent without any problem.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Get Directory Dialog

Confirm File Formats Associations Dialog


Confirm File Formats Associations Dialog

This dialog will be shown on LEADViEW’s startup if File Formats Association automatic checking feature was enabled and some file formats that are normally associated with LEADViEW are currently not.

The following are the fields in the Confirm File Formats Associations Dialog:

Always verify file associations on startup check box:

Select this option to enable LEADViEW to check the association of some file formats normally associated with it at startup.

Yes

Use the Yes button to close the dialog and bring up the File Formats.

No

Use the No button to close the dialog without taking any action.

See Also:

General Preferences Dialog

Image File Format Association Dialog


Email Profile Dialog

Use the Email Profile dialog to create an e-mail profile. An e-mail profile must be configured before you can send an image by e-mail from LEADViEW.

To display the Email Profile dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Preferences -> Email Profile….

The following are the fields in the Email Profile dialog:

Address Edit box:

Use this to specify your SMTP server, which is used for the outgoing mail. You can get this information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or Network Administrator. You cannot send emails without properly setting this field.

Name Edit box:

Use this to specify the "friendly" name associated with your e-mail address. When you send messages, this name appears in the ‘From’ header of the message.

Email Address Edit box:

Use this t specify the e-mail address that people should use when sending mail to you at this account. Valid e-mail addresses must be in the format name@domain. This field is required.

User Name Edit box:

Use this to specify your logon name. Use it if your Internet service provider requires you to use Secure Password Authentication (SPA). Leave this box blank if not needed.

Password Edit box:

Use this to enter your logon password. For security, the actual characters do not appear in this space; instead, each character is represented by an asterisk ( * ).

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Message Dialog

Main Menu


Print Preview Dialog

Use the Print Preview dialog to see how the image will look when printed, send the print command, flip, rotate, scale or align.

When the Print Preview dialog opens, it will display the active image.

To display the Print Preview dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Print Preview….

The following are the fields in the Print Preview dialog:

Workspace

This is the area that contains the Page Layout View, and the space around it.

To resize the workspace, do one of the following:

1.	Use the maximize window button, minimize window button, or restore window button.

2.	Move the mouse cursor to one of the Print Preview window borders, or to the lower-right corner. The mouse cursor will change to indicate that you are ready to resize. Press the left mouse button and drag to the desired size.

To scroll the view, when scrolling is available, drag the scroll bars or use the mouse wheel, if one is present.

Page Layout View

The Page Layout View displays the page, as it will appear when printed.

An outline appears around each selected image in the Page Layout View.  This outline will not appear in the printed output.

 Print

When you are ready to print the page, choose File -> Print, or press the [image] Print button.

The page is sent directly to the printer. No print dialog box is opened.

Note:	If an image extends beyond the edges of the page, only the part of the image within the page margins is printed.

 Page Setup

To show the Page Setup Dialog box, select File -> Page Setup, or press the [image] Page Setup button.

Use the Page Setup dialog box to select the page orientation, the margin width, and the paper size.

Here the ‘Printer’ button is disabled. You can’t change the printer inside the Print Preview dialog.

 Zoom Tool

Use this to zoom in on a specific location in the previewed page.

To use this tool:

1.	Click the Zoom Tool button [image] in the toolbar. The cursor changes to the magnifying glass cursor [image] when it’s over the Page.

2.	Move the mouse cursor to the desired zoom location and click to zoom and focus. Repeatedly clicking this tool will loop through the available zooming levels.

When the Print Preview dialog is displayed, the Page Layout is displayed to fit the size of the window, so that resizing the window automatically changes the magnification of the page. Use this option to change the zoom without changing the window’s size.

 Flip Vertically

Use this to flip an image vertically. Click this button in the toolbar or choose Image -> Flip Vertically from the menu.

 Flip Horizontally

Use this to flip an image horizontally. Click this button in the toolbar or choose Image -> Flip Horizontally from the menu.

 Rotate CW

Use this to rotate images in increments of 90° clockwise. Click this button in the toolbar or choose Image -> Rotate 90° CW from the menu.

 Rotate CCW

Use this to rotate images in increments of 90° counter-clockwise. Click this button in the toolbar or choose Image -> Rotate 90° CCW from the menu.

 Stretch to Fit

Use this to stretch the image to fit the entire page. Click this button in the toolbar or choose Image -> Stretch to Fit from the menu. The image will be stretched to fill the printable area of the page (margins are discarded), and the image will keep its aspect (height to width) ratio.

 Scale Normally

Use this to view the image at its original size. Click this button in the toolbar or choose Image -> Scale Normally from the menu. The image will be centered with its original size restored.

 Align Center Bottom

Aligns the image at the center bottom of the page.

 Align Center Top

Aligns the image at the center top of the page.

 Align Centered

Aligns image at center of the page.

 Align Left Bottom

Aligns the image at the left bottom of the page.

 Align Center Left

Aligns image at left center of the page.

 Align Left Top

Aligns the image at the left top of the page.

 Align Right Bottom

Aligns the image at the right bottom of the page.

 Align Center Right

Aligns the image at the right center of the page.

 Align Right Top

Aligns the image at the right top of the page.

Preferences

Select File -> Preferences from the menu to bring up the Preferences Dialog box, which lets you set the units of measure.

Exit and Export Preview

Select File -> Exit and Export Preview from the menu to create a new image from the print preview. This option will close the Print Preview Dialog, and open a new image window in LEADViEW's main window containing the new image.

Image Info Pane

This pane is located in the status bar and displays image scale info in units that can be determined using the Preferences Dialog box.

Help Topics

Displays help topics related to print preview.

 Exit

To exit the Print Preview Dialog, select File -> Exit from the menu, or press the Exit button on the toolbar, or Press the <Alt>+<F4> keys.

Any changes made in the Page Setup dialog will be preserved.

See Also

Preferences Dialog

Page Setup Dialog

Print Preview Dialog

Main Menu


Page Setup Dialog

Use the Page Setup dialog to setup paper size, orientation, and margins.

To display the Page Setup dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Page Setup….

The following are the fields in the Page Setup dialog:

Size Drop-down List box:

Use this to select the paper size.

Source Drop-down List box:

Use this to select the paper source.

Portrait Radio button:

Use this to print starting at the top of the paper and continue to the bottom of the paper.

Landscape Radio button:

Use this to print starting at the left side of the paper and continue to the right side of the paper.

Left Edit box:

Use this to set the width of the left side margin in inches.

Right Edit box:

Use this to set the width of the right side margin in inches.

Top Edit box:

Use this to set the width of the top margin in inches.

Bottom Edit box:

Use this to set the width of the bottom margin in inches.

Printer button:

Use this to bring up the Print Setup Dialog Box, to select a different printer or to set the printer properties.

This dialog contains the following options:

 Name: Use this to select your preferred printer device from the listed devices.

 Properties: Click on this to bring up the printer device customization dialog. The printer device customization dialog is specific for each printer.

 Status: Displays information about the selected printer's status.

 Type: Displays information about the selected printer's type.

 Where: Displays information about the printer location. For example, the figure above shows a printer that is located on a virtual port for a network printer.

 Comment: Displays a comment if available.

 Network: Use this to connect to a network shared printer.

 OK. Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

 Cancel. Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog box and save the settings.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Print Preview Dialog

Main Menu


Rotate Dialog

Use the Rotate dialog to rotate an image around its center.

There are two modes available when rotating an image, with and without resize.  Resize refers to the canvas size, as the size of the actual image contents remains unchanged.  This means that a line in the original image that is 100 pixels long will still be 100 pixels long in the rotated image, although it’s direction will have changed.  If you rotate without resize, the canvas size remains unchanged, so the corners of the original image may get clipped away when they get rotated off the original canvas.  Rotating with resize will increase the canvas size to prevent the clipping of image corners.

It might be helpful to think of rotating a piece of paper upon a desktop to visualize this.  Place the paper on a desktop and draw a line around it.  Now rotate the paper.  Rotating without resize is equivalent to cutting the paper along the lines you previously drew around it.  Rotating with resize is equivalent to drawing new borders around the image parallel to the original borders, but completely containing the rotated image.  In either case, any portions of the resulting image that are not covered by the rotated original image are filled with the background color selected from the rotation dialog box

If the image contains a non-floating selection, the selection will be rotated along with the image. Otherwise if an image contains a floating selection, only the floater will be rotated.  The floater is rotated around its center.

The Rotate dialog box allows you to set the angle of rotation, the resample method used, the background fill color, and whether or not to resize the canvas to accommodate the rotated image.

To display the Rotate dialog, from the main menu, select Image -> Rotate… or press the <Ctrl> + <R> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Rotate dialog:

Clockwise Angle edit box:

Use the Clockwise Angle edit box to set the angle of rotation. Positive values provide clockwise rotation and negative values provide counter-clockwise rotation. In addition, you can slide the slider to set the angle value. Valid values range from –360.00 to 360.00.

Interpolation Type Drop-down List box:

Use the Interpolation Type drop-down list box to set the quality of interpolation performed when resampling the pixels in the un-rotated image, to generate the new pixels in the rotated image. The following are the possible interpolation types:

 Normal: No interpolation is performed. This is the fastest.

 Resample: Perform bilinear interpolation when rotating. This produces adequate quality output for photographic images.

 Bicubic Resize: Perform bicubic interpolation when rotating. This gives the highest quality.

Resize Check box:

Use the Resize check box to indicate whether the rotate operation should resize the image to accommodate the rotated height and width (checked), or retain the original height and width, cropping the bitmap as necessary (cleared).

Background button:

Use the Background color picker button to select the color that will fill any canvas areas exposed by the rotation operation. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the required color.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

After View

This view shows the original image with dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Shear Dialog

Use the Shear dialog to distort the original rectangular shape of the image into a parallelogram.  Horizontal shearing changes vertical lines on the original image to slanted ones.  Vertical shearing changes horizontal lines to slanted ones.

To display the Shear dialog, from the main menu, select Image -> Shear… or press the <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <R> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Shear dialog:

Clockwise Angle Edit box:

Use the Clockwise Angle edit box or the slider to set the angle of the shear. Positive values provide clockwise shear and negative values provide counter-clockwise shear. Valid values are –45.00 degrees to +45.00 degrees.

Horizontal Check box:

Use the Horizontal check box to set the type of shear, checked for horizontal and unchecked for vertical.

Background button

Use the Background color picker button to select the color to fill any canvas areas exposed by the shear operation. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the background color.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Combine Dialog

Use the Combine dialog to create a new image by combining two existing open images in any of a number of ways.  The pixels of the resulting image are derived by performing the specified operation on the corresponding pixels of the source images.  The available operations are: Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide, Min, Max, Average, Logical OR, Logical AND, and Logical XOR.

You have the option of inverting either or both of the images before performing the operations.

The size of the resulting image will be the same as the size of the first of the selected images or Source (1).  You have the option of using the second image at actual size, or first resizing it to the same size as the first image.

To display the Combine dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Calculations -> Combine….

The following are the fields in the Combine dialog:

Source (1) Section:

This section consists of an Image drop down list box, a Channel drop-down list box and an Invert check box that can be used to set the first source image of the operation.

Image Drop-down list box: Use the Image drop-down list box to choose the image that will represent the first source.

Channel Drop-down list box: Use the Channel drop-down list box to choose which color channel (from the first source image) will be involved when combining the two images. When All Channels is checked, this drop-down list box is dimmed, and all channels of the first source image are involved.

Invert Check box: Use the Invert check box to invert the image colors before combining them.

Source (2) Section

This section consists of an Image drop down list box, a Channel drop-down list box and an Invert check box that can be used to set the second source image of the operation.

Image Drop-down list box: Use the Image drop-down list box to choose the image that will represent the second source.

Channel Drop-down list box: Use the Channel drop-down list box to choose which color channel (from the second source image) will be involved when combining the two images. When All Channels is checked, this drop-down list box is dimmed, and all channels of the second source image are involved.

Invert Check box: Use the Invert check box to invert the image colors before combining them.

Color Depth Drop-down list box:

Use the Color Depth drop-down list box to set the bit depth of the resulting image.

Function Drop-down list box:

Use the Function drop-down list box to set the combine function to use.

All Channels Check box:

Use the All Channels check box to indicate whether the combine function should work on a single color channel from both source images, or it should work on all channels of the source images. If this is checked, all channels from the source images will be used in creating the new image.

Resize Check box:

Use the Resize check box to resize the second image to the first image’s size.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog. The image resulting from the Combine process will be opened in a new image view window.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Add Border Dialog

Use the Add Border dialog to place a border outside or inside an image.

The pixel dimensions of the image remain unchanged if borders are placed inside, but will increase if borders are placed outside.

LEADViEW offers a variety of options for adding a border.  Styles range from simple single-color borders to complex tiled borders.

To display the Add Border dialog, from the main menu select Image -> Add -> Border….

The following are the fields in the Add Border dialog:

Left, Right, Top, and Bottom edit boxes:

Use these to set the thickness in pixels of the left, right, top and bottom margins. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Placement Drop-down list box:

Use this to indicate where the border will be added. Possible values are:

 Outside. The border is placed outside the image, causing the image to resize.

 Inside. The border is placed inside the image.

Lock Margins Check box:

Use this to indicate whether the left, right, top and bottom margins will be identical. If this is checked, the margins will all be identical. If this is not checked, then the left, right, top and bottom margins will have the widths indicated in the Left, Right, Top and Bottom edit boxes.

Border Style Drop-down list box:

Use this to specify the fill style of the added border. There are four choices:

 Same Image. The main image is used to fill the borders.  When the border is outside, the image is stretched to fill the outside border.

 Opaque. The borders are filled with a solid color. Click the color picker button in the "Options" section to activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the solid color.

 Gradient. The borders are filled with a transition of two colors. Click the color picker buttons in the "Options" section to activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the start and end colors. In addition, choose the fill style from the drop-down list box in the "Options" section.

 Tiles. The borders are filled by a tiled image. Click the image picker button in the "Options" section to activate an image list that will be used to pick the tiled image.

Shadows Section:

The Shadows section contains options for configuring the shadows rendered on the image. Select Add Shadows from the first drop-down list box to enable shadows. To disable shadows, select None from the drop-down list box. Determine the placement of the shadow(s) with the second drop-down list box, left, right, or surround. This section also includes the Size, Edit box and the Bumped Check box, discussed below.

Size Edit box: Use this to set the size of the shadows, in pixels.

Bumped Check box: Check this to include a "bumped" appearance to the shadow.

When the border is placed inside the image, shadows are rendered on the original image. If the border is placed outside, shadows are rendered on the added border.

Effect Section:

The Effect section contains several options for adding further effects to the border. The first drop-down list box lets you modify the appearance of the borders as follows:

 Curved In. This adds a 3D appearance to the border by adding a high intensity color to the inner side of the border and a lower intensity color to the outer side of the border.

 Curved Out. This adds a 3D appearance to the border by adding a high intensity color to the outer side of the border and a lower intensity color to the inner side of the border.

 Raised. This adds a curved appearance to the border.

This section also includes the Intensity, Smooth and Size options discussed below.

Intensity Edit box: Use this to set the Intensity value to determine the strength of the light effect.

Smooth Check box: Check this for a light that is homogeneous in intensity. This results in a smoother effect.

Size: This value indicates the maximum border thickness to which the effect will be applied.

Presets Drop-down list box:

This drop-down list box lets you set any of a number of predefined border settings. Set the margin sizes before selecting a predefined border setting.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Preview Window

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Color Dialog

Image Lists

Main Menu


Add Frame Dialog

Use the Add Frame dialog to place a user-defined or a pre-defined frame outside or inside the borders of an image.

The frame can be added inside or outside the borders of the original image.  If added outside, the image’s canvas size is increased to accommodate the new frame.  If added inside, the image’s canvas size is unchanged, but the new frame covers the outer portion of the original image.

To display the Add Frame dialog, from the main menu, select Image -> Add -> Frame….

The following are the fields in the Add Frame dialog:

Placement Drop-down list box:

Use the Placement drop-down list box to select whether to place the frame inside or outside the picture.

 Outside Picture. The frame is placed outside the image, causing the image’s canvas size to increase to accommodate the new frame.

 Inside Picture. The frame is placed inside the image. The image’s canvas size is unchanged, but the new frame covers the outer portion of the original image.

Frame button

Use the Frame image picker button to select the frame image. Clicking the image picker button will activate an image list that will be used to pick the image.

Use Mask Check box

Check the Use Mask check box to extend the image within or beyond the frame picture. You must specify a transparent color to use as a mask color.

Tolerance Edit box:

Use the Tolerance edit box to set the tolerance value used to remove grains at the inner edge of the frame. This is used when you are not using a mask.

Transparent Color button

Use the Transparent Color button to select the color used as a mask. Clicking the color picker button (available when Use Mask is checked) will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the transparent color.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Preview Window

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when changes are applied.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

 Eyedropper Tool

Choose this tool and click on the preview window to select the transparent color from the image directly. The chosen color will be displayed in the transparent color box. This tool is only available when the Use Mask option is checked.  The current color value, given in RGB values, can be read from the tooltip box shown near the mouse cursor.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog

Image Lists

Directories Dialog


Auto Trim Dialog

Use the Auto Trim dialog to trim the blank space from the edges of an image. Generally, this is used for automatically trimming blank space from the edges of scanned documents. Blank space is detected based on intensity changes from the image edges. The Auto Trim Dialog can trim edges of any fairly constant color and intensity.

A threshold can be specified, which is used to determine if a row or column of pixels is to be considered part of the area that will be trimmed away. Starting at the edge and working inwards, a row or column of pixels will be trimmed if the change in RGB values is less than or equal to the specified threshold.

To display the Auto Trim dialog, from the main menu, Image -> Crop -> Auto Trim….

The following are the fields in the Auto Trim dialog:

Threshold Edit box and slider:

Use the edit box or the slider to set the threshold value. This value is used to determine whether a row or column of pixels will be trimmed.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Canvas Resize Dialog

Use the Canvas Resize dialog to change the dimensions of the image.

Changing the canvas size means changing the dimensions of the image by adding pixels to or removing pixels from the edges of the image.

You can increase or decrease the canvas on a specific side or around the entire image. When you increase the canvas size, LEADViEW adds pixels using the specified background color.

Decreasing the canvas size produces the same result as cropping the image.

While the entire image resulting from the changed canvas size will be larger or smaller than the original image, the actual portion of the original image carried over to the new image will not have changed in size.

To display the Canvas Resize dialog, from the main menu, select Image -> Canvas Resize….

The following are the fields in the Canvas Resize dialog:

New Width Edit box:

Enter the new width, in pixels, for the resulting image.

New Height Edit box:

Enter new height, in pixels, for the resulting image.

Maintain Aspect Ratio Check box:

Check this to keep the relative proportions of the image(height to width ratio). Clear this to use the height and width set in the Height and Width edit boxes, without maintaining the aspect ratio.

Current Width:

Displays the current image width for your reference.

Current Height:

Displays the current image height for your reference.

Horizontal Drop-down list box and edit box

Use this to select the horizontal alignment: Left, Center, Right and Custom.  Custom alignment allows you to specify the horizontal offset in pixels. If this is set to Custom, the horizontal offset should be added in the edit box beside this Horizontal drop-down list box.

Vertical

Use this to select the vertical alignment: Top, Center, Bottom and Custom.  Custom alignment allows you to specify the vertical offset in pixels. If this is set to Custom, the vertical offset should be added in the edit box beside this Vertical drop-down list box.

Background Color:

Use the Background Color button to select the background color to use when enlarging the canvas.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Resize Dialog

Color Dialog

Main Menu


Resize Dialog

Use the Resize dialog to change the active image's size (width and height, in pixels) and resolution (dots per inch) The resolution determines the physical size of a printed image. This dialog resizes the image without cropping it or adding new canvas around it.

Changing the image size means changing the pixel dimensions of the image and resizing the image to fit those new dimensions. Decreasing the image size will decrease the memory requirements and the file size of an image, but will also decrease the amount of detail in the image.

As an example, a 720x720 pixel image at 72 dpi will print at 10" x 10".  Changing the height and width to double these values, either by specifying 1440x1440 pixels or 200%, would result in a 20"x20" image at 72 dpi.  By contrast, specifying a new resolution of 144 dpi will automatically change the pixel height and width to 1440x1440, so the resulting image is still 10" x 10".

Three methods for resizing the image are available: "Normal" (no interpolation), "Resample" (bilinear interpolation) and "Bicubic" (bicubic interpolation).

Each method produces a resulting resized image of different quality. Bicubic resizing produces the highest quality image, whereas Normal resizing is the fastest.

To display the Resize dialog, from the main menu, select Image -> Resize…or press the <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <Z> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Resize dialog:

Width:

Displays the original image width in pixels.

Height:

Displays the original image height in pixels.

Size:

Displays the original image size in bytes.

Horizontal:

Displays the original image's horizontal dots per inch (dpi).

Vertical:

Displays the original image's vertical dots per inch (dpi).

Method Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the type of resizing to apply. There are three choices:

 Normal. This is a simple and fast resize.  Use this method if you need to maintain precise, crisp distinctions between different colored areas or need to maintain exact pixel RGB color values in the resulting image.  This is often useful if one color will ultimately by used as a transparent color in a GIF or PNG file.

 Resample. This is also called a Bilinear resize.  Use it when reducing photo-realistic images and images that are irregular or complex.  This method uses linear interpolation and averaging of the original RGB pixel values to generate new RGB values in the resized image.  It generally produces better-looking results than the "Normal" resize method.

 Bicubic. This uses a non-linear interpolation to minimize the raggedness normally associated with expanding an image. As applied here, interpolation smoothes out rough spots by estimating how the "missing" pixels should appear, and then filling them with the appropriate color. It produces better results than the "normal" resize method with photo-realistic images and with images that are irregular or complex. Use Bicubic resample when enlarging an image.

Maintain Aspect Ratio Check box:

Check this to keep the relative proportions of the image (aspect ratio). If this is not checked, the new image will be resized without regard to the original aspect ratio.

Width edit boxes:

Use these to select a new width, by setting one of the two edit boxes.

 The first edit box sets the new measurement in pixels.

 The second edit box sets the new width based on a percentage of the original image. Set the new size based on the percentage increase or decrease from the original.

If the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is checked, changing the width value automatically changes the height value by the same scaling factor.

Height Edit boxes:

Use these to select a new height, by setting one of the two edit boxes.

 The first edit box sets the new measurement in pixels.

 The second edit box sets the new height based on a percentage of the original image. Set the new size based on a percentage increase or decrease from the original.

If the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is checked, changing the width value automatically changes the height value by the same scaling factor.

Size:

Displays the resulting image's size in bytes.

Resolution Section:

The Resolution section consists of the Horizontal and Vertical edit boxes, which are used in determining the physical size of the printed image and the Identical Values check box.

Resetting the resolution maintains the same physical size of the image, but changes the pixel dimensions.

If the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is checked, the X and Y resolutions are automatically linked. If the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is not checked, you can check or uncheck the Identical Values check box to link or unlink X and Y resolutions.

Horizontal Edit box:

Use this to enter a new horizontal dots per inch value (dpi).

Vertical Edit box:

Use this to enter a new vertical dots per inch value (dpi).

Identical Values Check box:

Use this to indicate whether to link or unlink the Horizontal and Vertical values. This is only available if the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is not checked. Check this box to link the Horizontal and Vertical values, maintaining the aspect ratio. Uncheck the Horizontal and Vertical values to disregard the aspect ratio.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Canvas Resize Dialog

Main Menu


Posterize Dialog

Use the Posterize Dialog to apply a poster effect to the whole image or a selected area. This is done by reducing the number of color levels available in each of the color channels.  A 24 bit image has 256 levels in each color channel.  You can reduce this number to a value between 2 and 64 using the posterize effect.

If an image has less than 8 bits/pixel, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Posterize dialog from the main menu, select Color -> Posterize….

The following are the fields in the Posterize dialog:

Levels per color plane Edit box and Slider:

Use the Levels per color plane edit box, or the slider to set the number of color levels to use. Valid values range from 2 to 64.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Mosaic Dialog

Use the Mosaic Dialog to simulate the appearance of an image built from colored tiles. The effect is created by dividing the image into tiles of a specified size and changing the color of all pixels in each tile to the average color of pixels within the tile.

To display the Mosaic dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Pixelate -> Mosaic….

The following are the fields in the Mosaic dialog:

Tile Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the Tile Size edit box or the slider to set the tile size level. Valid values range from 2 to 64.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Average Dialog

Use the Average filter to remove noise from the entire image. This is done by averaging the values of neighboring pixels into each image pixel.

The Average filter is very useful for removing noise in large areas where there is little color or intensity change, but tends to blur details and edges. It is also useful for reducing the grainy appearance of color images that have been palettized. The amount of blurring produced by this effect depends on the number of neighboring pixels that are used in the average calculation.

To display the Average dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Blur -> Average….

The following are the fields in the Average dialog:

Sample Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the Sample Size edit box or the slider to change the intensity of the effect.  Larger values will increase smoothness and reduce noise, but can also cause sharp edges and detail to become blurred.  Valid values range from 3 to 255.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Median Dialog

Use the Median Filter to remove or minimize noise, where noise is any random discrepancy in an image. This is done by replacing an individual pixel's intensity with the median intensity of its neighboring pixels. This is similar to the process carried out by the Average Dialog, but the Median process is used for noise reduction, rather than blur effect. You control the effect by specifying the size of the neighborhood that is used for calculating the median value.

This filter also tends to preserve edges. Specify larger sample sizes to increase the effect.

To display the Median dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Noise -> Median….

The following are the fields in the Median dialog:

Sample Size

Use the Sample Size edit box or the slider to set the dimensions, in pixels, of the neighborhood used in calculating the median intensity value for each pixel. Valid values range from 2 to 64.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

View can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Sharpen Dialog

Use the Sharpen Dialog to increase or decrease the sharpness of the image. It has the greatest effect on areas in the image containing edges.

Note that if the image contains noise this filter will also make the noise appear more pronounced.

To display the Sharpen dialog, from the main menu, Effects -> Sharpen -> Sharpen….

The following are the fields in the Sharpen dialog:

Percentage

Use the Percentage edit box or the slider to change the intensity of the effect.  Larger values will increase sharpness and edge contrast, but can also cause noise enhancement, increased jaggedness and color distortion around edges.  Valid values range from –100 to 100.

Note that positive values sharpen the image, negative values blur the image.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Add Noise Dialog

Use the Add Noise dialog to add noise, where noise is any random discrepancy in an image, over an entire image or over a selection. You can specify the percentage of coverage and the color plane(s) to which to add the noise. Noise can be added into individual RGB color channels or into the entire image using the Master channel.

You may at times need to add noise to an image.  For example, if you are creating a composite image using one image with little noise and another image with more noise, you can add noise to the first image to make them match.  Or, if you have blurred or painted a portion of an image that contains noise, you may need to add some noise back into the area that you have modified.  Noise can also be used to add texture to an image.

To display the Add Noise dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Noise -> Add Noise….

The following are the fields in the Add Noise dialog:

Level Edit box and Slider:

Use level edit box or the slider to set the noise level.  Valid values range from 0 to 100.

Channel Drop-down list box:

Use the Channel drop-down list box to set the channel to which to add the noise.  Available options are:

Master

Red

Green

Blue

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Emboss Dialog

Use the Emboss dialog to create the appearance of a three-dimensional relief surface from the active image.

You can specify the apparent depth of the image and the direction from which the light highlighting the surface is coming.

To display the Emboss dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> 3D Effects -> Emboss….

The following are the fields in the Emboss dialog:

Depth Edit box:

Use the Depth edit box or the slider to set the apparent depth of the image.  Valid values range from 0 to 100.

Direction Drop-down list box:

Use the Direction drop-down list box to set the direction of the light source.  Available options are:

North

North-East

East

South-East

South

South-West

West

North-West

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Underlay Dialog

Use the Underlay dialog to combine two images so that one appears to be an underlying texture for the other.  This process changes the colors of the underlay to grayscale as it combines the images.  The underlying image can either be stretched or tiled to fill the target image.

To display the Underlay dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Texture -> Underlay….

The following are the fields in the Underlay dialog:

Settings Section:

The Settings section consists of an image picker button, a Stretched radio button and a Tiled radio button. These are used to set the underlay image and to determine how the underlying image will fill the resulting image.

Use the Underlay Image picker button to choose the underlying image. Clicking the image picker button will activate an image list that will be used to pick the image.

Use the Stretched and Tiled radio buttons to indicate how the underlying image should fill the target image. The image below shows the difference between a stretched image and a tiled image.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Image Lists


Oilify Dialog

Use the Oilify dialog to make the active image resemble an oil painting. The effect is obtained by changing each pixel value, based on the values of neighboring pixels. This blurs the image and gives the appearance that the image consists of dots of paint. The size of the dots of paint depends on the number of neighboring pixels that are used to determine the new pixel value, or the sample size. This value is set in the Sample size edit box.

To display the Oilify dialog, from the main menu, Effects -> Artistic -> Oilify….

The following are the fields in the Oilify dialog:

Sample Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the Sample Size edit box or the slider to set the size of the neighborhood used to generate the new pixel value. This can also be thought of as the size of the dots of paint to be used in the image. Valid values range from 2 to 255.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Gradient Dialog

Use the Gradient dialog to assign colors to detected edges.  The detected edges lie where the color in the original image changes most rapidly when moving in the specified direction. Therefore, North and South filters will find horizontal edges, East and West filters will find vertical edges, etc.

To display the Gradient dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Spatial Filters -> Gradient….

The following are the fields in the Gradient dialog:

Filter Value

Use the Filter Value drop-down list box to set the direction of the filter.  Available options are:

North

North-East

East

South-East

South

South-West

West

North-West

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Laplacian Dialog

Use the Laplacian dialog to specify which of 6 pre-defined Laplacian filters to apply. The Laplacian filters also provide line or edge detection.

To display the Laplacian dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Spatial Filters -> Laplacian….

The following are the fields in the Laplacian dialog:

Filter Value Drop-down list box:

Use this drop-down list box to select the Laplacian filter to use. The filters labeled "Filter 1", "Filter 2", and "Filter 3" are omni-directional filters of different strengths which detect edges in all directions. The remaining three filters, "Diagonal", "Horizontal", and "Vertical" detect edges based on their strength in the named direction.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Sobel Dialog

Use the Sobel dialog to detect horizontal or vertical edges.

To display the Sobel dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Spatial Filters -> Sobel….

The following are the fields in the Sobel dialog:

Filter Value Drop-down list box:

Use this drop-down list box to select the type of edges to detect. Available options are:

Horizontal

Vertical

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Prewitt Dialog

Use the Prewitt dialog to detect horizontal or vertical edges using Prewitt filters.

To display the Prewitt dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Spatial Filters -> Prewitt….

The following are the fields in the Prewitt dialog:

Filter Value

Use this drop-down list box to select the type of edges to detect. Available options are:

Horizontal

Vertical

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Shift and Difference Dialog

Use the Shift and Difference dialog to detect horizontal, vertical, or diagonal edges.

To display the Shift and Difference dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Spatial Filters -> Shift and Difference….

The following are the fields in the Shift and Difference dialog:

Filter Value Drop-down List box:

Use this drop-down list box to select the type of edges to detect. Available options are:

Diagonal

Horizontal

Vertical

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Line Segment Dialog

Use the Line Segment dialog to detect horizontal, vertical, left-to-right diagonal, or right-to-left diagonal edges.

To display the Line Segment dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Spatial Filters -> Line Segment….

The following are the fields in the Line Segment dialog:

Filter Value Drop-down list box:

Use this drop-down list box to select the type of edges to detect. Available options are:

Horizontal

Vertical

Left to Right Diagonal

Right to Left Diagonal

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Erosion Dialog

Use the Erosion dialog to erode, or shrink, dark objects.  It will make dark lines or text on a light background thinner.

To display the Erosion dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Edge -> Erosion….

The following are the fields in the Erosion dialog:

Filter Value Drop-down list box:

Use this drop-down list box to select the type of erosion filter to apply. Available options are:

Omni-directional

Horizontal

Vertical

Diagonal

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Dilation Dialog

Use the Dilation dialog to dilate, or enlarge, dark objects.  It makes dark lines or text on a light background thicker.

To display the Dilation dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Edge -> Dilation….

The following are the fields in the Dilation dialog:

Filter Value Drop-down List box:

Use this drop-down list box to select the type of dilation filter to apply. Available options are:

Omni-directional

Horizontal

Vertical

Diagonal

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Max Dialog

Use the Max dialog to erode or shrink dark objects.  It makes dark lines or text on a light background thinner.

To display the Max dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Noise -> Max….

The following are the fields in the Max dialog:

Sample Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the edit box or the slider to set the value of the sample size. A larger sample size will result in a more intense effect.  Valid values range from 3 to 32.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Min Dialog

Use the Min dialog to dilate or enlarge dark objects.  The Min filter makes dark lines or text on a light background thicker.

To display the Min dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Noise -> Min….

The following are the fields in the Min dialog:

Sample Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the edit box or the slider to set the value of the sample size. A larger sample size will result in a more intense effect.  Valid values range from 3 to 32.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Image Information Dialog

Use the Image Information dialog to display information about the active image, including its name, format, dimensions, bit depth, resolution, file size and memory usage.

To display the Image Information dialog, from the main menu, select Image -> Image Information… or press the <Shift> + <I> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Image Information dialog:

File Name:

Displays the name of the image file.

Format:

Displays the image file format.

Width:

Displays the image width in pixels.

Height:

Displays the image height in pixels.

Depth:

Displays the image color depth.

Size On Disk:

Displays the image size on disk (possibly compressed). This is only available for saved images.

Size In Memory:

Displays the image size in memory.

Compression:

Displays the type of compression if any. This is only available for saved images.

X Resolution:

Displays the horizontal resolution (dpi). Resolution is used in determining the physical size of the printed image.

Y Resolution:

Displays the vertical resolution (dpi). Resolution is used in determining the physical size of the printed image.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog.

See Also

Main Menu


Halftone Dialog

Use the Halftone dialog to convert a 4-, 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit image to a halftoned image, with a specific pattern rotation.  A halftoned image is a 1-bit image that has been dithered for black and white printing or display.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Halftone dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Transform -> Halftone….

The following are the fields in the Halftone dialog:

Angle Edit box and Slider:

Use the Angle edit box or the slider to set the halftone pattern rotation angle, in degrees. Valid values range from -360 to 360.

Type Drop-down List box:

Use the Type drop-down list box to set the type of half-toning to perform.  Available options are:

Print: Halftone for printing

View: Halftone for display

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Color Resolution Dialog

Use the Color Resolution dialog to change the bit depth of your image. LEADViEW supports images with bit depths of 1, 4, 8, 16, 24, and 32.

To display the Color Resolution dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Transform -> Color Resolution… or press the <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <O> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Color Resolution dialog:

Bits Per Pixel Drop-down list box:

Use this drop-down list box to select the bit depth to which to convert the image.

Dithering Method Drop-down list box:

Use this drop-down list box to set the dithering method to use.

When an image is converted to a lower bit-depth, the resulting image has fewer colors in its palette than the original.  In order to simulate the appearance of these missing colors, the new palette colors can be dithered, or mixed so that the average values of neighboring pixels comes close to the value of the missing color.  This is similar to the way newspaper pictures produce the appearance of shades of gray, even though the only actual colors are black and white (the average of black and white dots around a point should be close to the gray value of that point in the original image).

There are several methods available for dithering colors.  These fall into three categories:

 No Dithering. This is the simplest of all methods.  Each pixel is considered individually, and is given the palette color that most closely matches the original color.  If no palette color comes close to the original color, the results may be poor.

 Ordered and Clustered Dithering. These methods create a grid like pattern where the averages of neighboring pixels more closely approximate the original colors than with No Dithering.  However, they generally produce repetitive, geometric artifacts.

 Error Diffusion Dithering. These methods work by finding the closest match for an individual pixel, then distributing the error, or difference between the palette color and the original color, to neighboring pixels before they are matched.  This tends to produce the best results overall, but may produce strange random or wandering artifacts for certain kinds of images.  There are several Error Diffusion dithering methods available, including Floyd-Steinberg, Stucki, Burkes, Sierra, and Stevenson Arce.

Note: This option is only available for images with a bit depth of 8-bits per pixel or less.

Palette Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the palette to use when creating an image with 8 bits per pixel or less. The palette list includes several predefined palettes including:

 Fixed Palette. This is a proprietary palette with colors uniformly distributed across the set of all 16 million 24-bit colors.

 Optimized Palette. This is a set of colors that optimally represents the colors present in the image.  Different images will usually have different optimized palettes.

 Windows Identity. This palette contains colors used by MS Windows when the screen mode is 256-Colors.

 Netscape Palette. This is the palette used by Netscape browsers.

 MSIE Palette. This is the palette used by the Microsoft Internet Explorer browsers.

 Gray Scale palette. This palette contains 256 shades of gray (like the shades found in a "black and white" photograph).

 Standard VGA Palette. This is the palette used by VGA monitors.

 Uniform Palette. This independent palette, not based on a color-matching system, provides 256 colors that are uniformly spread between red, green and blue.

Color Order Drop-down List box:

Use this drop-down list box to select the color order for an image with 16 or more bits per pixel.

When you change an image's color resolution to 16 bits per pixel, you have the option of specifying either BGR or RGB color order.  Images are typically stored in BGR order.  Do not change this setting unless you are an advanced user.

Open Palette File button:

Use this button to open a LEADViEW palette file (.ltp) created earlier using the Customize Palette Dialog box. Palettes are used only with images with 8 or fewer bits per pixel.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Customize Palette Dialog

Main Menu


Brightness Dialog

Use the Brightness dialog to increase or decrease the brightness of all pixels in the image.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Brightness dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Adjust -> Brightness….

The following are the fields in the Brightness dialog:

Percentage Edit box and Slider:

Use the Percentage Edit box or the slider to set the amount of brightness applied to an image. Positive values makes the image lighter, and negative values make the image darker. Valid values range from –100 to 100.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Contrast Dialog

Use the Contrast dialog to increase the contrast in the image by making bright pixels brighter, and dark pixels darker.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Contrast dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Adjust -> Contrast….

The following are the fields in the Contrast dialog:

Percentage Edit box and Slider:

Use the Percentage Edit box or the slider to set the amount of contrast applied to an image. Positive values increase the contrast, and negative values decrease the contrast. Valid values range from –100 to 100.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Hue Dialog

Use the Hue dialog to shift all the pixels in an image (or in a selection) around a color wheel by the same amount. Therefore, changing red pixels to green will also change green pixels to blue and blue pixels to red.

Hue refers to characteristics of the colors in an image.  Hue is what we typically refer to as "color" or "tint".  For example, you might characterize a hue as being "red" as opposed "orange" or "yellow".

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Hue dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Adjust -> Hue….

The following are the fields in the Hue dialog:

Angle Edit box:

Use the Angle edit box to set the rotation angle of a color wheel. Positive values take red toward green, green toward blue, and blue toward red. Negative values have the opposite effect.  Valid values range from –180 to 180.

Note that a rotation of 180 degree (Positive or Negative) turns the color into its complement.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Saturation Dialog

Use the Saturation dialog to shift the color-intensity of all pixels in an image or in a selection.  Increasing saturation to its maximum results in very deep, vivid colors, while decreasing saturation to its minimum results in a grayscale image (like a "black and white" photograph).

Saturation refers to the intensity of the color. For example, a "deep" red is more saturated than a "pale" or "washed out" red or pink.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Saturation dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Adjust -> Saturation… or press the <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <Q> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Saturation dialog:

Percentage Edit box and Slider:

Use the Percentage Edit box or the slider to set the change in saturation applied to an image. Positive values make the colors deeper or more vivid, and negative values decrease the saturation, and make the colors paler and grayer. Valid values range from –100 to 100.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Gamma Adjustment Dialog

Use the Gamma Adjustment dialog to change the brightness of image pixels, primarily in the mid-range of intensities.  Black and white pixels remain unchanged, while pixels that originally have a mid-range brightness value will be changed the most.  Higher gamma values make the image appear brighter and lower gamma values make the image appear darker.

The gamma adjustment has three components, the red, green, and blue components of the image. You can adjust the color balance of an image by adjusting the red, green and blue components separately. For example, if an image has a red cast to it, decrease the Red component to darken the image slightly, or increase both the Blue and Green components to brighten the image slightly.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Gamma Adjustment dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Adjust -> Gamma… or press the <Ctrl> + <G> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Gamma Adjustment dialog:

Red Channel Edit box:

Use the Red channel edit box to adjust the red component of the image. Higher red values brighten red colors in the image. A preview pane attached to the Red Channel edit box displays the brightness of the red component.  Valid values range from 10 to 500.

Green Channel Edit box:

Use the Green channel edit box to adjust the green component of the image. Higher green values brighten green colors in the image. A preview pane attached to the Green Channel edit box displays the brightness of the green component.  Valid values range from 10 to 500.

Blue Channel Edit box:

Use the Blue channel edit box to adjust the blue component of the image. Higher blue values brighten blue colors in the image. A preview pane attached to the Blue Channel edit box displays the brightness of the blue component.  Valid values range from 10 to 500.

All Channels Check box:

Use the All Channels check box to link or unlink the three color channels. If this box is checked, all channels increment or decrement by the same value. If this box is not checked, each channel can be incremented or decremented individually.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Intensity Detect Dialog

Use the Intensity Detect dialog to change the red, green, and blue components of each pixel to either 0 (minimum) or 255 (maximum), depending on a range that is specified.  If the component value falls inside the specified range, its value is changed to 255; otherwise it is changed to 0.

When used on a grayscale image, any pixels with gray levels falling inside the specified range become white, while any pixels with gray levels outside that range become black.  In other words, the "detected intensities" will appear as white areas on a black background.

On a colored image, the same effect (grayscale -> black/white) is seen in the individual color planes.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Intensity Detect dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Intensity Detect….

The following are the fields in the Intensity Detect dialog:

Low Edit box and Slider:

Use the Low edit box or the slider to set the lower bound of the range.  Valid values range from 0 to 255.

High Edit box and Slider:

Use the High edit box or the slider to set the upper bound of the range. Valid values range from 0 to 255.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


RGB Merge Dialog

Use the RGB Merge dialog box to create a colored image by merging grayscale images.  Each of the source grayscale images is used as one of the color channels in the merged image.

You will have to choose which grayscale images will be used for the source images.  You can choose grayscale images that were generated previously by Split Channels or use new grayscale images.

To display the RGB Merge dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Merge Channels -> RGB….

The following are the fields in the RGB Merge dialog:

Red Drop-down list box:

Use the Red drop-down list box to set the image representing the Red channel.

Green Drop-down list box:

Use Green drop-down list box to set the image representing the Green channel.

Blue Drop-down list box:

Use Blue drop-down list box to set the image representing the Blue channel.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and have LEADViEW create a new image by combining the grayscale images into color channel data.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


CMYK Merge Dialog

Use the CMYK Merge dialog to create a colored image by merging grayscale images together.  Each of the source grayscale images is used as one of the color channels in the merged image.

You will have to choose which grayscale images will be used for the source images.  You can choose grayscale images that were generated previously by Split Channels or use new grayscale images.

To display the CMYK Merge dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Merge Channels -> CMYK….

The following are the fields in the CMYK Merge dialog:

Cyan Drop-down list box:

Use the Cyan drop-down list box to set the image representing the Cyan channel.

Magenta Drop-down list box:

Use the Magenta drop-down list box to set the image representing the Magenta channel.

Yellow Drop-down list box:

Use the Yellow drop-down list box to set the image representing the Yellow channel.

Black Drop-down list box:

Use the Black drop-down list box to set the image representing the Black channel.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and have LEADViEW create a new image by combining the grayscale images into color channel data.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


HSB Merge Dialog

Use the HSB Merge dialog to create a colored image by merging grayscale images together.  Each of the source grayscale images is used as one of the color channels in the merged image.

You will have to choose which grayscale images will be used for the source images.  You can choose grayscale images that were generated previously by Split Channels or use new grayscale images.

To display the HSB Merge dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Merge Channels -> HSB….

The following are the fields in the HSB Merge dialog:

Hue Drop-down list box:

Use the Hue drop-down list box to set the image representing the Hue channel.

Saturation Drop-down list box:

Use the Saturation drop-down list box to set the image representing the Saturation channel.

Brightness Drop-down list box:

Use the Brightness drop-down list box to set the image representing the Brightness channel.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and have LEADViEW create a new image by combining the grayscale images into color channel data.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


HLS Merge Dialog

Use the HLS Merge dialog to create a colored image by merging grayscale images together.  Each of the source grayscale images is used as one of the components in the merged image.

You will have to choose which grayscale images will be used for the source images.  You can choose grayscale images that were generated previously by Split Channels or use new grayscale images.

To display the HLS Merge dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Merge Channels -> HLS….

The following are the fields in the HLS Merge dialog:

Hue Drop-down list box:

Use the Hue drop-down list box to set the image representing the Hue.

Saturation Drop-down list box:

Use the Saturation drop-down list box to set the image representing the Saturation.

Lightness Drop-down list box:

Use the Lightness drop-down list box to set the image representing the Lightness.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and have LEADViEW create a new image by combining the grayscale images into color channel data.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


CMY Merge Dialog

Use the CMY Merge dialog to create a colored image by merging grayscale images together.  Each of the source grayscale images is used as one of the color channels in the merged image.

You will have to choose which grayscale images will be used for the source images.  You can choose grayscale images that were generated previously by Split Channels or use new grayscale images.

To display the CMY Merge dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Merge Channels -> CMY….

The following are the fields in the CMY Merge dialog:

Cyan Drop-down list box:

Use the Cyan drop-down list box to set the image representing the Cyan channel.

Magenta Drop-down list box:

Use the Magenta drop-down list box to set the image representing the Magenta channel.

Yellow Drop-down list box:

Use the Yellow drop-down list box to set the image representing the Yellow channel.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and have LEADViEW create a new image by combining the grayscale images into color channel data.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Histo-Contrast Dialog

Use the Histo-Contrast dialog to increase or decrease the contrast in the image.

This process finds the median brightness of the image or the selection, using the histogram of the image or the selection. It then brightens the pixels with values above the median and darkens the pixels with values below the median. This generally results in better results than normal contrast.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Histo-Contrast dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Histogram -> Contrast….

The following are the fields in the Histo-Contrast dialog:

Percentage Edit box and Slider:

Use the Percentage edit box or the slider to change the intensity of the effect.  Positive values increase the contrast and negative values decrease it. Valid values range from –100 to 100.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit the entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Solarize Dialog

Use the Solarize dialog to apply an effect that mimics the accidental exposure of photographic film to light. It does so by inverting all color data with an intensity value greater than or equal to the threshold that you specify. Setting the threshold to 0 is equivalent to inverting, while setting the threshold to 255 produces almost no change.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Solarize dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Solarize….

The following are the fields in the Solarize dialog:

Threshold Edit box and Slider:

Use the Threshold edit box or slider to set the threshold value. Color data with intensity values greater than or equal to this threshold value will be inverted. Valid values range from 0 to 255.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Picturize Dialog

Use the Picturize dialog to create a tiled version of an image, where each tile, or "cell", in the resulting image is a small version of another image.

The images used for the cells are taken from a set of images in a user-specified directory.

To display the Picturize dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Pixelate -> Picturize….

The following are the fields in the Picturize dialog:

Folder Edit box:

Use the Folder edit box to set the folder where the cell images are located. You can also click the button to the right of the edit box to open the Browse for Folder Dialog, which lets you navigate through your file system to pick your desired folder.

Cell Width Edit box and Slider:

Use the Cell Width edit box or the slider to set the width of the cell. LEADViEW will try to find the best images of that width. Valid values range from 1 to the image width.

Cell Height Edit box and Slider:

Use the Cell Height edit box or the slider to set the height of the cell. LEADViEW will try to find the best images of that height. Valid values range from 1 to the image height.

Resize List box:

Use the Resize list box to indicate how to resize the images in the selected folder. Available options are:

None: Do not resize images. Search for images with the height and width specified in the Cell Height edit box and the Cell Width edit box.

Normal: Resize the images to the height and width specified in the Cell Height edit box and the Cell Width edit box.

Resample: Resize the images to the height and width specified in the Cell Height edit box and the Cell Width edit box. This process is slower than that used in Normal, but results in higher quality images.

Best Fit Check box:

Check the Best Fit Check box to arrange the best fit of cells along the height and width of the image. If this box is checked, then the values in the Cell Width and Cell Height edit boxes are used as a starting point for the actual cell size. The cell sizes are modified so that the size of the last rectangle in a row or column differs from the other rectangles by one. Note that the cell width and height are chosen to be smaller than the values in the Cell Width and Cell Height edit boxes.

For example, if the image is 101x131 and you set 32 for the cell width and height and check the Best Fit Check box, then the actual cell size will be 25x32. The widths of the cells will be 26, 25, 25, 25 (for a total of 101). The heights of the rows will be 33, 33, 33, 32 (for a total of 131). This option should be used if the image width and height are not multiples of the value(s) entered in the Cell Width and Cell Height Edit boxes.

Use Once Check box:

Check the "Use Once" check box to force the picturize effect to use a single image only once. For this option to work you must have enough images in the folder specified to fill all the cells. To determine whether a folder contains enough images, use the Validate Folder button.

Equal Usage Check box:

Check the Equal Usage check box to have the picturize effect use the images in your folder equally, without favoring any image over another. When this is checked, the number of times a single image appears in the cells is equal to the number of times another image appears.

Validate Folder button:

Use the Validate Folder button to count the images in the specified folder and determine whether there are enough images to perform the picturize effect, based on the options you specified. Once this button is pressed a progress bar will appear showing the progress of the counting process. Then a status dialog will appear showing how much images are needed, the number of images in the folder, and whether picturize will complete successfully or not.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu

Browse for Folder Dialog


Contour Filter Dialog

Use the Contour Filter dialog to create a contour diagram of the image in a variety of styles.  Contours lie along lines in the image where the color gradient, or the rate of color change, is high perpendicular to the detected edges, but relatively low along or parallel to the detected edges.  This filter can be used to "find" objects in the image.

To display the Contour Filter dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Edge -> Contour….

The following are the fields in the Contour Filter dialog:

Option Drop-down list box:

Use this drop-down list box to indicate what stage of the contour filter process to complete. Available options are:

Thinned Image	Complete the thinning process.

Linked Image – Black and White	Complete the black and white contour linking.

Linked Image – Grayscale	Complete the 256 grayscale contour linking.

Linked Image – Color	Complete the color contour linking.

Segment Approximation – Color	Complete the color line segment approximation.

Threshold Edit box and Slider:

Use the Threshold edit box or slider to set the gradient magnitude. Valid values range from 1 to 254.  Values in the image that are below the threshold will be considered as background, and will be set to 0.  A lower threshold value provides a better quality image.

Delta Direction Edit box and Slider:

Use the Delta Direction edit box or the slider to set the maximum angle for the thinning algorithm. Valid values range from 1 to 64.  A higher value provides better edge detection and smoother contours.

Maximum Error Edit box and Slider:

Use the Maximum Error edit box or slider to set the error for the approximation algorithm. Valid values range from 0 – 255.  This value is only used when the Option drop-down list box is set to Segment Approximation.  This value controls the algorithm for approximating the contour line segments.  A smaller value will produce shorter line segments and smoother curves.  A higher value will produce longer line segments, but may reduce the approximation of curved edges.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Customize Palette Dialog

Use the Customize Palette dialog box to edit the colors in a palletized image, or to create a palette that can be used by multiple images.

An image’s palette is a table of all of the colors that can be used in that image.  For an image that is 8 bits per pixel, the palette can contain 256 entries.  Each pixel is represented by a number from 0 to 255; that number specifies which color in the table should be used for the pixel color.

You will often need to edit or view an image’s palette directly.  For example, GIF images, which are commonly used on the web, always have a palette, and can contain at most 256 colors.  The quality of an image can depend on which of over 16 million colors are selected for these 256 palette colors.  In addition, GIFs can use one of the palette entries to specify a transparent color.  You may want to hand-pick your palette colors and the one color that is used for transparency.

LEADViEW lets you view and edit an image’s palette with its Customize Palette dialog.

To display the Customize Palette dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Customize Palette… or press the <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <P> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Customize Palette dialog:

Palettes List

The Palette List provides you with some standard palettes:

 System Colors. This palette contains colors used by MS Windows when the screen mode is 256-colors.

 Netscape Palette. This is the palette used by Netscape browsers.

 MSIE Palette. This is the palette used by the Microsoft Internet Explorer browsers.

 Gray Scale Palette. This palette contains 256 shades of gray (like the shades found in a "black and white" photograph).

 Standard VGA Palette. This is the palette used by VGA monitors.

 Uniform Palette. This palette contains a set of colors uniformly distributed across the set of all 16 million 24-bit colors.

When the active image in LEADViEW is an 8-bit image or less, the "Image Colors" item is added to the palette list, which is the specific palette found in the active image.  Use this item to view the current colors in the active image.

Left Pane

The Left Pane of the Customize Palette dialog displays the colors that you can add to your palette.  This pane is not editable and it has two modes of display; it either displays lists of individual colors (palettes), or continuous colors based on a particular color model.  When displaying palettes, you can select multiple individual colors using the <Ctrl> key, and a range of consecutive colors using the <Shift> key.

Right Pane

The Right Pane of the Customize Palette displays the list of colors that you have chosen.  (It is empty until you begin to choose colors).  After selecting a single color or a group of colors in the left pane, add them to your list of chosen colors in the right pane by clicking the Add button or by dragging them into the right pane.  You can re-arrange the colors in the right pane by clicking and dragging them to their new position, or by using one of the pre-defined sort methods listed in the Sort drop-down list box.

Color Value Display

The RGB components and corresponding HTML form of the currently selected color are displayed at the bottom of the dialog.

Color Model Button:

The Color Model button will list the color models available for the left pane and can switch the display mode in the left pane.

Clicking this button will activate a menu with the following options:

 Palette. This option is the default. Choosing this option will activate the Palette drop-down list box and display the available colors in the Left Pane.

 HSB-Hue Based. Choosing this option will open the HSB-Hue Based Model in the Left Pane.

 HSB-Wheel Based. Choosing this option will open the HSB-Wheel Based Model in the Left Pane.

 HSB-Brightness Based. Choosing this option will open the HSB-Brightness Based Model in the Left Pane.

 RGB-3D Additive. Choosing this option will open the RGB-3D Additive Model in the Left Pane.

 CMY-3D Subtractive. Choosing this option will open the CMY-3D Subtractive Model in the Left Pane.

 CMYK-3D Subtractive. Choosing this option will open the CMYK-3D Subtractive Model in the Left Pane.

 Lab-Device Independent. Choosing this option will open the Lab-Device Independent Model in the Left Pane.

Replace Button:

The Replace button replaces a number of selected items in the Right pane with the same number and order of selected items from the Left pane.

Add and Add Options

The Add button adds an item or a group of items selected in the Left pane into the Right pane.  Items can also be added from the Left pane to the Right pane by dragging them.  Notice that the mouse cursor changes into a hand [image] when dragging the item(s).  If the cursor is not in a valid insert area, the cursor will turn into [image].

The Add Options button (the down arrow button to the right of the Add button) activates a menu that contains options indicating where those items should be added. The default is "At the end".  The options included in this menu are as follows:

 At the End. Add all insertions at the end of the list in the Right Pane.

 After Selected. Add all insertions after the selected item. Notice that if no items are selected in the Right Pane the Add operation will fail and an error message will appear. The same thing will happen if more than one item is selected in the Right Pane.

 Before Selected. Add all insertions before the selected item. Notice that if no items are selected in the Right Pane the Add operation will fail and an error message will appear. The same thing will happen if more than one item is selected in the Right Pane.

Note:	If "After Selected" or "Before Selected" is chosen, the add operation will only be performed if there is exactly one item selected in the right pane.

Remove and Remove Options

The Remove button removes the selected item(s) from the Right Pane.  Items can also be removed by dragging them out of the Right Pane. Notice that the mouse cursor changes into [image] to indicate the item is about to be deleted.

The Remove Options button (the down arrow button to the right of the Remove button) activates a menu that allows you to set whether or not to be notified by a warning message when an item is about to be removed.  The option included in this menu is as follows:

 Confirm. When this option is checked a confirmation message will appear whenever you remove an item.

Find Closest Button:

The Find Closest button highlights the item in the Right Pane that is the closest match to the item selected in the Left Pane.

Sort

The Sort button allows you to choose a method for sorting items in the right pane depending on their color components.  Clicking the button will activate a menu with the following options:

 HSB. Clicking this option will sort all items in the Right Pane according to their HSB color components.

 HUE. Clicking this option will sort all items in the Right Pane according to the Hue value of their HSB color components.

 Saturation. Clicking this option will sort all items in the Right Pane according to the Saturation value of their HSB color components.

 Brightness. Clicking this option will sort all items in the Right Pane according to the Brightness value of their HSB color components.

 RGB. Clicking this option will sort all items in the Right Pane according to their RGB color components.

 Reverse. Clicking this option will invert the order of all items in the Right Pane.

Apply When Exit Check box:

Check this to set the currently active palette in the Right Pane as the palette for the active image in LEADViEW. This option is only available when the active image in LEADViEW is palettized (of bit-depth 8 or less).

New

Use the New button to empty the Right Pane.

Open

Use the Open button to open a previously saved palette file.  LEADViEW saves its palette files with the ext. ltp.

Save

Use the Save button to save your palette.  If you are starting a new file, the save command will prompt you for the file location and name.

Save as

Use the Save as command to save a palette to a new filename.

Close

Use the Close button to end the dialog, if there are changes unsaved on the Right Pane, a prompt message will appear.

See Also

Main Menu

HSB-Brightness based Model

RGB- 3D Additive Model

Lab- Device Independent Model

HSB-Hue based Model

CMY-3D Subtractive Model

CMYK-3D Subtractive Model

HSB-Wheel based Model


Selection Scale Dialog

Use the Selection Scale dialog to stretch or compress a selection, horizontally and vertically, using factors that you specify.

The old selection is stretched or compressed around its center to form the new selection. Horizontal and vertical scaling factors may be specified independently.

To display the Selection Scale dialog, from the main menu, Selection -> Scale….

The following are the fields in the Selection Scale dialog:

Width Edit boxes:

Use the Pixels or Percentage Edit boxes to set the size by which you want to increase or decrease the selection width. The first edit box is for pixels and the second is for percentage.

To scale the selection by adding or subtracting pixels, specify the number of pixels by which you want to increase (+) or decrease (-) the width of the selection in the pixels edit box. To scale the selection width by specifying a percentage of the current width, specify the scaling percentage in the percentage box. A value of 100% leaves the size unchanged. Values greater than 100% will increase the width of the selection, while values less than 100% will decrease the width of the selection.

Please note that the Percentage value is linked to the Pixel value. If you change the value in the Percentage edit box, the value in the Pixel edit box automatically changes and vice versa.

Height Edit boxes:

Use the Pixels or Percentage Edit boxes to set the size by which you want to increase or decrease the selection height. The first edit box is for pixels and the second is for percentage.

To scale the selection by adding or subtracting pixels, specify the number of pixels by which you want to increase (+) or decrease (-) the height of the selection in the pixels edit box. To scale the selection height by specifying a percentage of the current height, specify the scaling percentage in the percentage box, value of 100% leaves the size unchanged. Values greater than 100% will increase the height of the selection, while values less than 100% will decrease the height of the selection.

Please note that the Percentage value is linked to the Pixel value. If you change the value in the Percentage edit box, the value in the Pixel edit box automatically changes and vice versa.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Selection Resize Dialog

Use the Selection Resize dialog to increase or decrease the dimensions of the selection by a specified number of pixels.

To display the Selection Resize dialog, from the main menu, select Selection -> Resize….

The following are the fields in the Selection Resize dialog:

Resize By Edit box:

Use this to set the number of pixels by which to increase (positive values) or decrease (negative values) the dimensions of the selection.

New Selection As Frame Check box:

Check this to create a frame-like selection for the newly enlarged or contracted selection.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Selection Include/Exclude Color Dialog

Use the Selection Include/Exclude Color dialog to add or remove a color from the current selection.

To display the Selection Include/Exclude Color dialog, from the main menu, Selection -> Include Exclude Color….

The following are the fields in the Selection Include/Exclude Color dialog:

Operation Drop-down list box:

Use this to specify whether to include the selected color, or to exclude it.

Color button:

Click the color picker button to bring up the Color Dialog from which you can select the color that will be included in or excluded from current selection.

Tolerance Edit box:

Use this to set the tolerance value. This value indicates how close a color's RGB values must be to the selected color's RGB values in order to be included or excluded. Valid values are from 0 to 255.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Main Menu


Selection Feather Dialog

Use the Selection Feather dialog to soften the edges, inside or outside the selection, over a specified width.

To display the Selection Feather dialog, from the main menu, select Selection -> Feather… or press the <Ctrl> + <H> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Selection Feather dialog:

Grow Drop-down list box:

Use this to specify whether the feathering should take place inside or outside the selection, or not to do feathering at all (None).  Inside causes the transition to occur inside the original selection boundary and the selection area boundaries remain unchanged.  Outside causes the transition to occur outside the original selection boundary and the selection area grows. None means no feathering is applied, and only Opacity can be changed.

Opacity Edit box:

Use the Opacity edit box to set overall transparency.  Valid values are 1 to 255, with higher values representing more opacity, and lower values representing more transparency.

Size Edit box:

Use this to specify in pixels the width of the fade transition area created around the selection border.

Smoothness Edit box:

Use this to set the step size of the transition.  Smaller values create smoother transitions.

Fade Rate Edit box:

Use this to set a value that indicates how rapidly the transition area goes from transparent to opaque.

Auto Fade Rate Check box:

Check this to use the optimal fade rate for the specified size.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

See Also

Main Menu


Capturing Properties Dialog

Use the Capturing Properties dialog to customize the Video Capture Dialog, and to choose and configure capturing devices.

To display the Capturing Properties dialog, from the Video Capture Dialog toolbar, choose Properties.

The following are the fields in the Capturing Properties dialog:

Video Capture Device Drop-down list box:

Use this to select a video capture device.

Properties Button:

Use this button to bring up the Capturing Device Properties dialog, which lets you set the device options.

Count Edit box:

Use this to set the number of frames to capture.

Delay Edit box:

Use this to set the delay between each capture. The delay is in seconds. A fraction of a second can be set using a decimal number. (e.g. 0.5 = ½ Second).

Note:	Any changes are applied immediately to the Video Capture Dialog.

See Also

Video Capture Dialog


Preferences Dialog

Use the Preferences dialog to set the units of measure in which the image information will be displayed.

To display the Preferences dialog, from the Print Preview Dialog select File -> Preferences…

The following are the fields in the Preferences dialog:

Measurement Units Drop-down list box:

Use this to select a unit of measure. The image size displayed at the bottom right of the preview image in the Print Preview dialog will be given in this unit of measure. Possible options are centimeter (cm), inch, or pixels.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Print Preview Dialog


Abort Dialog

Use the Abort dialog to abort a lengthy operation.

Whenever a lengthy operation is taking place in LEADViEW, the Abort dialog will appear so that user can stop running the process and abort it.

For example, if you applied the Oilify effect to a large image, the Abort dialog will appear, allowing you to abort this operation.  Press Cancel to abort and no effect is applied to image.  The Abort dialog disappears once the process has completed.

You can minimize LEADViEW by minimizing the Abort dialog. Click on LEADViEW in the task bar to restore it. When LEADViEW is minimized, it’ll be automatically restored when the operation is completed.

The following are the fields in the Abort dialog:

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to abort the current operation and return to LEADViEW.

Status

A short message indicating the status of the current process will appear in the center of the Abort dialog. For example, in the figure above, the status of the current process is "Processing".

Percentage Value

Located beside the Cancel button, the percentage of the current process that has been completed is shown. Not all processes indicate how much of the process is done. This is shown only when applicable.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current process that has been completed. Not all processes indicate how much of the process is done. This is shown only when applicable.


Customize Toolbar Dialog

Use the Customize Toolbar dialog box to add and/or remove buttons from your toolbars. You can also use it to rearrange the toolbar’s buttons as needed.

To display the Customize Toolbar dialog, place the cursor over any toolbar, right click and select Customize.

The following are the fields in the Customize Toolbar dialog:

Available toolbar buttons list box:

Use the Available toolbar buttons list box to add new buttons to your toolbar. Items within this pane can be selected using the mouse.

This pane can serve as a placeholder for all available buttons. It also has a separator that you can add between items in the Current toolbar buttons pane. Within the pane, the items are listed using both the button image and the button name.

Current toolbar buttons list box:

Use the Current toolbar buttons list box to view and manipulate the buttons currently installed in the toolbar to be customized.

Within the pane, the items are listed using both the button image and the button name.

Add Button:

Use the Add button to add the selected item from the Available toolbar buttons list box to the Current toolbar buttons list box, and to the toolbar being customized.

Notice that you can also add buttons to the toolbar by dragging them from the Available toolbar buttons list box to the Current toolbar buttons list box.

Remove Button:

Use the Remove button to remove the selected item from the Current toolbar buttons list box and put it in the Available toolbar buttons list box as an available button.

Notice that you can remove an item by dragging it from the Current toolbar buttons list box to the Available toolbar buttons list box.

Close

Use the Close button to close the dialog.

Reset

Use the Reset button to return the toolbar to its original state.

Help

Use the Help button to open the LEADViEW Help File.

Move Up button:

Use the Move Up button to rearrange the buttons within the toolbar being customized. To do this, select the button to be moved and press the Move Up button repeatedly until the toolbar button is in the desired location.

Notice that you can also shift toolbar buttons up by dragging them within the Current toolbar buttons list box.

Move Down button:

Use the Move down button to rearrange the buttons within the toolbar being customized. To do this, select the button to be moved and press the Move Down button repeatedly until the toolbar button is in the desired location.

Notice that you can shift buttons down by dragging them within the Current toolbar buttons list box.


Browse for Folder Dialog

Use the Browse for Folder dialog to set image folders.

The following are the fields in the Browse for Folder dialog:

Browse for images folder:

Use the Browse for images folder pane to go through the folders on your system and select the folder that contains the images to be used.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.


Color Dialog

Use the Color dialog to choose a color to be set on your color picker either by entering the color components in the edits boxes, or using the color models available in LEADViEW.

The currently selected color in the color dialog is visible on the color picker button.

The following are the fields in the Color dialog:

Old Color

The old color is the color displayed at the top left side of the dialog represented in a black rectangle in the image above.

New Color

The new color is the color currently selected by the user. It is displayed right under the old color rectangle.

Note:	The old and the new color could be very useful in comparing the color that was previously selected and the color you want pick.

Display

Use the Display drop-down list box to select the color components to be displayed. Those color components are the labels that identify the edit boxes below the drop-down list box.  Available options are:

RGB.

HSB.

HLS.

CMY.

CMYK.

Lab.

Model

Use the Model button [image] to choose how you will view the spectrum of available colors.

Clicking this button will open a menu with the following options:

HSB - Hue Based

HSB - Brightness Based

HSB - Wheel Based

RGB - 3D Additive

CMY - 3D Subtractive

CMYK - 3D Subtractive

Lab - Device Independent

Color Display Edit boxes

Use these edit boxes to edit the component colors numerically, rather than picking a color from the Color Model visual display.

The edit boxes represent the color component currently selected in the Display button.

Notice that changing the edit box values will affect the color model currently previewed.

Color Name

If the color selected has a name this name will appear here.

Color Model Display

Use the Color Model Display to pick your color visually using the spectrum chosen by the Model button.

There are several different interfaces for selecting colors from the Color Model Display:

 A slider is used to set one value, and a 2D plane is used to specify the other components.  The contents of the 2D plane change with the slider value.  This technique is used for HSB-Hue Based, HSB-Brightness Based, and Lab Models

 A circular area (color-wheel) is used for determining the Hue and Saturation, while Brightness is determined by the position of a slider.  This technique is used for the HSB-Wheel based model.

 Three components are set independently by dragging markers along the three axes of the cube.  The selected color is located at the vertex of the box formed by moving these markers.   A slider is also available to move along the line joining the cube origin and the current color.  This technique is used for the RGB-3D and CMY-3D models.

 Three components – Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow, are set independently by dragging markers along three cube axes.  The selected CMY value is located at the vertex of the box formed by moving these markers.  A slider is also available to change the K (black) component.  This technique is used for the CMYK-3D model.

Note:	When an 8-bit (or less) image is active, the Color Model display is replaced with a list of the image’s palette colors.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Working with Color Space Modules


Font Dialog

Use the Font Dialog to set the font name, font style, and font size used when text is drawn on the image.

The following are the fields in the Font dialog:

Font Edit box/ List box:

Use the Font edit box or the list box to set the name of the font to use. The list box contains the names of all available fonts installed on your machine.

Font Style Edit box/ List box:

Use the Font Style edit box or the list box to set the font style. The list box contains all available styles.  The available styles are:

Regular.

Italic.

Bold.

Bold Italic.

Font Size Edit box/ List box:

Use the Font Size edit box or list box to set the size of the font characters, in pixels.

Sample

The Sample pane shows a preview of the selected font.

See Also

Text Options Tab


File Information Dialog

The File Information dialog contains information on the file format, name, compression method, memory requirements, dimensions, and resolution of the image.

The following are the fields in the File Information dialog:

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog.

See Also

Batch Conversion Dialog

Open Dialog


Get Resolution Dialog

Use the Get Resolution dialog to select which resolution in a PCD file to load. PCD (Photo CD) files can contain several sizes (resolutions) of the same image.  This dialog box will automatically appear when you select a PCD image to open.

The following are the fields in the Get Resolution dialog:

Resolution Drop-down list box:

Use the Resolution drop-down list box, to select the resolution of the image to open.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Open Dialog


WMF Import Resolution Dialog

Use the WMF Import Resolution Dialog to set the DPI, height and width of the image. WMF files contain an assortment of graphics objects that are converted to an editable image, or an array of pixels, when loaded by LEADViEW. This dialog is displayed when you open a WMF file.

The following are the fields in the Image Parameters dialog:

DPI Edit box:

Use the DPI edit box, to specify the dpi (dots per inch).

Width Edit box:

Use the Width edit box, to specify the image width. Changing this value will affect the values in the DPI and Height Edit boxes.

Height Edit box:

Use the Height edit box, to specify the image height. Changing this value will affect the values in the DPI and Width Edit boxes.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and save the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Open Dialog


Advanced JPEG 2000 Options Dialog

JPEG 2000 (Joint Photographic Experts Group) is a wavelet-based compression stored in a hierarchical format that contains several stored resolutions of the image in the same file without duplication. For that reason, a JPEG 2000 compressed image can then be sent to a device in the resolution that best fits, without additional storage overhead.

LEADVIEW provides support for loading and saving the JPEG 2000 file formats. The JPEG 2000 file formats provide greater flexibility and better image quality, especially at higher compression, than standard JPEG. The greater flexibility includes the ability to control:

the amount of compression

the size and location of tiles

the progression order

These options may be seen in the dialog shown below.

The following are the fields in the Advanced JPEG 2000 Options dialog:

uXOsiz Edit box:

Use the uXOsiz edit box to set the Horizontal offset from the origin of the reference grid to the left side of the image area.

uYOsiz Edit box:

Use the uYOsiz edit box to set the Vertical offset from the origin of the reference grid to the top of the image area.

uXTsiz Edit box:

Use the uXTsiz edit box to set the Width of one reference tile, with respect to the reference grid.

uYTsiz Edit box:

Use the uXTsiz edit box to set the Height of one reference tile, with respect to the reference grid.

uXTOsiz Edit box:

Use the uXTOsiz edit box to set the Horizontal offset from the origin of the reference grid to the left side of the first tile.

uXTOsiz Edit box:

Use the uXTOsiz edit box to set the Vertical offset from the origin of the reference grid to the top of the first tile.

Use YUV ColorSpace Check box:

Check the Use YUV ColorSpace check box to convert an RGB image to YUV space before compressing. (YUV space provides greater compression with higher image quality.)

Derived Quantization Check box:

Check the Derived Quantization check box to use derived quantization rather than expounded quantization.

Use SOP Marker Check box:

Check the Use SOP Marker check box to use SOP Markers.

Use EPH Marker Check box:

Check the Use EPH Marker check box to use EPH Markers.

Decomposition Level Edit box:

Use the Decomposition Level Edit box to set the number of resolution levels in the compressed file.

Guard Bits Edit box:

Use the Guard Bits Edit box to set the number of extra bits to consider when encoding an image. This prevents coding overflow. Possible values are 0 - 7. The default is 2.

Base Mantissa Edit box:

Use the Base Mantissa Edit box to set the base mantissa used for derived quantization.

Base Exponent Edit box:

Use the Base Exponent Edit box to set the base exponent used for derived quantization.

Code Block Width Edit box:

Use the Code Block Width Edit box to set the width of the code block, following wavelet transformation. The value must be a power of 2. It must be at least 4 and less than or equal to 1024.

Code Block Height Edit box:

Use the Code Block Height Edit box to set the height of the code block, following wavelet transformation. The value must be a power of 2. It must be at least 4 and less than or equal to 1024.

Selective AC Bypass Check box:

Check the Selective AC Bypass check box to use "lazy coding mode". If the lazy coding mode is adopted, trailing bit-planes bypass the arithmetic coder except in the normalization pass

ResetContextOnBoundaries Check box:

Check the ResetContextOnBoundaries check box to reset the arithmetic coder's probability models between coding passes. This controls where the end of encoded data is and limits the amount of potentially lost data in the event of a transmission error.

TerminationOnEachPass Check box:

Check the TerminationOnEachPass check box to force the arithmetic code-word generation process to stop on a byte boundary at the end of each coding pass.

VerticallyCausalContext Check box:

Check the VerticallyCausalContext check box to restrict the context models to being vertically causal within each sub-block.

Predictable Termination Check box:

Check the Predictable Termination check box to ensure that the encoder has a predictable termination policy and identifies that the policy was used in the code-stream COD/COC markers. This can be used to implement error detection and concealment.

ErrorResiliencesSymbol Check box:

Check the ErrorResiliencesSymbol check box to ensure that a 4-symbol marker is included for each bit-plane, following the normalization pass.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Default:

Restore the initial settings in the dialog.

See Also

File Save Options Dialog

Save As Dialog


Color Rollup Dialog

Use the Color Rollup dialog to choose a color to be set on your color picker either by entering the color components in the edit boxes or using the color models available in LEADViEW. The currently selected color in the color rollup is visible on the color picker button.

This rollup is available for selecting painting colors, shape and text colors, foreground, border and background colors.  To access the Color rollup, click on it’s corresponding color picker button.  You will find these buttons on each of the Tools Options Tabs.

The following are the fields in the Color rollup dialog:

Display Drop-down list box:

Use the Display drop-down list box to select which color components are to be displayed. Those color components are the labels that identify the edit boxes below the drop-down list box.  Available options are:

RGB.

HSB.

HLS.

CMY.

CMYK.

Lab.

Model

Use the Model button to choose how you will view the spectrum of available colors.  Clicking the button will open a menu with the following options:

HSB - Hue Based

HSB - Brightness Based

HSB - Wheel Based

RGB - 3D Additive

CMY - 3D Subtractive

CMYK - 3D Subtractive

Lab - Device Independent

Color Display Edit boxes

Use these edit boxes to edit the component colors numerically, rather than picking a color from the Color Model visual display.

The edit boxes represent the color component currently selected in the Display button.

Notice that changing the edit box values will affect the color model currently previewed.

Color Model Display

Use the Color Model Display to pick your color visually using the spectrum chosen by the Model button.

There are several different interfaces for selecting colors from the Color Model Display:

 A slider is used to set one value, and a 2D plane is used to specify the other components.  The contents of the 2D plane change with the slider value.  This technique is used for HSB-Hue Based, HSB-Brightness Based, and Lab Models

 A circular area (color-wheel) is used for determining Hue and Saturation, while Brightness is determined by the position of a slider.  This technique is used for the HSB-Wheel based model.

 Three components are set independently by dragging markers along the three axes of the cube.  The selected color is located at the vertex of the box formed by moving these markers.   A slider is also available to move along the line joining the cube origin and the current color.  This technique is used for the RGB-3D and CMY-3D models.

 Three components – Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow, are set independently by dragging markers along three cube axes.  The selected CMY value is located at the vertex of the box formed by moving these markers.  A slider is also available to change the K (black) component.  This technique is used for the CMYK-3D model.

Note:	When an 8-bit (or less) image is active, the Color Model display is replaced with a list of the image’s palette colors.

 Roll Up Button

This dialog can be rolled up to save workspace area.  To roll up, press this button at the right top side of the dialog, or press the <ESC> key while the dialog is in focus..

 Roll Down Button

Use this button to roll down the dialog.  To roll down the dialog, press this button at the right top side of the dialog.

 Roll Up Menu Button

Use this button to display a menu with the following options:

 Roll Up. This is available when the dialog is rolled down. Select this option to roll up the dialog.

 Roll Down. This is available when the dialog is rolled up. Select this option to roll down the dialog.

 Close. Select this option to hide the dialog. You can also do this by double clicking on the Roll Up Menu button, or by pressing the <Esc> key when dialog is rolled up.

See Also

Working with Color Space Modules

Rollup Snapping


Gradient Rollup Dialog

Use the Gradient Rollup dialog to set a gradient of color. This gradient can be used for the shape backgrounds or for region fills.

The gradient style and color are always previewed on the corresponding gradient picker.

To access the Gradient rollup, click on it’s corresponding gradient picker button.  You will find these buttons on the Shape Options Tab and the Fill Options Tab.

The following are the fields in the Gradient rollup dialog:

Style Drop-down list box:

Use the Style drop-down list box to pick the style of your gradient. The style can be customized using the other fields in the dialog box.

Start Color Button:

Use the Start color picker button to choose the starting color of your gradient. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the starting color.

End Color Button:

Use the End color picker button to choose the ending color of your gradient. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Rollup Dialog that will be used to set the ending color.

Angle Slider:

Use the Angle slider to rotate the gradient by a preset number of degrees.

Steps Edit box:

Use the Steps Edit box to set the number of discrete color values used when spanning the gap between the starting and ending gradient colors.

Invert Check box:

Check the Invert check box to reverse the colors in the gradient.

 Roll Up Button

Use this button to roll up the dialog to save workspace area.  To roll up the dialog, press this button at the right top side of the dialog, or press the <ESC> key while the dialog is in focus..

 Roll Down Button

Use this button to roll down the dialog.  To roll down the dialog, press this button at the right top side of the dialog.

 Roll Up Menu Button:

Use this button to display a menu with the following options:

 Roll Up. This is available when the dialog is rolled down. Select this option to roll up the dialog.

 Roll Down. This is available when the dialog is rolled up. Select this option to roll down the dialog.

 Close. Select this option to hide the dialog. You can also do this by double clicking on the Roll Up Menu button, or by pressing the <Esc> key when dialog is rolled up.

See Also

Color Rollup Dialog

Shape Options Tab

Fill Options Tab

Rollup Snapping


Cursor Info Rollup Dialog

Use the Cursor Info Rollup dialog to display information related to the active image. This dialog displays cursor coordinates, the color under the cursor (pixel color right under the mouse cursor), a small preview of the color, and the size of the selection.

This dialog can display information in many formats

To display the Cursor Info Rollup dialog, from the main menu, View > Cursor Info… or press the <Ctrl> + <2> keys.

The following are the fields in the Cursor Info rollup dialog:

First Color Value

Displays the color of the pixel located at the current cursor position.  The color can be displayed in different color models:

RGB

CMY

CMYK

HLS

HSB

Lab

The color can also be displayed as HEX values instead of decimal values.

Second Color Value

This also displays the color of the pixel located at the current cursor position.  The color can be displayed in different color models:

RGB

CMY

CMYK

HLS

HSB

Lab

The color can also be displayed as HEX values instead of decimal values.

You can set the first color to use one color model and set the second value to use another color model so you can see how the colors compare in the two different models.

 Color Space

There are 2 Color Space buttons located at the top-right section of the dialog.  Clicking on either of these buttons will bring up a menu with the following options:

 RGB. Color values displayed in RGB color model.

 CMY. Color values displayed in CMY color model.

 CMYK. Color values displayed in CMYK color model.

 HLS. Color values displayed in HLS color model.

 HSB. Color values displayed in HSB color model.

 Lab. Color values displayed in Lab color model.

 HEX. Color values displayed in RGB color model but with hexadecimal format.

X

This displays the X coordinate of the cursor, relative to image's origin. This can be displayed in centimeters, inches or pixels.

Y

This displays the Y coordinate of the cursor, relative to image's origin. This can be displayed in centimeters, inches or pixels.

W

This displays the width of the selection or shape being drawn on the image. This can be displayed in centimeters, inches or pixels.

H

This displays the height of the selection or shape being drawn on the image. This can be displayed in centimeters, inches or pixels.

 Coordinate System

This button is located in the bottom-right section of the dialog.  Clicking on this button will bring up a menu with the following options:

 Pixels. Position and size are displayed in pixels.

 Centimeters. Position and size are displayed in centimeters.

 Inches. Position and size are displayed in inches.

Color Preview Box:

This box previews the color of the pixel located at the current cursor position. When the mouse is not over an image, a cross will be drawn to indicate emptiness.

 Roll Up Button

This dialog can be rolled up to save workspace area.  To roll up, press this button at the right top side of the dialog, or press the <ESC> key while the dialog is in focus.

 Roll Down Button

Use this button to roll down the dialog.  To roll down the dialog, press this button at the right top side of the dialog.

 Roll Up Menu Button

Use this button to display a menu with the following options:

 Roll Up. This is available when the dialog is rolled down. Select this option to roll up the dialog.

 Roll Down. This is available when the dialog is rolled up. Select this option to roll down the dialog.

 Close. Select this option to hide the dialog. You can also do this by double clicking on the Roll Up Menu button, or by pressing the <Esc> key when dialog is rolled up.

See Also

Main Menu

Rollup Snapping


Image List Dialog

Use the Image List dialog to choose an image for the use of the corresponding image picker.

This list is available for selecting tube images, tiled images, and texture images used as paintbrush content, shape backgrounds, text backgrounds, region fills, and paper textures.  Also you can find it in the Add Border, Add Frame, and Underlay dialogs.

To access the image list dialog, click on it’s corresponding image picker button.

The contents of the image list can be changed using the Directories Dialog box, depending on the images included in the list. For example, the image list available in the Add Frame Dialog box are thumbnails of frame images, that can be changed using the Add Frame images tab of the Directories dialog.

Image Items

Use scrollable list of Image Items to browse through the available images to select the desired image.  Select an image by clicking its button.

Close Button

Use this button to close the list.

Notice that you can also close the Image List by pressing the <Esc> key or by clicking outside the image list.

Note:	After selecting a new image the image list will immediately close.

See Also

Directories Dialog

Paintbrush Options Tab

Shape Options Tab

Fill Options Tab

Text Options Tab

Underlay Dialog

Add Border Dialog

Add Frame Dialog


Print Dialog

Use the Print dialog to print the current active image.

To display the Print dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Print… or press the <Ctrl> + <P> key combination.

The following are the fields in the Print dialog:

Name Drop-down list box:

Use the Name drop-down list box to select your preferred printer device from the listed devices.

Properties Button:

Click the Properties button to bring up the printer device customization dialog. This dialog is specific for each printer.

Status

Displays information about the selected printer's status.

Type

Displays information about the selected printer's type.

Where

Displays information about the printer's location.

Comment

Displays a comment if available.

Print Range

Use this to specify which page(s) to print.

Copies

Depending on the printer driver, you can specify the number of copies to be printed of the same image.

OK

Use the OK button to print and close the dialog box.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog without printing.


Histogram Dialog

Use the Histogram dialog to view a Histogram of the image’s intensity levels. A histogram is a graph of the intensity distribution for red, green, blue, and grayscale (Master) values in an image.

The horizontal axis represents the intensity values of the image from lowest intensity to highest intensity.

The vertical axis indicates the number of occurrences for each intensity value, which is the number of pixels having each value.

An Intensity Range bar, which is aligned under the graph, shows the intensity range. This is designed to help you visually, by viewing the intensity value at a certain position.

To display the Histogram dialog, from the main menu, select Image -> Histogram….

The following are the fields in the Histogram dialog:

Histogram Chart View

This view plots the Histogram graph. The horizontal axis represents the intensity values and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels at each intensity value.

The view can plot histograms of red, green, blue and grayscale values.

When you move the cursor over the view, it’ll turn into the [image] histogram selection cursor. As you move over the Histogram Chart View, information about the intensity and pixel count at the current cursor location will be shown.

Also you may select a range of intensity values by clicking on the view and dragging left or right, the selected range will be highlighted, and the corresponding information will be shown.

Intensity Range Bar

This is located right under the Histogram Chart View and shows the colors in the intensity range This is designed to help you visually, by viewing the color of the intensity value at a certain position. For example the colors of the intensity values of the master channel ranges from black to white as shown in the figure above.

Channel Drop-down list box:

Use this to display the histogram for the selected color channel. Available options are: Master, Red, Green, and Blue.

View Drop-down list box:

Use the View drop-down list box to choose a graph style. Available options are:

 Area. This plots enclosed solid areas.

 Line. This plots only the outlines.

Mean

Displays the mean intensity value in the image for the corresponding channel.

Median

Displays the median intensity value in the image for the corresponding channel.

Total Pixels

Displays the total number of pixels in the image.

Level

When the mouse cursor is moved over the Histogram Chart View this box will show the corresponding intensity value. If a range of intensity values is selected in the Histogram Chart View, this box will show the range in form of "start...end". For example if the intensity ranges from 0 to 128 are selected, the box will read 0..128.

Count

When the mouse cursor is moved over the Histogram Chart View this box will show the corresponding pixel count for the current intensity value. If a range of intensity values is selected in the Histogram Chart View, this box will show the summation for all pixels count for that range.

Percentage

When the mouse cursor is moved over the Histogram Chart View this box will show the cumulative number of pixels at or below the current intensity value. This value is expressed as a percentage of the total pixels. When the range of intensity values is selected in the Histogram Chart View, this box will show the cumulative number of pixels that belong to the selected range, expressed as a percentage of the total pixels.

Close

Use the Close button to close the dialog box.

Note:	If an image has a selected area, the Histogram dialog will show histogram information for the selection only.

Note:	Use the Histogram dialog to help you examine the distribution of pixels across the range of intensity values. When pixels are distributed over most of the range of intensity values, then you can apply color-processing options correctly.

See Also

Local Histo-Equalize Dialog


Stitch Dialog

Use the Stitch dialog to combine one or more images (objects) on a single new image. Each thumbnail image will be called an object and you can use more than one copy of each one. After you move the objects to the new image, you can arrange, resize, and edit them. Many tools and commands enable you to have full control over the objects and the new composed image.

To display the Stitch dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Calculations -> Stitch….

The following are the fields in the Stitch dialog:

Workspace View

This view is the main workspace in which to edit the new image and objects. The view can be zoomed and scrolled using the Scroll Bars, View Menu Commands and Pan Window. The view can also be set to "Zoom to Fit" mode.

The image is viewed centered inside the workspace; areas outside the image are filled with a Xs.

Objects List View

On the left side of the Stitch dialog, you will find thumbnails of all the opened images in LEADViEW.  Select the objects you wish to add to the new image from this list.  Click on the thumbnail of an object to select it.  The currently active thumbnail image appears pressed and outlined.

To add an object you can double-click on it or left-click on it while holding the <Ctrl> key down.

To replace a selected object you can left-click another one while holding the <Shift> key down.

Objects Properties Pane

On the right side of the Stitch dialog, you will find a space where some of the selected object’s properties are listed. This will ease object management by allowing you to change any property. For example you can change the selected object's opacity by setting the value in the Opacity edit box or using the arrow keys.

This pane also contains the "Match Aspect Ratio" check box. This is a global option which determines if the aspect ratio of the object should be taken into consideration.

When there are no objects selected, the properties will be disabled.

For more information, refer to Objects Properties Pane

 Pan Window Activator

To display the Pan Window for the image, click and hold the Pan Window Activator Button at the lower-right corner of the Workspace view window (between the horizontal and vertical scrollbars). This is the button with the four arrows on it.

 Exit & Export

This button exits the Stitch dialog, and exports the composed image to LEADViEW. The image will be opened as a new document.

 Export to HTML Map Creator

This button exports the composed image to the HTML Map Creator Dialog, and sets a bounding area for each object on the image.

Exit

The Exit option in the File Menu exits the Stitch dialog.  You can also press the <Alt>+<F4> keys to exit. If any changes have been made to the image, the Stitch dialog will ask if you’d like to save your work.

 Zoom to fit

Use this to view the image with normal scale. Choose View > Fit always or press the Zoom to fit button to toggle the Workspace View fitting mode on or off. When Zoom to fit mode is on, the workspace view will be resized automatically to fill the available space. For example, resize the whole dialog and the view will be resized automatically.

This mode is canceled when the Zoom to Normal option is applied.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this to view the image fitted to its window. Choose View > Normal (1:1) or press the Zoom to Normal button to view the image with normal scale on the workspace view. If the view was in Zoom to fit mode, then clicking this will turn off the Zoom to fit mode.

 Zoom In

Use this to increase the magnification of the previewed image. Choose View > Zoom In.

This increases the image’s Zoom without changing the size of the window.

 Zoom Out

Use this to decrease the magnification of the previewed image. Choose View > Zoom Out.

This decreases the image’s Zoom without changing the size of the window.

 Attributes

Use this to display the Image Attributes Dialog, which lets you customize the image’s attributes like width, height and background color.

 Fit to Object(s)

Use this to fit the image to the contents (objects).  The image will grow or shrink as necessary to hold all objects.

 Rotate

Use this to rotate the image, but not the objects on it. This can also be accomplished by selecting Image -> Rotate 90 or pressing the corresponding button in the Image Toolbar.

 Clear All

Use this to remove all objects from the image.

 Move To Previous

Use this to select an object so that you can edit it and see its properties. Select this option repeatedly, until the desired object is selected.

 Move To Next

Use this to select an object so that you can edit it and see its properties. Select this option repeatedly, until the desired object is selected.

 Flip Vertically

Use this to flip the object vertically. To flip an object vertically, choose Object -> Flip -> Vertically from the menu or press the corresponding button in the "Object toolbar".

 Flip Horizontally

Use this to flip the object horizontally. To flip an object horizontally, choose Object -> Flip -> Horizontally from the menu or press the corresponding button in the "Object toolbar".

 Rotate CW

Use this to rotate objects in increments of 90° clockwise. To rotate an object clockwise, select the object to rotate, choose Object -> Rotate 90° CW or press the corresponding button in the "Object toolbar".

If the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is checked, the image will keep its aspect (height to width) ratio.

 Rotate CCW

Use this to rotate objects in increments of 90° counter clockwise. To rotate an object counter-clockwise, select the object to rotate and choose Object-> Rotate 90° CCW or press the corresponding button in the "Object toolbar".

If the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is checked, the object will keep its aspect (height to width) ratio.

 Scale to Fit

Use this to stretch the object to fit the entire image.

If the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is checked, the object will keep its aspect (height to width) ratio.

 Scale Normal (1:1)

Use this to view the object at its original size. Click this button in the toolbar or select Object -> Scale -> Normal. The object will be centered with its original size restored.

 Edit

Use this to begin editing the selected object. When editing begins the edit frame will be shown instead of the dotted frame, and the point handles will be shown.  Available options are:

 Move: click and drag the object within the image area to move it.

 Resize: click and drag the upper left or lower right corner of a rectangle, square, or circle area to resize the object.

 Edit Points: click and drag any of the points along a polygon to move them.

 Accept Changes: double-click on an image to exit editing mode and apply the changes.

 Cancel Changes: right-click on an image or choose another tool to exit editing mode and discard the changes.

 If editing results in too small an object, it will be discarded.

If you edit an object using the Object -> Edit command, when you finish editing, the "Select Tool" will be selected.

 Delete

Use this to delete the current selected object. The object will be removed from view.

 Duplicate

Use this to clone the selected object (make copy of it).  The new copy will be placed over the original object.

 Auto Arrange

Use this to have LEADViEW automatically arrange your objects. It divides the image into sections of equal size and places an object in each section.

This option may alter image sizes. If the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is not checked, it may alter the objects' aspect ratios (stretch the object to a new height or width).

 Align Center Bottom

Use this to align the object with the center bottom of the image.

 Align Center Top

Use this to align the object with the center top of the image.

 Align Centered

Use this to align the object with the center of the image.

 Align Left Bottom

Use this to align the object with the left bottom of the image.

 Align Left Center

Use this to align the object with the left center of the image.

 Align Left Top

Use this to align the object with the left top of the image.

 Align Right Bottom

Use this to align the object with the right bottom of the image.

 Align Right Center

Use this to align the object with the right center of the image.

 Align Right Top

Use this to align the object with the right top of the image.

 Order Bring To Front

Use this to change the Z-Order of an object so that it will be placed in front of all other objects. Note that when an object is selected, it is automatically brought to the front.

 Order Send To Back

Use this to change the Z-Order of an object so that it will be placed behind all other objects.

 Tiling Options

Use this to display the Tiling Options Dialog, which lets you control the tiling properties of an object.

 Select Tool (Default Tool)

Use this to select the Select Tool. When you click on an object to select it, the currently selected object is surrounded by black and white moving marquee bounding rectangle.  The selected object’s information is displayed on the dialog’s right aligned Objects Properties Pane where you can customize the object’s properties.

Clicking outside an object will deselect any selection, and double-clicking on object will set it in Edit Mode.

Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the Select cursor [image].

 Edit Tool

Use this button to perform the same operations as the  Edit button [image], discussed above.

 Delete Tool

Use this to delete the selected object. Select this tool and then click on the object to be removed. Selecting this tool changes the cursor to the Delete cursor

 Create Tool

Use the Create Tool to create an object. Click on the image in the workspace view to create one corner of the object. Drag the cursor until the area is enclosed, then release the mouse button. Please note that selecting this tool changes the cursor to the rectangle area cursor [image].

Note:	To abort area creation at any time, right-click before releasing mouse button.

Note:	If the created area is too small, it is automatically discarded.

The aspect ratio is maintained when the "Match Aspect Ratio" check box is checked in the Objects Properties Pane.

 Help Topics

Use this to display the help information about this dialog.

Note:	The Caption Dialog will display the image’s dimensions in addition to the zoom level.

See Also

Stitch Dialog Shortcuts

HTML Map Creator Dialog

Image Attributes Dialog

Main Menu

Objects Properties Pane Dialog

Pan Window

Tiling Options Dialog


Image Attributes Dialog

Use the Image Attributes dialog to set the image’s width, height, color depth, and resolution in the Stitch dialog.

To display the Image Attributes dialog, from the Stitch dialog’s main menu select Image > Attributes.

The following are the fields in the Image Attributes dialog:

Width Edit box:

Use the Width edit box to enter the image’s width.  You may use pixels, centimeters, or inches as the unit of measure by choosing from the list box to the right of the edit box.

Height Edit box:

Use the Height edit box to enter the image’s height.  You may use pixels, centimeters, or inches as a unit of measure by choosing from the list box to the right of the edit box.

Resolution Edit box:

Use this to set the resolution of the displayed image.  The default value is 72 pixels per inch.

Depth Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the bit depth for the image.

Image Memory Size

This displays the memory required to hold the new image

Back Color

Use the Back Color picker button to set the background color of the new image. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the background color.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Help:

Show help topics about the Image Attributes Dialog.

See Also

Stitch dialog

Color Dialog


Tile Options Dialog

Use the Tile Options dialog to set the object’s tiling options in the Stitch dialog.

To display the Tile Options dialog, from the Stitch dialog’s main menu, choose Object -> Tiling Options.

The following are the fields in the Tiling Options dialog:

Enabled Check box:

Check this to enable the tiling attribute of an object.

Style Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the tiling style of an object. There are two choices:

 Set Tiles Count: This lets you specify the number of tiles horizontally and/or vertically, so that the object will have the same number of tiles regardless of size.  The size of a tile will be variable.

 Set Tile Size: This lets you specify the width and/or height of a tile, so that the object will have the same sized tiles regardless of number. The number of tiles will be variable.

Set number of horizontal tiles Check box:

Check the check box to indicate that the number of horizontal tiles is set. This option appears only when Set Tiles Count option is selected. The minimum number of tiles is 2. Please note that if the Keep Aspect Ratio Check box has been checked, then either the number of horizontal tiles or the number of vertical tiles can be set, but not both. Checking the Set number of horizontal tiles Check box automatically clears the Set number of vertical tiles Check box.

Number of horizontal tiles Edit Box:

Use this to set the actual number of tiles horizontally. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Set number of vertical tiles Check box:

Check the check box to indicate that the number of vertical tiles is set. This option appears only when Set Tiles Count option is selected. The minimum number of tiles is 2. Please note that if the Keep Aspect Ratio Check box has been checked, then either the number of horizontal tiles or the number of vertical tiles can be set, but not both. Checking the Number of Tiles Vertically Check box automatically clears the Number of Tiles Horizontally Check box.

Number of vertical tiles Edit Box:

Use this to set the actual number of tiles vertically. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Custom Width Check box:

Check the check box to indicate that the width of the tiles is set. This option appears only when Set Tile Size option is selected. The minimum width is 1. Please note that if the Keep Aspect Ratio Check box has been checked, then either the width of the tiles or the height of the tiles can be set, but not both. Checking the Custom Width Check box automatically clears the Custom Height Check box.

Width Edit Box:

Use this to set the actual width of each tile. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Custom Height Check box:

Check the check box to indicate that the height of the tiles is set. This option appears only when Set Tile Size option is selected. The minimum width is 1. Please note that if the Keep Aspect Ratio Check box has been checked, then either the width of the tiles or the height of the tiles can be set, but not both. Checking the Custom Height Check box automatically clears the Custom Width Check box.

Height Edit Box:

Use this to set the actual height of each tile. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Keep Aspect Ratio Check box:

Check this to preserve the aspect ratio of a tile. When this option is selected you can only set number of horizontal tiles or the number of vertical tiles, not both of them.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Help:

Show help topics about the Tile Options Dialog.

See Also

Stitch dialog


Objects Properties Pane

The Object Properties section, along the right side of the Stitch dialog, contains several fields for setting an object's attributes, such as size, position, aspect ratio, and opacity.

Fields are disabled when there are no selected objects in the view (except for the Match Aspect Ratio Check box).

The following are the fields in the Objects Properties section of the Stitch dialog:

Opacity Edit box:

Use this to set the opacity of the selected object. Opacity ranges from 0 – 255, with 255 representing full opacity, and 0 full transparency. For a semi transparent object, set the value to 128.

Left Edit box:

Use this edit box or slider to set the left position of the selected object.

Top Edit box:

Use this edit box or slider to set the top position of the selected object.

Width Edit box:

Use this edit box or slider to set the width of the selected object.

Height Edit box:

Use this edit box or slider to set the height of the selected object.

Match Aspect Ratio Check box:

Check this to preserve the aspect ratio of an object. This controls the creation of an object, stretching an object, auto arranging an object, and object rotation.

See Also

Stitch Dialog


Browse Folder Dialog

Use the Browse Folder Dialog to preview images in a specific folder. This enables better image management since the user can preview an image file before processing it

The dialog can remain open or minimized while you continue working in LEADViEW.

To display the Browse Folder Dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Browse….

The following are the fields in the Browse Folder Dialog:

Thumbnail view

This view displays a collection of thumbnails for the image files found in the specified directory.

A thumbnail is simply a small preview of an image.

When you move the cursor over a thumbnail, it displays a ToolTip with some image information like name, size, dimensions, color depth, and the last modification date.

You can select one or more thumbnails and open them in LEADViEW. You can also rename, delete, copy or move them to another folder.

To select multiple, contiguous thumbnails, click on the first thumbnail, press and hold the <Shift> key and click on the last thumbnail. All thumbnails between the first and the last will be selected. To select multiple, non-contiguous thumbnails, click on the first thumbnail, press and hold the <Ctrl> key and then click on any remaining thumbnails you wish to select.

Folder Edit box:

Use this to set the current folder being browsed. You can type a new folder path (press Enter to Accept), or use the Browse button, to the right of the down arrow button, to choose a new folder.

The Folder edit box will remember a list of previously browsed folders. Click on the down arrow to the right of the box and the list of folders will appear.

File Menu

The File menu consists of the following commands:

Browse

Brings up the Get Directory Dialog, which lets you browse for a new folder.

Exit

Use this to close the dialog.

View Menu

The View menu consists of the following commands:

Sort

Sorts the thumbnails according to the selected Sort option. The current sort option has a check beside it.  The following Sort options are available:

 by Name: thumbnails will be sorted alphabetically according to file name.

 by Type: thumbnails will be sorted alphabetically according to file extension.

 by Size: thumbnails will be sorted according to file size.

 by Date: thumbnails will be sorted according to the last modification date.

 All sorting options are ascending by default. To reverse this order choose the Reversed option.

Select All

Selects all thumbnails in the thumbnail view.

Refresh

Forces the dialog to re-browse the folder. This is required to add thumbnails of newly added files, remove thumbnails of any removed files, and to update changed files.

After refreshing the thumbnail view is up-to-date and reflects the contents of the folder correctly.

Thumbnail Menu

The Thumbnail menu consists of the following commands

Open

Opens one or more of the selected thumbnail files in LEADViEW.

Move

Moves one or more of the selected thumbnail files to another folder.

Copy

Copies one or more of the selected thumbnail files to another or the same folder.

Delete

Deletes one or more of the selected thumbnail files. The files will be transferred to the recycle bin. To delete files permanently, hold the <Shift> key down when you select this command.

Rename

Renames the selected thumbnail file. Naming rules follow the operating system. If an error occurs, an error message will be displayed.

Convert

Brings up the Batch Conversion Dialog for the currently selected thumbnails, which lets you convert the format of the selected thumbnail files.

Generate HTML Photo Album

Brings up the Generate HTML Photo Album Dialog for the currently selected thumbnails, which lets you create an HTML album page for the selected items.

File Info

Displays the Image Information Dialog for the currently selected thumbnail.

Help Menu:

Opens the help file and displays a help topic for the Browse Folder Dialog.

Context Sensitive menus

Thumbnail View has two context sensitive menus:

 View context menu, can be brought up by right clicking on the view, it contains the following commands: Sort by Name, Sort by Type, Sort by Size, Sort by Date, Sort Reversed, Select All, and Refresh. For more information on these menu commands, refer to the View Menu information above.

 Thumbnail context menu, can be brought up by right clicking on a single thumbnail or a group of thumbnails. This contains the following commands: Open, Move, Copy, Delete, Rename, Convert, Generate HTML Photo Album, and File Information. For more information on these commands, refer to the Thumbnail Menu information above.

ToolTips

When the mouse is moved over a thumbnail, the image information of that thumbnail will be displayed as a tip. Information includes name, size, dimension, depth, and modification date.

Thumbnail Cache

The dialog stores a cache file in each directory browsed. This is done to speed up the browsing and thumbnail generation process. The cache file is always checked to be up-to-date, and it occupies a small amount of disk space since it’s compressed. The cache file name is "Cache.lvb".

Status bar

This is located at the bottom of the dialog and displays useful information about the current operation title, progress, and the total number of images found in the browsed folder.

See Also

Image Information Dialog

Batch Conversion Dialog

Generate HTML Photo Album Dialog

Get Directory Dialog


Gaussian Filter Dialog

Use the Gaussian Filter dialog to smooth or blur the active image by applying a Gaussian filter. Each pixel in the image is blurred based on neighborhood pixels.

To display the Gaussian filter, from the main menu, select Effects ->Blur ->Gaussian Blur….

The following are the fields in the Gaussian Filter dialog:

Radius Edit box and Slider:

Use Radius Edit box or slider to set the size of the neighborhood to consider when blurring a pixel.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Unsharp Mask Dialog

Use the Unsharp Mask dialog to sharpen the active image.

To display the Unsharp Mask dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Sharpen -> Unsharp Mask….

The following are the fields in the Unsharp Mask dialog:

Amount Edit box and Slider:

Use the Amount edit box or slider to set the adjustment factor.

Radius Edit box and Slider:

Use the Radius edit box or slider to set the size of the neighborhood to consider when blurring a pixel.

Threshold Edit box and Slider:

Use the threshold edit box or slider to set the threshold value.

Apply Mask on Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the color space in which to apply the mask. There are two choices:

 RGB color space: Apply the mask in the RGB color space.

 YUV color space: Apply the mask in the YUV color space.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Anti Alias Dialog

Use the Anti Alias dialog to apply an anti-aliasing filter to the active image.

To display the Anti Alias dialog, from the main menu, Effects ->Blur -> Anti Alias….

The following are the fields in the Anti Alias dialog:

Mask Size Edit box:

Use the Mask Size Edit box to indicate the size of the anti-aliasing mask. For example, a value of three indicates an anti-aliasing mask of 3 X 3. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Threshold Edit box:

Use the Threshold Edit box to set the threshold value, which indicates which pixels to smooth. Only pixels with values above this threshold are smoothed. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value. The threshold range for 16, 48 and 64-bit bitmaps is from 0 to 65535 and for 12-bit bitmaps the threshold range is from 0 to 4095. Otherwise, it is from 0 to 255. The threshold is applied on channels separately.

Filter Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the type of anti-aliasing filter to use. Available values are:

 Vertically & Horizontally.

 All directions (1).

 All directions (2).

 Diagonally.

 Horizontally.

 Vertically.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Edge Detector Dialog

Use the Edge Detector dialog to apply the proper edge detection filter to the active image.

To display the Edge Detector dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Edge -> Detect….

The following are the fields in the Edge Detector dialog:

Threshold Edit box:

Use this to set the threshold value, which indicates which pixels are edge pixels. If the difference determined for a pixel is greater than this value, the pixel is an edge pixel. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set desired value. The threshold is applied on channels separately.

Filter Drop-down list box:

Indicates the type of edge detection filter to use. Available options are:

 Sobel Vertical.

 Sobel Horizontal.

 Sobel Vertical & Horizontal.

 Prewitt Vertical.

 Prewitt Horizontal.

 Prewitt Vertical & Horizontal.

 Laplace Vertical & Horizontal.

 Laplace general (1).

 Laplace general (2).

 Laplace diagonal.

 Laplace Horizontal.

 Laplace Vertical.

 Gradient North.

 Gradient North-East.

 Gradient East.

 Gradient South-East.

 Gradient South.

 Gradient South-West.

 Gradient West.

 Gradient North-West.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Motion Blur Dialog

Use the Motion Blur dialog to create the illusion of movement in the active image.

To display the Motion Blur dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Blur -> Motion Blur….

The following are the fields in the Motion Blur dialog:

Size Of Blur Edit box and Slider:

Use the Size of Blur Edit box or the slider to set the size of the blur effect, in pixels.

Angle (Degrees) Edit box and Slider:

Use the Angle Edit box or slider to set the direction of the motion.

Unidirectional Check box:

Use this to indicate whether the motion extends only in one direction or in two. If this is checked, the motion blur effect extends only in the direction specified in Angle. If this is not checked, the motion blur effect extends in both directions along the line with that angle. For example, if the Angle is set to 0, the blur effect will occur in the 0 degree direction and the 180 degree direction.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Gray Scale Dialog

Use the Gray Scale dialog to convert the active image to a gray scale image without changing its resolution.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Gray Scale dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Transform -> Gray Scale….

The following are the fields in the Gray Scale dialog:

Color Weight

The Color Weight section contains a Multi-slider, which is used to specify the red, green, and blue color weights. You can change the color weight by moving the slider markers. If you change the position of the first marker from the left you will affect the red and green weights. Changing the position of the second marker will affect the green and blue weights.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Multi-slider Control


Convert To Colored Gray Dialog

Use the Convert To Colored Gray dialog to convert the active image to a gray scale image, and then enhance the color components. This can be used to give images a "sepia" look by adding a blue or brown color.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Convert To Colored Gray dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Transform -> Colored Gray….

The following are the fields in the Convert To Colored Gray dialog:

Color Factors

The Color Factors section contains a Multi-slider, which is used to specify the red, green, and blue color factors.  You can change the color factor by moving the slider markers. If you change the position of the first marker from the left you will affect the red and green factors. Changing the position of the second marker will affect the green and blue factors.

Gray Factors Group

The Gray Factors section contains three edit boxes with an associated slider. There is one edit box and one slider for each of the color factors. Use these edit boxes or sliders to set the red, green, and blue factor of each pixel in the image, after it is converted to gray.

 Red. Use the Red edit box or the slider to set the weight factor of the red color in the gray bitmap.

 Green. Use the Green edit box or the slider to set the weight factor of the green color in the gray bitmap.

 Blue. Use the Blue edit box or the slider to set the weight factor of the blue color in the gray bitmap.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Multi-slider Control


Multiply Dialog

Use the Multiply dialog to multiply the colors in the active image. This increases or decreases the brightness of the image.

To display the Multiply dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Calculations -> Multiply….

The following are the fields in the Multiply dialog:

Factor Edit box and Slider:

Use the Factor edit box or slider to set the multiplication factor.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Local Histo-Equalize Dialog

Use the Local Histo-Equalize dialog to linearize the number of pixels locally in the active image, based on the specified color space.  This can be used to bring out the detail in dark areas of an image, and smooth the edges between blocks.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Local Histo-Equalize dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Histogram -> Local Equalize….

The following are the fields in the Local Histo-Equalize dialog:

Width Edit box:

Use the Width edit box to indicate the width of the local histogram equalizer rectangle. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Height Edit box:

Use the Height edit box to indicate the height of the local histogram equalizer rectangle. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

The Height value must be greater than the Smooth value.

X-Extension Edit box:

Use the X-Extension edit box to set the width of the extension of the local histogram equalizer rectangle. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y-Extension Edit box:

Use the Y-Extension edit box to set the height of the extension of the local histogram equalizer rectangle. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Smooth

Use the Smooth edit box to set the size of the area to be used when smoothing the edges between localized blocks. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Color Space Drop-down list box:

Use this to select which color space to equalize. There are three choices:

 RGB: Linearizes the pixels across the RGB color space.

 YUV: Linearizes the pixels across the YUV color space.

 Gray: Linearizes the pixels per gray level in a gray level representation of the image.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Balance Colors Dialog

Use the Balance Colors dialog to redistribute the RGB values of the active image. This effect will not work on the gray scale images.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Balance Colors dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Adjust -> Balance Colors….

The following are the fields in the Balance Colors dialog:

Red Weight Section

The Red Weight section contains three edit boxes to set the values to use for redistributing the image’s red values.

 Red Edit box: Use this to set the Red component of the red weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

 Green Edit box: Use this to set the Green component of the red weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

 Blue Edit box: Use this to set the Blue component of the red weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Green Weight Section

The Green Weight section contains three edit boxes to set the values to use for redistributing the image's green values.

 Red Edit box: Use this to set the Red component of the green weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

 Green Edit box: Use this to set the Green component of the green weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

 Blue Edit box: Use this to set the Blue component of the green weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Blue Weight Section

The Blue Weight section contains three edit boxes to set the values to use for redistributing the image's blue values.

 Red Edit box: Use this to set the Red component of the blue weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

 Green Edit box: Use this to set the green component of the blue weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

 Blue Edit box: Use this to set the blue component of the blue weight. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Add Bitmaps Dialog

Use the Add Bitmaps dialog to add or average a group of bitmaps to create a new image. This can be done by adding any number of bitmaps from the Available list to the Selected list. You can also Add/Average the same image to itself or to other images repeatedly.

To display the Add Bitmaps dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Calculations ->Add Bitmaps….

The following are the fields in the Add Bitmaps dialog:

Available List

This list contains the names of all opened images in LEADViEW. Notice that the image name selected in the list will be previewed in the small preview window at the right of this list.

Selected List

This list contains all the images names that the user wants to Add/Average. It can contain the same image numerous times.

Add Button:

Use the Add button to add the selected image in the Available list to the Selected List. The image added from the available list can be added before or after the image highlighted in the Selected list. To do this, select the image in the Available list. Select the image in the Selected list, before or after which you wish to add the new image. Click on the down arrow at the end of the Add button. This will display a sub menu containing "Before" and "After". Select the proper item to indicate where to add the new image. Click on the Add button to add the new image to the Selected list.

Remove Button:

Use the Remove button to remove the selected image from the Selected List.

Add All Button:

Use the Add All button to add all the images in the Available List after the selected item in the Selected List.

Remove All Button:

Use the Remove All button to remove all the images items form the Selected List.

Operation Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the operation to perform. There are two choices:

 Add.

 Average.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Preview

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on the Preview view.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on the Preview view.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Remap Intensity Dialog

Use the Remap Intensity dialog to change the intensity values in the active image. You can apply the change to the red, the green, the blue, or all color channels.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Remap Intensity dialog, from the main menu, select Color -> Remap -> Intensity….

The following are the fields in the Remap Intensity dialog:

Channel Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the channel to remap. There are four choices:

 RGB: remap all channels.

 Red: remap the red channel.

Green: remap the green channel.

 Blue: remap the blue channel.

Curve Mode Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the curve mode use when remapping the intensities. There are four choices:

 Curve: remap the selected channel using curve data.

 Linear: remap the selected channel using linear data.

 Exponential: remap the selected channel using exponential data, which is affected by the Factor value.

 Logarithm: remap the selected channel using logarithmic data, which is affected by the Factor value.

Factor Edit box:

Use the Factor edit box to set the factor for the Exponential/Logarithm curve. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Flip Buttons

Use these buttons to flip the curve if the Curve Mode is either Curve or Linear. The following options are available:

 Both. Flip the curve vertically and horizontally.

 Vertically. Flip the curve vertically.

 Horizontally. Flip the curve horizontally.

Reset Button:

Use the Reset button to set the curve of the current channel to default values.

Reset All Button:

Use the Reset All button to set all the channels' curves to default values.

Load Button:

Use the Load button to load an "*.lri" file that contains Remap Intensity curve settings, using the Load dialog. The loaded file will set a new curve for each channel. Therefore you will lose all the curves that you set for all the channels.

Save Button:

Use the Save button to save all the curve settings that you set for all the channels in an "*.lri" file. This lets you set the same curve settings on this same image, or other images, by loading this file.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Curve Control


Remap Hue Dialog

Use the Remap Hue dialog to change hue values in the active image. You can apply the change to Hue, Saturation, or Value channels.

If an image has 8 bits/pixel or less, the dialog will ignore any selections, embedded or floating, and it will apply the effect to the entire image.

To display the Remap Hue dialog, from the main menu, Color -> Remap ->Hue….

The following are the fields in the Remap Hue dialog:

Channel Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the channel to remap.  There are three choices:

 Hue: remaps the Hue channel, for the values within the mask range.

 Saturation: remaps the Saturation channel, for the values within the mask range.

 Value: remaps the Value channel, for the values within the mask range.

Curve Mode Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the curve mode to use when remapping. There are four choices:

 Curve: remaps the selected channel using curve data.

 Linear: remaps the selected channel using linear data.

 Exponential: remaps the selected channel using exponential data, which is affected by the Factor value.

 Logarithm: remaps the selected channel using logarithmic data, which is affected by the Factor value.

Factor Edit box:

Use this to set the factor of the Exponential/Logarithm curve. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Flip Buttons:

Use these buttons to flip the curve if the Curve Mode is either Curve or Linear. The following options are available:

 Both. Flip the curve in vertically and horizontally.

 Vertically. Flip the curve vertically.

 Horizontally. Flip the curve horizontally.

Mask Multi-Slider:

Use the Mask Multi-slider Control to specify the range of values for which to apply the changes specified by the channel, the Curve mode and the factor. The first marker from the left is the minimum value of the range, and the second is the maximum value.

Reset Button:

Use the Reset to set the curve of the current channel to the default values.

Reset All Button:

Use the Reset All button to set all the channels' curves to default values.

Load Button:

Use the Load button to load an "*.lrh" file that contains Remap Hue curve settings, using the Load dialog. The loaded file will set a new curve for each channel. Therefore you will lose all the curves that you set for all the channels.

Save Button:

Use the Save button to save all the curve settings that you set for all the channels in an "*.lrh" file. This lets you set the same curve settings on this same image, or other images, by loading this file.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Curve Control

Multi-slider Control


Hand Wave Dialog

Use the Hand Wave dialog to distort the active image using the wave drawn on the Curve Control and the rotation angle selected.

To display the Hand Wave dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Distort -> Free Hand Wave….

The following are the fields in the Hand Wave dialog:

ScaleEdit box:

Use the Scale edit box to set the wave scaling factor. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value. This value is used to scale the values of the curve.

Length Edit box:

Use this to set the wave length, in pixels, if the wave type is Period. If the wave type is Frequency, then this value is the wave repetition. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Type Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the wave type. There are two choices:

 Period. Applies one or more waves of the specified length to the image.

 Frequency. Applies a number of waves to the image, where the number of waves is given by the value entered in the Length edit box.

Exposed Area Section:

This section contains a drop-down list box and a button for specifying how to fill any exposed areas. Available values are:

 Use Color: Use the color picker button to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the color.

 Stretch Image: Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change: Leave the exposed area as is, without changing it.

Curve Mode Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the curve mode to use. There are two choices:

 Curve: distorts the image using a curve wave.

 Linear: distorts the image using a linear wave.

Flip Buttons:

Use these buttons to flip the curve. The following options are available:

 Both. Flips the curve vertically and horizontally.

 Vertically. Flip the curve vertically.

 Horizontally. Flip the curve horizontally.

Reset Button:

Use the Reset button to set the curve to its default values.

Load Button:

Use the Load button to load an "*.lhw" file that contains Hand Wave curve settings and the angle setting, using the Load dialog. The loaded file will set new curve and angle settings. Therefore you will lose the current curve settings and angle setting.

Save Button:

Use the Save button to save the curve settings and the angle setting that you set in an "*.lhw" file. This lets you set the same curve settings and angle setting for this image, or other images, by loading this file.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Curve Control

Color Dialog


Wind Effect Dialog

Use the Wind Effect dialog to create thin lines, directed along the specified angle, on the active image.

To display the Wind Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Distort -> Wind….

The following are the fields in the Wind Effect dialog:

Strength Edit box and Slider:

Use the Strength edit box or slider to set the size (in pixels) of the thin lines.

Direction (Angle)

Use the Direction edit box or slider to set the direction of the thin lines.

Opacity

Use the Opacity edit box or slider to set the density of the thin lines.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Impressionist Effect Dialog

Use the Impressionist Effect dialog to apply an impressionist painting effect on the active image.

To display the Impressionist Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Artistic -> Impressionist….

The following are the fields in the Impressionist Effect dialog:

Horizontal Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the Horizontal Size edit box or the slider to set the horizontal effect size.

Vertical Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the Vertical Size edit box or the slider to set the vertical effect size.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Cylindrical Effect Dialog

Use the Cylindrical Effect dialog to warp the active image around a cylinder.

To display the Cylindrical Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> 3D Effects -> Cylindrical….

The following are the fields in the Cylindrical Effect dialog:

Cylindrical Type Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the shape of the cylinder. There are two choices:

 Horizontal: This option stretches the pixels along the vertical plane.

 Vertical: This option stretches the pixels along the horizontal plane.

Stretching Amount

Use the Stretching Amount edit box or the slider to set the amount of stretching to apply. Positive values stretch the pixels toward the image edges, depending on the type of cylinder. Negative values stretch the pixels toward the central line of the cylinder.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Polar Effect Dialog

Use the Polar Effect dialog to convert the active image from rectangular to polar coordinates and vice versa.

To display the Polar Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Distort -> Polar….

The following are the fields in the Polar Effect dialog:

Conversion Option Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the conversion type. There are two choices:

 Polar to Rectangular. Converts the image from Cartesian (rectangular) coordinates to polar coordinates.

 Rectangular to Polar. Converts the image from polar coordinates to Cartesian (rectangular) coordinates.

Exposed Area Section

This section contains a drop-down list box and a button to specify how to fill any exposed areas. Available values are:

 Use Color. Use the color picker button; to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the required color.

 Stretch Image. Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change. Leave the exposed area as is without changing it.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Pixelate Effect Dialog

Use the Pixelate Effect dialog to divide the active image into rectangular or circular cells.

To display the Pixelate Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Pixelate -> Pixelate….

The following are the fields in the Pixelate Effect dialog:

Mode Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the cell division shape. There are two choices:

 Rectangle. Divide the image into rectangular cells.

 Radial: Divide the image into circular cells. You can specify the center point of these circular cells by right clicking on the Before view. The pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked. You can also set the pivot point using the X and Y edit boxes in the Pivot section of the dialog.

Type Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the operation type. There are three choices:

 Maximum: fills the cell with its maximum pixel value.

 Minimum: fills the cell with its minimum pixel value.

 Average: fills the cell with its average pixels value.

Width Section:

The width section contains a drop-down list box and an edit box for setting the cell width. In the drop-down list box there are two choices:

 Period. Determines the width of each cell, in pixels. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

 Frequency. Determines the number of cells along the width. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Height Section:

The height section contains a drop-down list box and an edit box for setting the cell height. In the drop-down list box there are two choices:

 Period. Determines the height of each cell, in pixels. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

 Frequency. Determines the number of cells along the height. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position, with respect to the image.

Opacity Edit box:

Use this to set a percentage value that represents how transparent the cells are, compared to the original pixels. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views, with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Zoom Wave Effect Dialog

Use the Zoom Wave Effect dialog to distort the active image with wave zoomed from specified center.

To display the Zoom Wave Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Distort -> Zoom Wave….

The following are the fields in the Zoom Wave Effect dialog:

Frequency Edit box:

Use this to set the number of repeated waves along the radial line. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Phase Edit box:

Use this to set the wave phase shift. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set desired value.

Amplitude Edit box:

Use this to set the zoom wave magnitude. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrow to set the desired value.

Zoom Factor Edit box:

Use this to indicate the percentage the wave grows as it moves from the image center. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Exposed Area Section:

This section contains a drop-down list box and a button for specifying how to fill any exposed areas. Available values are:

 Use Color: Use the color picker button to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the color.

 Stretch Image: Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change: Leave the exposed area as is, without changing it.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Radial Wave Effect Dialog

Use the Radial Wave Effect dialog to distort the active image using a wave radiating from the specified center.

To display the Radial Wave Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Distort -> Radial Wave….

The following are the fields in the Radial Wave Effect dialog:

Type Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the wave length type. There are two choices:

 Period: The value in the Length edit box determines the wavelength as a percent of the image dimensions.

 Frequency: The value in the Length edit box determines the number of waves repeated in the image.

Length Edit box:

Use this to set the wavelength or number of repeated waves. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Phase Edit box:

Use this to set the wave phase shift. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Amplitude Edit box:

Use this to set the radial wave magnitude. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Exposed Area Section:

This section contains a drop-down list box and a button for specifying how to fill any exposed areas. Available values are:

 Use Color: Use the color picker button to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the color.

 Stretch Image. Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change. Leave the exposed area as is, without changing it.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Ripple Effect Dialog

Use the Ripple Effect dialog to warp the active image in concentric rings from the specified center.

To display the Ripple Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> 3D Effects -> Ripple….

The following are the fields in the Ripple Effect dialog:

Frequency Edit box:

Use this to set the number of repeated waves along the radial line. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Phase Edit box:

Use this to set the wave phase shift. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Amplitude Edit box:

Use this to set the wave magnitude. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Attenuation Edit box:

Use this to set the attenuation value for the wave. The attenuation value indicates how rapidly the wave amplitude decays as the wave travels along the radial line. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Exposed Area Section:

This area contains a drop-down list box and a button for specifying how to fill any exposed areas. The drop-down list box contains the following options:

 Use Color: Use the color picker button; to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the color.

 Stretch Image: Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change: Leave the exposed area as is, without changing it.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Punch Effect Dialog

Use the Punch Effect dialog to warp the active image by pinching it toward the center or punching it outward, away from its center.

To display the Punch Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> 3D Effects -> Punch….

The following are the fields in the Punch Effect dialog:

Value Edit box and Slider:

Use the Value edit box or slider to set the amount of stretching to apply. Positive values pinch the image toward its center, and negative values expand the image away from its center.

Stress Edit box and Slider:

Use the stress edit box or slider to set the pinching intensity. This edit box is only available if a positive number is entered in the Value edit box.

Exposed Area Group

This section contains a drop-down list box and a button for specifying how to fill any exposed areas. Available values are:

 Use Color: Use the color picker button to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the color.

 Stretch Image: Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change: Leave the exposed area as is, without changing it.

Rotate Check box:

Check this to rotate the image inside the pinch pattern. It is available only if the Value edit box contains a negative value.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

This view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Bending Effect Dialog

Use the Bending Effect dialog to warp the active image along a curved plane, centered on the pivot point.

To display the Bending Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> 3D Effects -> Bending….

The following are the fields in the Bending Effect dialog:

Value Edit box and Slider:

Use the Value edit box or slider to set the amount of stretching. Positive values stretch the image toward the edges, and negative values stretch the image toward its center.

Type Drop-down list box:

Use this box to set the bending type. There are three types:

 Normal. Stretch the image along the vertical and horizontal planes.

 Horizontal. Stretch the image along the horizontal plane.

 Vertical. Stretch the image along the vertical plane.

Exposed Area Section:

This section contains a drop-down list box and a button for specifying how to fill any exposed areas. Available values are:

 Use Color: Use the color picker button to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the color.

 Stretch Image: Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change: Leave the exposed area as is, without changing it.

Rotate Check box:

Check this to rotate the image inside the arc pattern. It is available only if the Value edit box contains a negative value.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

This view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Spherize Effect Dialog

Use the Spherize Effect dialog to warp the active image around a spherical shape, centered at the pivot point.

To display the Spherize Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> 3D Effects -> Spherize….

The following are the fields in the Spherize Effect dialog:

Value Edit box and Slider:

Use the Value edit box or slider to set the amount of stretching. Positive values stretch the image toward the edges, and negative values stretch the image toward its center.

Exposed Area Group

Specifies how to fill the exposed area, if found.

 Use Color, use the color from color picker button; to select the color that will fill exposed area lift unfilled. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the required color.

 Stretch Image, stretches the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change, leaves the exposed area without changing it.

Rotate Check box:

Check this to rotate the image inside the spherical pattern. It is available only if the Value edit box contains a positive value.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Swirl Effect Dialog

Use the Swirl Effect dialog to produce a swirl pattern in the active image by rotating the image the specified number of degrees about the specified point.

To display the Swirl Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Distort -> Swirl….

The following are the fields in the Swirl Effect dialog:

Swirl Rotation Angle Section:

This section contains an edit box, with slider, and a check box for setting the angle to use when swirling the image. Use the edit box or the slider to set the angle of rotation. Check the Clockwise check box to rotate the image clockwise. Clear the check box to rotate the image counterclockwise.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Radial Blur Effect Dialog

Use the Radial Blur Effect dialog to rotate the active image pixels around the selected center point.

To display the Radial Blur Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Blur -> Radial Blur….

The following are the fields in the Radial Blur Effect dialog:

Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the Size edit box or the slider to set the size of the neighborhood used in blurring. Increasing this value will increase the amount of blurring.

Stress Edit box and Slider:

Use the Stress edit box or the slider to set the blur intensity.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Zoom Blur Effect Dialog

Use the Zoom Blur Effect dialog to blur the active image along radial lines starting from the selected center point.

To display the Zoom Blur Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Blur -> Zoom Blur….

The following are the fields in the Zoom Blur Effect dialog:

Size Edit box and Slider:

Use the Size edit box or slider to set the amount of blur.

Stress Edit box and Slider:

Use the Stress edit box or the slider to set the blur intensity.

 Pivot Section:

This section contains two edit boxes and a display area for setting the pivot point. You can also set the pivot point by right clicking on the Before view. The Pivot point [image] appears on the point you just clicked.

X Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's x-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Y Edit box:

Use this to set the pivot's y-axis position in the image. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Cursor Pos (x,y)

Displays the mouse position with respect to the image.

Center Button:

Use the Center button to center the Before and After views with respect to [image] the pivot point position.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu


Wave Effect Dialog

Use the Wave Effect dialog to distort the active image using two perpendicular waves, of the specified type and at the specified angle.

To display the Wave Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Distort -> Wave….

The following are the fields in the Wave Effect dialog:

Type Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the wave type.  There are two choices:

 Period. Applies one or more waves of the specified length to the image.

 Frequency. Applies a number of waves to the image, where the number of waves is given by the value entered in the Length edit box.

Length Edit box:

Use this to set the wave length, in pixels, if the wave type is Period. If the wave type is Frequency, then this value is the wave repetition. Enter the value directly in the edit boxes or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Mode Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the wave mode. There are four choices:

 Sin. The wave is a Sin (sinusoidal) wave.

 Cos. The wave is a Cosine (sinusoidal wave shifted 90° degrees) wave.

 Square. The wave is a square wave.

 Triangular. The wave is a triangular wave.

Horz Scale Edit box:

Use this to set the size of the horizontal wave as a percentage. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Vert Scale Edit box:

Use this to set the size of the vertical wave as a percentage. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Amplitude Edit box:

Use this to set the magnitude of the waves. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Angle Edit box:

Use this to set the rotation angle of the waves. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Exposed Area Group

This section contains a drop-down list box and a button for specifying how to fill any exposed areas. Available values are:

 Use Color: Use the color picker button to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the color.

 Stretch Image: Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change: Leave the exposed area as is, without changing it.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Color Dialog


Wave Shear Effect Dialog

Use the Wave Shear Effect dialog to shear the active image horizontally or vertically, using the wave drawn on the Curve Control.

To display the Wave Shear Effect dialog, from the main menu, select Effects -> Distort -> Wave Shear….

The following are the fields in the Wave Shear Effect dialog:

Direction Drop-down list box:

Use the Direction edit box to select the shear wave direction. There are two choices:

 Horizontal. Apply the shear wave horizontally.

 Vertical. Apply the shear wave vertically.

Scale Edit box:

Use the Scale edit box to set the amplitude of the wave. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

Exposed Area Section:

This section contains a drop-down list box and a button for specifying how to fill any exposed areas. Available values are:

 Use Color: Use the color picker button to select the color to fill any exposed areas. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the color.

 Stretch Image: Stretch the image edges to fill the exposed area.

 Don’t Change: Leave the exposed area as is, without changing it.

Curve Mode Drop-down list box:

Use this to select the curve mode to use. There are two choices:

 Curve: distorts the image using a curve wave.

 Linear: distorts the image using a linear wave.

Flip Buttons:

Use these buttons to flip the curve. The following options are available:

 Both. Flips the curve vertically and horizontally.

 Vertically. Flip the curve vertically.

 Horizontally. Flip the curve horizontally.

Reset Button:

Use the Reset button to set the curve to its default values.

Load Button:

Use the Load button to load an "*.lsr" file that contains Shear Wave curve settings, using the Load dialog. The loaded file will set a new curve. Therefore you will lose all the current curve settings.

Save Button:

Use the Save button to save curve settings that you set in an "*.lsr" file. This lets you set the same curve settings for this image, or other images, by loading this file.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and apply the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

Before View

This view shows the original image before the dialog applies any changes to it.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

After View

This view shows the original image with the dialog changes applied. This enables the user to see a preview of what the image should look like when the changes are applied.

The view can be dragged when it is not in Zoom to Fit zoom mode.  Place the mouse cursor over the view window (the cursor will change to a hand), then click and drag.

 Zoom to fit

Use this button to fit entire preview images on both the Before and After views.

 Zoom to Normal

Use this button to view images with normal scale on both the Before and After views.

 Preview

Use this button to preview the dialog settings on the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area. This preview only occurs after this button is pressed. For example, after changing the dialog settings, press this button to preview the results of those changes on the image opened in the LEADViEW workspace. If you then make more changes to the dialog settings you will have to press the Preview button again to view those changes. Each time you make changes to the dialog settings you must press this button to view the results of those changes on the original image in LEADViEW. This is only a preview and doesn’t mean that changes have been applied permanently.

 Auto Preview

Use this button to constantly update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area with the changes you made to the dialog settings. This button differs from the Preview button in that pressing this button causes LEADViEW to automatically update the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace as changes are made to the dialog settings, without having to repress the button.

 Reset Preview

Click this button to restore the original image opened in the LEADViEW workspace area to its original state, before any preview operation was applied. This button is active only after applying at least one preview operation by pressing either the Preview or Auto Preview buttons.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current dialog operation that has been completed.

See Also

Main Menu

Curve Control

Color Dialog


Batch Conversion Dialog

Use the Batch Conversion dialog to convert a batch of image files, with different formats, using the specified file format, in the specified folder. This dialog can create new files or overwrite existing files. You can also convert pages in multi-page image files to separate single-page files, using the specified file format.

The Batch Conversion Dialog can convert both Raster and Vector formats supported by LEADViEW to Raster formats. For more information about the supported image file formats, refer to Summary of All Supported Image File Formats.

To display the Batch Conversion dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Batch Conversion….

The following are the fields in the Batch Conversion dialog:

File List

This list will contain the file names you want to convert in the File Name column, and the pages you want to convert from this file in the Selected Pages column. You will see the selected file image previewed in the Preview window. If the file is multi-page, you can browse the pages by clicking on [image] and [image] or inserting the page number you want to preview in the edit box.

 Add Folder

Use this button to display the Browse for Folder Dialog, which lets you select a folder from which to add image files. The files selected in this folder will be added to the File List if they are image files.

If you added files, a dialog with a progress bar and an Abort button will appear. If you press the Abort button, the dialog will disappear and you will see in the File List only the files added before the Abort button was pressed.

 Add

Use this button to display the Add File(s) dialog, which lets you add the files you want by selecting the files and pressing the Add button. These files will be added to the File List if they are image files.

If you added files, a dialog with a progress bar and an Abort button will appear. If you press the Abort button, the dialog will disappear and you will see in the File List only the files added before the Abort button was pressed.

 Delete

Use the Delete button to delete the selected item(s) from the File List.

 Select All

Use the Select all button to select all the items in the File List.

Full Path Check box:

Check this to view the file's full path in the File Name column.

Delete/Overwrite File(s) Check box:

Check this to delete a file from the hard disk after converting it, if it can be deleted. If the file was deleted successfully it will be removed from the File List.

Options Button:

Use the Options button to display the Load Options dialog, which lets you set the pages in the selected file to convert. If the file is a multi-page file, only valid page numbers will be displayed in the Selected Pages column in the File List.

File Info Button:

Use the File Info button to see the selected file's information in the File Information dialog.

File Type Section:

This section includes a list box, a drop-down list box and a button for setting the file formats options used when saving the file(s).

 File Type List box: Use this to select the resulting file format to use when converting files.

 Sub Type Drop-down list box: Use this to select the sub type, if one exists, of the file format selected in the File Type list.

 Options Button: Use the Options button to display the File Save Options dialog, which lets you set the available options for the file format to use when converting the files.

Resulting File(s) Section:

This section contains two radio buttons and a drop-down list box for setting the path and overwrite options to use when saving files.

 Use Original Folder. Select this option to generate all new files in their original folders.

 Folder. Select this option to generate all new files in the path entered in the edit box, or selected from the Browse For Folder dialog.

 Overwrite Drop-down list box. Use this to select how to handle an existing file of the same format when saving a file. There are four choices:

 Ask. A message box appears each time and asks what to do with this file. It also lets you abort all conversion operations.

 Replace. Replaces the existing file with the new file.

 Skip. Skip converting this file and go on to the next file.

 Rename. Give the new file a different file name from the existing file.

Log Report Check box:

Check this to view the Conversion Log-Report Dialog.

Convert Button:

Use the Convert button to start conversion. This will bring up the Abort Batch conversion dialog which lets you cancel the operation. Please note that the files already converted can’t be aborted. When the conversion process has completed, the Selected Pages column in the File List will be reset.

Close

Use the Close button to close the dialog.

See Also

Main Menu

Load Options Dialog

File Information Dialog

File Save Options Dialog

Conversion Log-Report Dialog

Abort Batch conversion Dialog

Browse for Folder Dialog


Load Options Dialog

Use the Load Options dialog to select the pages that you want to convert.

To display the Load Options dialog, from the main menu, select File -> Batch Conversion… and then press the Options button.

The following are the fields in the Load Options dialog:

All Pages Radio Button:

Select this to convert all pages in a multi-page file.

Page(s) Radio Button and Edit box:

Select this to convert only certain pages in a multi-page file. Set the page numbers you want to convert in the edit box. To convert multiple, non-sequential pages, separate the page numbers with a comma ’,’. To convert multiple sequential pages, separate the first page number and the last page number with a dash ’-’.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and accept the pages, as entered.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog.

See Also

Batch Conversion Dialog


File Save Options Dialog

Use the File Save Options dialog to set the available options for the file format to use when converting the files.

To display the File Save Options dialog, from the Batch Conversion dialog, press the Options button in the File Type Section.

The following are the fields in the File Save Options dialog:

Progressive Options Drop-down list box:

Use the Progressive Passes drop-down list box to select the number of passes (scans through the image) used when saving a progressive JPEG, LEAD CMP, interlaced PNG or JBIG file.  This value is not relevant to any other file format.

Progressing Order Drop-down list box:

Use the Progressing Order drop-down list box to select one of the following options:

 Quality–axis order. The image starts out blurry and becomes clearer and more detailed as additional data is decoded.

 Resolution-axis order. The image starts out small and becomes larger as additional data is decoded.  Higher compression ratios achieved by leaving lower resolutions in the file.

 Position–axis order. The image starts out as a series of blocks starting from the top left corner.  Additional portions of the image become visible as more data is decoded.  Image data stored by spatial location.

 Color-axis order. The image starts out gray.  Color is added as more data is decoded.  Image data stored by color channel, starting with channel Y, then U, then V.  If the transform to YUV option is used, the lowest decompressed image level for RGB is grayscale. Otherwise, the output is only the red channel.

Qfactor

Use Qfactor edit box to specify a number that determines the degree of loss in the compression process when saving to an image that uses a lossy compression technique.  Valid values are 2 (highest quality) to 255 (lowest file size), or you can use values from -1 to -9 to specify a preset quality factor.  This only applies to files saved as LEAD CMP or Wavelet, JPEG, JPEG2000, and TIFF with JPEG compression. For more information, refer to Compression Quality Factors.

Multipage

Use the Multipage drop-down list box to indicate how to save a page to a multi-page file. This is used only with TIFF and PCX multi-page files.:

 Overwrite the file.

 Append page to the end of the file.

 Replace page.

 Insert page.

Page

Use the Page edit box to specify the page number in the selected multi-page file where you would like to replace or insert the image. This is only valid if you have specified either Replace page or Insert page in the Multi-page drop-down list box.

Control

Use the Compression Control drop-down list box to select the compression to use when saving the file.  Available options are:

 Lossless compression. Use lossless compression when saving the file. The decoded image will exactly match the encoded image.

 Compression Ratio. Compress the image file using the ratio set in the Comp Ratio edit box.

 Target File Size. Compress the image file to the size specified in the Target Size edit box.

 Use q-factor. Compress the image file based on the value in the QFactor edit box.

Ratio

Use the Compression Ratio edit box to enter the target compression ratio if the Compression Ratio option has been set in the Compression Control drop-down list box. The Compression Ratio value is the ratio of the uncompressed file size to the compressed file size. For example, a value of 25.00 means the uncompressed image file is 25 times as large as the compressed image file.

Target Size

Use the Target Size edit box to enter the desired size of the output file if the Target File Size option has been set in the Compression Control drop-down list box.

Advanced

Use the Advanced button to open the Advanced JPEG 2000 Options Dialog box.  This button appears only If you are saving to a JPEG2000 file type.

Stamp Options group

Use the Stamp Options controls, found on the right side of the dialog box, to save a stamp with the image file. This is only available if the selected image format supports stamps.  LEAD 24-bit and JPEG 24-bit file formats support saving a stamp.  The following are the Stamp Options controls:

 Save Stamp check box. Check this box to save a stamp in the image file.

 8-bit. Save the stamp as 8-bit.

 24-bit. Save the stamp as 24-bit.

 Stamp Width edit box. Enter the width of the stamp to save.

 Stamp Height edit box. Enter the height of the stamp to save.

See Also

Advanced JPEG 2000 Options Dialog

Batch Conversion Dialog

Compression Quality Factors


Conversion Log-Report Dialog

Use the Conversion Log-Report dialog to show a status report on the conversion of each file. If the file was converted successfully, you will see "SUCCESS" in the status column [image]. If the file was not converted successfully, you will see "Failed"  and [image]  Failed in the status column.

The following are the fields in the Conversion Log-Report dialog:

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog.

See Also

Batch Conversion Dialog


Abort Batch Conversion Dialog

Use the Abort Batch conversion dialog to view the progress of the conversion process or to stop the batch conversion process.

The following are the fields in the Abort Batch conversion dialog:

Abort Button:

Use the Abort button to cancel the conversion and close the Abort dialog.

Status

In the dialog center appears a short message indicating the status of the file currently being converted.

Progress Bar

Located at the bottom of the dialog, this progress bar shows the percentage of the current operation that has been completed.

See Also

Batch Conversion Dialog


Curve Control

Use the Curve Control to create a data table in which its values are represented by the curve in the grid. You can change the data values by changing the curve. This control contains two major parts, the Grid and the Angle circle.

This Curve Control is available in several dialogs.

The following are the fields in the Curve Control:

Grid

The Grid is a set of intersecting horizontal and vertical lines. Drawn on top of these lines is a Logarithmic curve, an Exponential curve, a Simple curve or a Linear curve. The Exponential and Logarithmic curves are influenced by a Factor value, which you can set. A Simple curve or a Linear curve is drawn through Control points. Control points are small colored circles you can move by the mouse in order to change the curve. For a Simple curve or a Linear curve, the grid will contain at least two control points, one on each of the two thick lines at the edges of the grid. These are the Edge Control Points, which are two small squares that move only up and down.

You can add a control point to a Simple or Linear curve by left clicking within the grid area, but not on the same vertical line as another control point, as long as the mouse curser is [image]. You can delete any control point, except the edge points, by right clicking on the control point.

To move a control point, place the cursor over the control point, then click and drag to the new position. When you place the cursor over a control point, the mouse cursor will change to [image].

Angle circle

The Angle Circle is drawn round the Grid and contains the Rotate Handle, a small circle drawn in the angle circle. When you move the mouse over the Rotate Handle the cursor changes to [image]. If you move this handle, the grid will rotate around the Curve control center, changing the angle of the curve.

Curve Mode Drop-down list box:

Use this to set the type of curve you want to draw. Available values are:

 Curve. Draw a curved line using the control points available on the grid.

 Linear. Draw line(s) using the control points available on the grid.

 Exponential. Draw an Exponential line using the Factor value.

 Logarithmic. Draw a Logarithmic line using the Factor value.

Factor Edit box:

Use the Factor edit box to set the factor for an Exponential or a Logarithmic curve. Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

See Also

Remap Intensity Dialog

Remap Hue Dialog

Hand Wave Dialog

Wave Shear Effect Dialog


Multi-slider Control

Use the Multi-slider control to set range values for a number of dialogs.

Use the Multi-slider control to specify the following:

Three values where the:

 First value will be the result of subtracting the first marker value from the Multi-slider start value.

 Second value will be the result of subtracting the second marker value from the first marker value.

 Third value will be the result of subtracting the second marker value from the Multi-slider end value.

The Range within two values where the:

 Range beginning value will be the first marker value.

 Range end value will be the second marker value.

How to use

You can change the values by changing the markers' positions.

Changing the markers' positions can be done by dragging the marker to a new position. You can also right click on the marker you want to change and display the Value dialog, which lets you set the new marker value (position).

See Also

Gray Scale Dialog

Convert to Colored Gray Dialog

Remap Hue Dialog


Generate HTML Photo Album Dialog

Use the Generate HTML Photo Album dialog to generate an HTML page that represents an album. The dialog generates thumbnails and converts source link images to the proper format (a format that web browsers can open). The resulting HTML page contains all thumbnails with the image name as a label. Clicking on the thumbnail displays the full size image.

This dialog provides options for customizing the number of columns, background color, and the number of thumbnails / image file format.

The HTML page created will be named "index.htm" and is placed in the specified "Output Folder" found in the HTML options group. The thumbnail images will be placed in the folder specified in the "Output Folder" of the thumbnail section. The converted link images (if any) will be placed in the folder specified in the "Output Folder" of the link images section.

File names of the thumbnails and the converted images remain the same, unless overwriting an existing file is not allowed and the file name must be changed.

The following are the fields in the Generate HTML Photo Album dialog:

HTML Page Options Section:

Output Folder Edit box: Use this to set the folder that will contain the resulting HTML page.

Browse button: Brings up the GetDirectory Dialog, which lets you browse for a new folder. The selected folder will be set in the Output Folder box.

Album Title: Use the Album Title edit box to set the title text that will appear on the HTML album header. If this is blank, PhotoAlbum creates an album without a header title.

Background Color: Use the Background color picker button to select the color that will be used as the HTML album background. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the background color.

Preview in Browser: Check this option to preview the resulting HTML page in a web browser after creating the album. LEADViEW will bring up a web browser window with the HTML album loaded. A web browser must be installed on your system in order to use this option.

Thumbnails Section:

Output Folder Edit box: Use this to set the "thumbnails" folder.

Browse button: Brings up the GetDirectory Dialog, which lets you browse for a new folder. The selected folder will be set in the "thumbnails" Output Folder box.

Overwrite Existing Files check box: Use this to set whether to overwrite any exisiting thumbnails on disk or not. This option is checked by default (overwrite enabled). When overwrite is not checked, new thumbnails are created to avoid overwriting.

Size Section:

Width: Use the Width edit box to set the thumbnails' width in pixels. If the Match Aspect Ratio check box is checked, then this value will indicate the maximum width of a thumbnail and not the exact width.

Height: Use the Height edit box to set the thumbnails' height in pixels. If the Match Aspect Ratio check box is checked, then this value will indicate the maximum height of a thumbnail and not the exact height.

Match Aspect Ratio: Check this to keep the relative proportions of the image (height to width ratio) when creating thumbnails. Clear this to use the height and width set in the Height and Width boxes, without maintaining the aspect ratio when creating thumbnails.

Format Settings Section:

Format: Use this option to select the resulting file format to use when creating thumbnail images. Thumbnails are created in a web browser - compatible format, and copied to the "thumbnails" folder.

Settings: Use the Settings button to change the generated thumbnail format settings. Clicking the Settings button will activate a dialog with various options depending on the currently selected format in the Format list box.

Columns: Use this option to set the number of columns in the resulting HTML album.

Link Images Section:

Link directly to source images check box: Use this to set whether the HTML album should point directly to source images in their original path or not. When linking to source images directly, the dialog will not convert any of link images to a web compatible format. When this option is checked, no other option in this section will be available.

Output Folder Edit box: Use this to set the "images" folder.

Browse button: Brings up the GetDirectory Dialog, which lets you browse for a new folder. The selected Folder will be set in the "images" Output Folder box.

Overwrite Existing Files check box: Use this to set whether to overwrite any exisiting images on disk or not. This option is checked by default (overwrite enabled). When overwrite is not checked, new images are created to avoid overwriting.

Format Settings Section:

Usage Drop-down list box: there are two options:

 Convert All Images: specify this option to convert all images to the selected format.

 Convert incompatible images: specify this option to convert only images that have image formats incompatible with web browsers.

Format: Use this option to select the file format to use when converting link images. Link images are converted to a web browser compatible format, and copied in the "images" folder.

Settings: Use the Settings button to change some options of the selected file format. These options are used when converting link image files. Clicking the Settings button will activate a dialog with different options depending on the currently selected format in the Format list box.

Generate button:

Pressing this button starts the process of creating the HTML photo album. During the process, the Abort Dialog will be shown to show the progress and enable the user to abort the process at any time.

When the process of creating the album is finished, the HTML Output Folder will contain the HTML page, named "Index.html". The thumbnails output folder will contain thumbnail images, and the images folder will contain the link images (unless Link directly to source images check box was checked).

If the Preview in Browser check box is checked, a web browser window with the HTML album loaded will be displayed.

Close

Closes the dialog box.

Help

Use the Help button to open the help file.

See Also:

Get Directory Dialog

JPEG Settings Dialog

GIF Settings Dialog

PNG Settings Dialog

Color Dialog

Abort Dialog


DWF File Format Options Dialog

The DWF format options are required to specify how the DWF vector drawing will be rendered. This dialog is displayed when you open a DWF file.

View port Group:

Width: Use the Width edit box to specify the view port width that should be used to render the vector drawing (you can think of it as the width of the resulting image). In most cases, using the default value will provide the best results, unless you want a specific area of the drawing instead of the whole drawing.

Height: Use the Height edit box to specify the view port height that should be used to render the drawing. This value usually indicates the height of the resulting image. In most cases, using the default value will provide the best results, unless you want to concentrate on a specific area of the drawing.

Mode: Use the Mode drop-down list box to select one of the following:

Use Best: Use the best fit for the width and height values supplied in the Width and Height edit boxes, but do not exceed either value. For example, if the image is 100 x 200 and the viewport values are 600 x 600, the resulting image would be 300 x 600.

Use Width: Use the width value entered in the Width edit box and calculate the height value for the view port. For example, using the image size above, if the Width edit box contains 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 600 x 1200.

Use Height: Use the height value entered in the Height edit box and calculate the width value for the view port. For example, using the image size above, if the Height edit box contains 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 300 x 600.

Use Width and Height: Use the height and width values entered in the Height and Width edit boxes for the view port, stretching the image. For example, using the image size above, if the Width and Height edit boxes contain 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 600 x 600.

See Also

Open dialog


DXF/DWG File Format Options Dialog

The DXF/DWG format options are required to specify how the DXF or DWG vector drawing will be rendered. This dialog is displayed when you open a DXF file or a DWG file.

View port Section:

Width: Use the Width edit box to specify the view port width that should be used to render the vector drawing (you can think of it as the width of the resulting image). In most cases, using the default value will provide the best results, unless you want a specific area of the drawing instead of the whole drawing.

Height: Use the Height edit box to specify the view port height that should be used to render the drawing. This value usually indicates the height of the resulting image. In most cases, using the default value will provide the best results, unless you want to concentrate on a specific area of the drawing.

Mode: Use the Mode drop-down list box to select one of the following:

Use Best: Use the best fit for the width and height values supplied in the Width and Height edit boxes, but do not exceed either value. For example, if the image is 100 x 200 and the viewport values are 600 x 600, the resulting image would be 300 x 600.

Use Width: Use the width value entered in the Width edit box and calculate the height value for the view port. For example, using the image size above, if the Width edit box contains 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 600 x 1200.

Use Height: Use the height value entered in the Height edit box and calculate the width value for the view port. For example, using the image size above, if the Height edit box contains 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 300 x 600.

Use Width and Height: Use the height and width values entered in the Height and Width edit boxes for the view port, stretching the image. For example, using the image size above, if the Width and Height edit boxes contain 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 600 x 600.

Background: Use the Background drop-down list box to select the method of rendering a DWG/DXF drawing. Available values are:

Black on White: The vector drawing will be rendered using a white background and a black pen as default.

White on Black: The vector drawing will be rendered using a black background and a white pen as default.

See Also

Open dialog


PLT File Format Options Dialog

The PLT format options are required to specify how the vector drawing will be rendered. This dialog is displayed when you open a PLT file.

View port Section:

Width: Use the Width edit box to specify the view port width that should be used to render the vector drawing (you can think of it as the width of the resulting image). In most cases, using the default value will provide the best results, unless you want a specific area of the drawing instead of the whole drawing.

Height: Use the Height edit box to specify the view port height that should be used to render the drawing. This value usually indicates the height of the resulting image. In most cases, using the default value will provide the best results, unless you want to concentrate on a specific area of the drawing.

Mode: Use the Mode drop-down list box to select one of the following:

Use Best: Use the best fit for the width and height values supplied in the Width and Height edit boxes, but do not exceed either value. For example, if the image is 100 x 200 and the viewport values are 600 x 600, the resulting image would be 300 x 600.

Use Width: Use the width value entered in the Width edit box and calculate the height value for the view port. For example, using the image size above, if the Width edit box contains 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 600 x 1200.

Use Height: Use the height value entered in the Height edit box and calculate the width value for the view port. For example, using the image size above, if the Height edit box contains 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 300 x 600.

Use Width and Height: Use the height and width values entered in the Height and Width edit boxes for the view port, stretching the image. For example, using the image size above, if the Width and Height edit boxes contain 600, and this mode is selected, the resulting image will be 600 x 600.

Pen Section:

The PLT file format uses 8 pens for drawing; these pens have default values. By modifying the default pens you can change the colors of the drawing and the line thickness. Every pen has two properties to set, color and width:

Number: Use the Number drop-down list box to select the pen to change.

Width: Use the Width edit box to specify the width, in vector drawing units, of the pen selected in the Number drop-down list box.

Color: Use the color picker button to select the color of the pen selected in the Number drop-down list box. Clicking the color picker button will activate a Color Dialog that will be used to set the desired color.

See Also

Open dialog


Get Directory Dialog

Use the Get Directory dialog to set image folders.

The following are the fields in the Get Directory dialog:

 Go To Last Folder Visited

Use the Go To Last Folder Visited button to move to the last visited folder. (This button is only available on Windows 2000 and later versions).

 Up One Level

Use the Up One Level button to move up one folder as you navigate.

 New Folder

Use the New Folder button to create a new folder.

 View Menu

Use the View Menu button to select the view in the list of the folders and files, the view will be Large Icons, Small Icons, List, Details, or Thumbnails.  (This button is only available on Windows 2000 and later versions).

Look in Drop-down List box:

Use the Look in drop-down list box to select the drive or folder where your images are stored.

When you select a drive or folder from the Look in list, the content of the selected drive or folder will appear in the list below the Look in drop-down list box.

Selected box:

The Selected box will display the full path to the folder that contains the images in the list.

Select

Use the Select button to close the dialog and select the current folder.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Browse Folder Dialog

Generate HTML Photo Album Dialog

General Preferences Dialog


JPEG Settings Dialog

Use the JPEG Settings dialog to change the JPEG image settings.

The following are the fields in the JPEG Settings dialog:

Compression Drop-down list box:

Use this to select which JPEG compression format will be used. There are three choices:

 JPEG File Interchange Format with YUV 4:4:4 color space. This is the default format, and has the highest quality.

 JPEG File Interchange Format with YUV 4:2:2 color space.

 JPEG File Interchange Format with YUV 4:1:1 color space.

Progressive Check box:

Use this to control the appearance of an image as it is being loaded. There are two choices:

 Standard (unchecked): the image is displayed in consecutive lines, one line at a time, from top to bottom.

 Progressive (checked): the image is displayed incrementally in several passes, and detail is added each time. Use this option with larger images so that the viewer can get an idea of how the image looks while waiting for it to download.

QFactor Edit box:

Use the edit box to set the Quality Factor value. Valid values are between 2 (highest quality) and 255 (smallest file size). Enter the value directly in the edit box or use the arrows to set the desired value.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and set the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Generate HTML Photo Album Dialog


GIF Settings Dialog

Use the GIF Settings dialog to change the GIF image settings.

The following are the fields in the GIF Settings dialog:

Color Depth Drop-down list box:

Use this to select a standard color depth to be used with the generated GIF image. Possible color depths for GIF images are 1-bit per pixel (2 color) to 8-bits per pixel (256 colors). Using fewer colors results in smaller files, but also reduces the quality of the image.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and set the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Generate HTML Photo Album Dialog


PNG Settings Dialog

Use the PNG Settings dialog to change the PNG image settings.

The following are the fields in the PNG Settings dialog:

Color Depth Drop-down list box:

Use this to select a standard color depth to be used with the generated PNG image. Possible color depths for PNG images are 1-bit, 4-bits, 8-bits, and 24-bits per pixel. Using fewer colors results in smaller files, but also reduces the quality of the image.

OK

Use the OK button to close the dialog and set the changes.

Cancel

Use the Cancel button to close the dialog and discard the changes.

See Also

Generate HTML Photo Album Dialog


Working with Color Space Modules

LEADViEW supports working with the following color modules:

HSB-Hue Based Model

HSB-Brightness Based Model

HSB-Wheel Based Model

RGB - 3D Additive Model

CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

CMY - 3D Subtractive Model

Lab - Device Independent Model

Image Colors Palette


HSB-Hue Based Model

In the HSB color space:

 H stands for Hue.

 S stands for Saturation.

 B stands for Brightness.

Three numbers representing Hue, Saturation, and Brightness can be used to uniquely identify each color in the spectrum.

Hue is what we usually refer to informally as "color".  For example, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, and Violet are all different hues.

Saturation refers to vividness or deepness of a color.  For example, a deep fire engine red is very saturated, while a pale pink, which may have the same hue, is very unsaturated.  When all of the saturation is removed from a color, it becomes gray.

Brightness refers to the lightness or darkness of a color.

See Also

How to Use HSB-Hue Based Model

HSB-Brightness Based Model

HSB-Wheel Based Model

RGB – 3D Additive Model

Lab – Device Independent Model

CMY – 3D Subtractive Model

CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

Color Rollup Dialog

Color Dialog


How to Use HSB-Hue Based Model

1.	Use the rainbow colored slider on the right to pick a hue.  The 2D plane on the left will change to show all available colors with that hue value.

2.	Click on the 2D plane to select the new color.

Notice that colors on the plane become more saturated as you go from left to right, and become brighter as you go from bottom to top.


HSB-Brightness Based Model

In the HSB color space:

 H stands for Hue.

 S stands for Saturation.

 B stands for Brightness.

Three numbers representing Hue, Saturation, and Brightness can be used to uniquely identify each color in the spectrum.

Hue is what we usually refer to informally as "color".  For example, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, and Violet are all different hues.

Saturation refers to vividness or deepness of a color.  For example, a deep fire engine red is very saturated, while a pale pink, which may have the same hue, is very unsaturated.  When all of the saturation is removed from a color, it becomes gray.

Brightness refers to the lightness or darkness of a color.

See Also

How to Use HSB-Brightness Based Model

HSB-Hue Based Model

HSB-Wheel Based Model

RGB – 3D Additive Model

Lab – Device Independent Model

CMY – 3D Subtractive Model

CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

Color Rollup Dialog

Color Dialog


How to Use HSB-Brightness Based Model

1.	Use the colored slider on the right to pick brightness.  The 2D plane on the left will change to show all available colors with that brightness value.

2.	Click on the 2D plane to select the new color.

Notice that colors on the plane change in hue as you go from left to right, and become more saturated as you go from bottom to top.


HSB-Wheel Based Model

In the HSB color space:

 H stands for Hue.

 S stands for Saturation.

 B stands for Brightness.

Three numbers representing Hue, Saturation, and Brightness can be used to uniquely identify each color in the spectrum.

Hue is what we usually refer to informally as "color".  For example, Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, and Violet are all different hues.

Saturation refers to vividness or deepness of a color.  For example, a deep fire-engine red is very saturated, while a pale pink, which may have the same hue, is very unsaturated.  When all of the saturation is removed from a color, it becomes gray.

Brightness refers to the lightness or darkness of a color.

See Also

How to Use HSB-Wheel Based Model

HSB-Hue Based Model

HSB-Brightness Based Model

RGB – 3D Additive Model

Lab – Device Independent Model

CMY – 3D Subtractive Model

CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

Color Rollup Dialog

Color Dialog


How to Use HSB-Wheel Based Model

1.	Select a point on the Color Wheel on the left of the dialog to set Hue and Saturation.  Notice how saturation decreases as you move towards the center, and hue changes as you move around the wheel.

2.	Move the slider located at the right side of the dialog to change the brightness of the selected color.


RGB - 3D Additive Model

In the RGB color space:

 R stands for Red.

 G stands for Green.

 B stands for Blue.

Three numbers (0 – 255) representing Red, Green and Blue can be used to uniquely identify each color in the spectrum.

If Red, Green, and Blue all have the same value, the resulting color is a shade of gray.  Black is the absence of all color, or Red, Green, and Blue values are all zero, while White is the presence of the maximum amount of all three component colors, or Red, Green, and Blue all have a value of 255.  The RGB model is additive, or light is added to create colors.  This means that as the component color values increase, the resulting color becomes brighter.

See Also

How to Use RGB - 3D Additive Model.

HSB-Hue Based Model

HSB-Brightness Based Model

HSB-Wheel Based Model

Lab – Device Independent Model

CMY – 3D Subtractive Model

CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

Color Rollup Dialog

Color Dialog


How to Use RGB - 3D Additive Model

1.	Use the square markers on each of the cube axes to set the value of one of the component Red, Green, or Blue values.  The selected color is located inside the cube at the place where all three lines join, or at the corner of the box formed by moving the markers that is opposite from the cube's origin ("black").  As you move the markers, you will see the actual selected color under the slider-bar's slider at the right of the dialog, and also in the color picker button when using the Color Rollup or at the new color in the Color Dialog.

2.	You can adjust the brightness, or the distance from the cube origin ("black"), by moving the slider located on the right side of the dialog box.


CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

In the CMYK model:

 C stands for Cyan.

 M stands for Magenta.

 Y stands for Yellow.

 K stands for Black.

Printing processes typically use Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black ink on white paper to reproduce colors.  Unlike RGB color, which is "additive" because light is added by the amount of color in each of the components, CMYK is "subtractive" because light is subtracted from the bright white background whenever color is applied.  This means that higher values for component colors create darker overall colors.

In theory, 100% of each of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow should produce black, but in reality a pure black is not usually obtained.  This is compensated for by introducing the K (black) component.

CMYK, like RGB, is a device dependent color model.

See Also

How to Use CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model.

HSB-Hue Based Model

HSB-Brightness Based Model

HSB-Wheel Based Model

Lab – Device Independent Model

CMY – 3D Subtractive Model

RGB - 3D Additive Model

Color Rollup Dialog

Color Dialog


How to Use CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

1.	Set the Cyan component of the color by moving the Cyan Handle.

2.	Set the Magenta component of the color by moving the Magenta Handle.

3.	Set the Yellow component of the color by moving the Yellow Handle.

4.	Set the Black component of the color by moving the slider at the right of the dialog.


CMY - 3D Subtractive Model

In the CMY model:

 C stands for Cyan.

 M stands for Magenta.

 Y stands for Yellow.

This color model is used in the three-color printing process. The CMY model is the inverse of the RGB model, with values ranging from 0 to 255.

See Also

How to Use CMY - 3D Subtractive Model.

HSB-Hue Based Model

HSB-Brightness Based Model

HSB-Wheel Based Model

Lab – Device Independent Model

RGB – 3D Additive Model

CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

Color Rollup Dialog

Color Dialog


How to Use CMY - 3D Subtractive Model

1.	Set the Cyan component of the color by moving the Cyan Handle.

2.	Set the Magenta component of the color by moving the Magenta Handle.

3.	Set the Yellow component of the color by moving the Yellow Handle.

Note:	You can adjust the color brightness using the slider located at the right side of the dialog.


Lab - Device Independent Model

In the Lab Model (also known as CIELab or CIE L*a*b*)

 L stands for Lightness.

 a stands for red/green chrominance.

 b stands for yellow/blue chrominance.

The Lab color model was developed in 1931 by La Commision internationale de L’Eclairage (CIE).  It is device independent, and uses synthetic primary colors to more closely model the way the human eye perceives color.

See Also

How to Use Lab - Device Independent Model.

HSB-Hue Based Model

HSB-Brightness Based Model

HSB-Wheel Based Model

RGB – 3D Additive Model

CMY – 3D Subtractive Model

CMYK - 3D Subtractive Model

Color Rollup Dialog

Color Dialog


How to Use Lab - Device Independent Model

1.	Set the L-Value by moving the slider located at the right side of the dialog.

2.	Set the chrominance values by selecting a point on the a*b* plane at the left of the dialog.


Image Colors Palette

When the active image in LEADViEW is an 8-bit image or less, the Image colors palette will be the active model within the Color Rollup Dialog and Color Dialog.  All the color models are disabled, and the color component numeric edit boxes are not available.

Because images with 8 bit/pixel or less have a limitation in the number of colors that can be used in the image, any paint operation to the image or any background or foreground color that are set on the image must come from that limited color palette.

Note:	When dealing with 1-bit images, the color picker shows only 2 colors (usually black and white).

See Also

Color Rollup Dialog

Color Dialog